Home

USER`S GUIDE - Belcheff & Associates, Inc.

1. Edit Copy z Edit Model Review k 4 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide 295 C 3 C 4 Single Model File Multiple Model Files Single Set of Results Multiple Sets of Results With Haestad Methods Self Contained Scenarios Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives e Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain one ideally e Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to resources such as input and output data and direct comparisons e Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data from existing scenarios data reuse e Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot in common The scenario management feature developed by Haestad Methods successfully meets all of these objectives A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited number of What If conditions edit only the data that needs to be changed and quickly generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios The Scenario Cycle The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying and editing data but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome file management This process allows you to cycle through any number of changes to the model without fear of overw
2. Pump Curve Operating Point HEAD System Curve FLOWRATE As water surface elevations and demands throughout the system change the static head Hs and headlosses HL vary This changes the location of the system curve while the pump characteristic curve remains constant These shifts in the system curve result in a shifting operating point over time Variable Speed Pumps A pump s characteristic curve is fixed for a given motor speed and impeller diameter but can be determined for any speed and any diameter by applying the Affinity Laws For variable speed pumps these Affinity Laws are presented as O14 hy _ my Q2 na and hia z Where Q Pump flowrate m s cfs h Pump head m ft n Pump speed rpm Effect of Relative Speed on Pump Curve H 4H HEAD FLOWRATE 274 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory Constant Horsepower Pumps During preliminary studies the exact characteristics of the constant horsepower pump may not be known In these cases the assumption is often made that the pump is adding energy to the water at a constant rate Based on power head flowrate relationships for pumps the operating point of the pump can then be determined Although this assumption is useful for some applications a constant horsepower pump should only be used for preliminary studies B 1 10 Pump Type This software currently models six different types of pumps e Design Point One Point A pump can be defin
3. 2 2 3 Edit Element Open an element s dialog Select this item from the pull down menu and click the element you wish to edit Edit Elements Edit a group of elements Select this item from the pull down menu then select a group of elements using the crosshairs or by windowing an area After the elements have been selected right click and the Table Manager dialog will appear The selected elements will be reported in the tables Modify Elements Scale Elements Scale the symbols representing the elements in the current selection set Modify Elements Rotate Labels Rotate the labels of the elements in the current selection set Modify Pipes Insert Bend Insert a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe Element Modify Pipes Remove Bend Delete a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe Element Modify Pipes Remove All Bends Delete all the bends along a selected Pressure Pipe Element Modify Pipes Change Widths Change the Width of the lines representing pipes Change Entities to Pipes Build network elements from AutoCAD entities This command will start the Polyline to Pipe Wizard which will help you convert the desired polylines representing geographical data into pipes A similar command called Import Polyline to Pipe is available in the Stand Alone version under the File pull down menu Find Element Open the Find Element dialog which allows you to locate an element and bri
4. 100 0 feet The GIS Database Connection interface allows you to specify the database unit so that the numbers can be converted from the model unit to the database unit and vice versa Virtually all model inputs and calculated results can be exchanged through the GIS Database Connection system The system not only supports the update of existing model elements and external file records but also the creation and deletion of these elements and records For example by performing a Sync In operation explained in detail below an entire hydraulic model can be built from data stored in a spreadsheet Likewise an empty spreadsheet can be completely populated with data from an existing hydraulic model by performing a Syne Out Operation The spreadsheet can be kept synchronized with the hydraulic model over the course of a project as new elements are added or deleted and the input and output data is modified The GIS Database Connection system has a three tiered architecture e Connections e Table or Shapefile Links e Field Links The first tier is the Connection Connections are organized and managed by Connection Managers There are two types of Connection Managers a Database Connection Manager and a Shapefile Connection Manager As the names imply the first manages connections to databases and spreadsheets and the second manages connections to Shapefiles The Connection Managers are similar and provide an interface for adding editing deleti
5. 122 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors Valves General Tab The General tab for valves is organized into the following sections e General General information about the valve e Valve Characteristics Diameter and minor loss coefficient of the valve e Initial Setting Behavior of the valve at the start of the analysis e Pipes Direction in which the valve is controlling the flow You can reverse that direction by clicking the Reverse button e Calculated Hydraulics Calculated hydraulic data upstream downstream and through the valve e Water Quality Result of the water quality computations at the valve when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed For more information on the data see the topic on each section The Water Quality section is identical for all elements and is described in the Pressure Pipe General Tab section General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the valve such as e Label Unique name referencing the valve in reports error messages and tables e X Coordinate Easting The location of the valve may be represented by an X value or an Easting value depending on individual preferences e Y Coordinate Northing The location of the valve may be represented by a Y value or an Northing value depending on individual preferences e Elevation Elevation of the valve Valve Characteristics Section The Valve Characteristics secti
6. Pipe Database Connection WaterCAD Database Start Node Start Node Stop Node End Node Diameter Diameter mm Material Material Hazen Williams C Roughness Length Length m 8 Repeat the above procedure to set up connections for Pump Reservoir Tank and Valve connections using information from the following tables Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Pump Database Connection __WaterCAD___ Databas Unit i I Design Discharge Design Q l min Maximum Operating Max Head mn Head Maximum Operating Discharge Max Q l min l min Initial Pump Status Initial Status i Reservoir Database Connection Tank Database Connection WaterCAD Database Base Elevation Base Elev m m Minimum Elevation Minimum Ele m m ital HOL mia Eem Om Maximum Elevation Maximum Elev m m PRV Database Connection WaterCAD Database Unit X Y Elevation Diameter Diameter mm Initial HGL nite rade m Setting m Initial Valve Status Initial Status J The Table Type for this connection is PRV 78 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Database Connection Editor x Database Connection Synchronization Options m Database Connection Connection Label Lesson 7 Part 2 Table Links Database File Database Table Junction Pressure Junction Pipe Pressure Pipe Edit Pump Pump Reservoir Reservoir Duplicate Tank Tank alveg Y
7. Specify the liquid to be modeled in the Project Options dialog 12 1 5 Constituent Properties Certain friction methods i e Manning s Hazen Williams were developed experimentally An editable library of constituents is provided Constituents are used in water quality analyses where the tracking of the growth or decay of a constituent is desired Constituents are defined with the following properties e Label Name of the constituent as it will appear in choice lists e Bulk Reaction Reaction rate constant used to model reactions of the constituent within the bulk flow This value is used as the default bulk reaction rate constant for all pipes and tanks This constant has units of per unit time typically day e Wall Reaction Reaction rate constant used to model reactions that occur with the material along the pipe wall This value is used as the default wall reaction rate constant for all pipes This constant has units of length per unit time typically m day or ft day e Diffusivity Molecular diffusivity of the constituent This value is only used when pipe wall reactions are considered in the water quality analysis Diffusivity has units of length squared per unit time typically m s or ft s e Unlimited Concentration Check this box if the constituent does not have a limiting concentration or potential If this box is checked the Concentration Limit field will not be available for editing If
8. The purpose of the standard database connections is to provide a powerful yet easy to use method of exposing the model data to external applications using a standard database format Microsoft Access database mdb This method is powerful because it provides you with all the flexibility and functionality of a user defined database connection such as unit conversion and type coercion It is easy to use because it is predefined with all of the standard model data and requires nothing more than a file name to execute The standard database connections are almost identical to user defined database connections with the following exceptions e Standard connections cannot be deleted e The label of a standard database connection cannot be changed e The target database for a standard database connection is determined at the time it is synchronized During a Synchronize In operation you will be prompted to choose an existing Microsoft Access Database mdb During a Synchronize Out you will be prompted for the name of a new Access database If an existing filename is chosen a warning will indicate that the existing file will be overwritten e The field names of the external database tables are editable from within the Table Link editor e The Database Type on the Table Link editor cannot be changed e Standard connections can be reset to their factory default values To do this select a standard connection from the list in the Database Conn
9. Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained during Undo and Redo transactions A custom model element has certain native text entities associated with it for displaying label and annotated property values These associated label and annotation entities may be edited separately from the model element itself However most drawing edits made directly to a model element will be applied in the appropriate fashion against its associated label and annotation entities Thus if you drag an element to a new location the annotation and label locations will update as well 15 5 2 AutoCAD Commands When running in AutoCAD mode Haestad Methods products make use of all the advantages that AutoCAD has such as plotting capabilities and snap features Additionally AutoCAD commands can be used normally For example Haestad Methods elements and annotation can be manipulated using common AutoCAD commands 15 5 3 Explode Elements When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode running the AutoCAD explode command will transform all Haestad custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities When a Haestad custom entity is exploded all associated database information is lost Be certain to save the exploded drawing under a separate filename Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the model network You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals who do not own
10. e Cost e User Data The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections By breaking up alternatives into these different types we give you the ability to mix different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario Scenarios are composed of alternatives as well as other calculation options allowing you to compute and compare the results of various changes to your system Alternatives can vary independently within scenarios and can be shared between scenarios There are two kinds of alternatives Base alternatives and Child alternatives Base alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system Child alternatives inherit data from base alternatives or even other child alternatives and contain data for one or more elements in your system The data within a child alternative consists of data inherited from its parent and the data altered specifically by you local data When you first set up your system the data that you enter is stored in the various base alternative types If you wish to see how your system will behave for example by increasing the diameter of a few select pipes you can create a child alternative to accomplish that You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters and another with smaller diameters There is no limit to the number of alternatives that you can create Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze Once
11. www hag ad COM A M ETHIO D S S USER S GUIDE WaterCAD v4 for Windows 1986 2000 Haestad Methods Inc All rights reserved WaterCAD v4 User s Guide First Printing This book is published by Haestad Methods Inc and is intended for civil engineers and hydraulic modelers including professional engineers technicians and students This book may not be copied photocopied reproduced translated or converted to any electronic or machine readable form in whole or in part without prior written approval of Haestad Methods Inc Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Haestad Methods Inc CulvertMaster Cybernet FlowMaster PondPack SewerCAD StormCAD and WaterCAD The following are trademarks of Haestad Methods Inc HECPack POND 2 Graphical HEC 1 Graphical HEC Pack Haestad Methods is a registered tradename of Haestad Methods Inc AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc ESRI is a registered trademark of Environmental Systems Research Institute Inc All other brands company or product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders haestad METHODS 37 Brookside Rd Waterbury CT 06708 1499 Voice 203 755 1666 FAX 203 597 1488 e mail info haestad com Internet http www haestad com Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents Preface Chapter 1 Orientation 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 15 What Is WaterCAD What is New in
12. 6 Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button Water quality analysis can only be performed for extended period simulations Constituent Analysis A constituent is any substance such as chlorine and fluoride for which the growth or decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction coefficient A constituent analysis determines the concentration of a constituent at all nodes and links in the system Constituent analyses can be used to determine chlorine residuals throughout the system under present chlorination schedules or can be used to determine probable behavior of the system under proposed chlorination schedules To configure for a constituent analysis 1 Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button 2 Activate the Extended Period radio button 174 Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 3 Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis 4 Select the Constituent radio button 5 Assuming you have not already set up a Constituent alternative for this scenario including the selection of the constituent go to the Alternatives tab click the ellipses or New button next to the Constituent scroll down list and add or edit a Constituent alternative Specify the Constituent which is defined in the Constituent Library and accessed by clicking the ellipsis button You are missing a few Back in the Alternatives tab choose the desired
13. In the Create Project File As dialog double click the Lesson folder enter the file name MyLesson1 wcd for your project and click Save The Project Setup Wizard will open Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 31 3 1 2 1 Double click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD Open A the Global Options tab accessed from the Tools Options pull down menu Since we will be working in metric units click the Unit System selection box and select System International Click OK 2 Choose Open on the File pull down menu When prompted do not save changes to the current drawing If the Select File dialog opens move to step 3 Otherwise do the following Press the Esc key At the command prompt type filedia press the Enter key to enter the command and then enter a new value of 1 Choose Open from the File pull down menu again and do not save changes to the current drawing Note that the fieldia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialogs or simply at the command prompt 3 Select the existing AutoCAD file Lessonl dwg from the Wtrc Lesson folder With the drawing open select File Save As from the pull down menu In the Save Drawing As dialog double click the Lesson folder enter the filename as MyLesson1 dwg and click Save to save the file in your Wtrc Lesson directory 4 Now select the Layout Elements tool B in the WaterCAD toolbar Then move the cursor ont
14. J AutoCAD mode is an available feature level Contact us to upgrade your WaterCAD Stand Alone version to include the AutoCAD integration feature level 2 1 2 WaterCAD Main Windows Both the WaterCAD Stand Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface have many components common to Windows based programs The following figures illustrate some of the important areas that make up the WaterCAD Stand Alone and AutoCAD 2000 interfaces the WaterCAD main window looks fairly similar in AutoCAD R14 and AutoCAD 2000 WaterCAD Stand Alone Interface Wh WaterCAD by Haestad Methods Iof x File Edit Analysis View Tools Report Help Pull down Menus Toolbars Drawing Pane Scroll Bars gt gt Status Bar A E oil Background OFF x 9 980 16 y 10 047 52 ft Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 13 WaterCAD AutoCAD 2000 Interface ERLERNTE AutoCAD Tool Bars WaterCAD Tool Bars Drawing Pane Mi A Al i Status Bar utoCAD Command Line 245 4283 5 5143 0 0000 Scroll Bars SHORONOOLINN SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAP OTRACK LWT MODEL Notice that many of the window components such as the menus and toolbars are very similar for the Stand Alone editor and AutoCAD Other features such as the command line are only available in AutoCAD For more information regarding the various functions and behaviors of AutoCAD please refer to Au
15. Pull down Menus As with any Windows based program the menu system provides easy access to many features Items can be accessed by clicking the desired menu text or by pressing the Alt key to activate the menus and then pressing the key for the underlined letter of the menu item you wish to access For example to open an existing file you can use the mouse to select File Open or you can press the Alt and F keys Alt F then O on the keyboard New Ctrl N Ctrl O Toolbars The toolbar buttons offer one click access to some of the most commonly used features giving you even quicker passage to the most frequent actions For example to open an existing file the equivalent of selecting File Open from the pull down menus simply click the File Open Button i Shortcut Keys Shortcut keys are the keyboard equivalent of toolbars Key combinations usually a simultaneous application of the Ctrl Control key and a letter key can provide instant access to common features If a shortcut is available for a menu item it will be indicated in the menu itself For example to open an existing file the equivalent of selecting File Open from the menus you can simply press the Ctrl and O keys Ctrl O at the same time Command Line The command line is a special area that is not available in Stand Alone mode This area enables you to type commands directly rather than using the menus toolbars or shortcut keys For exam
16. The tolerance that you specify in Step 2 will also be used for T intersection processing Polyline to Pipe Wizard Step 4 Optional This step allows you to optionally convert AutoCAD blocks to nodes If you would like to convert blocks to nodes activate the Yes toggle A table with two columns will appear allowing you to map the AutoCAD blocks you would like to convert to any of the available node element types The AutoCAD block column provides you with a list of available blocks to convert The Element column provides you with a list of available node element types 234 Chapter 14 Exchanging Data with CAD Software 14 2 14 2 1 For each AutoCAD block you would like to convert specify the type of node element you would like to create When you select an AutoCAD block the preview pane will display the graphical representation of that block This step will be skipped if there are no AutoCAD Blocks in your drawing Polyline to Pipe Wizard Step 5 Before performing the conversion you may wish to configure your prototypes with default data During the conversion process elements will be created using the specified defaults Click a button to configure the defaults for the associated element Polyline to Pipe Wizard Step 6 Specify the layers that contain the entities you would like to convert Use the Preview button to preview the elements on the selected layers This step can be u
17. Todini E and S Pilati A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks Computer Applications in Water Supply Vol 1 Systems Analysis and Simulation edited by Bryan Coulbeck and Chun Hou Orr Research Studies Press LTD Letchworth Hertfordshire England The Linear System Equation Solver The Conjugate Gradient method is one method that in theory converges to an exact solution in a limited number of steps The Conjugate Gradient working equation can be expressed for the pressure network system of equations as Ax b where x HK 1 1 ak k b WoiN Qk AA 0H G AniQ The structure of the system matrix A at the point of solution is z A A2 NA11 A412 A2DA42 and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yields a total working matrix A that is 272 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory e Symmetric e Positive definite e Stieltjes type Because of the symmetry the number of non zero elements to be retained in the matrix equals the number of nodes plus the number of links This results in a low density highly sparse matrix form It follows that an iterative solution scheme would be preferred over direct matrix inversion in order to avoid matrix fill in which serves to increase the computational effort Because the system is symmetric and positive definite a Cholesky factorization can be performed to give REL where L is the lower triangular with positive diagonal eleme
18. e Changing Column Display Properties With the Table window open right click in the heading area of the column you wish to change and choose the Properties menu item The current column properties will be displayed in the Set Field Options dialog Refer to the section on Local Units for additional information e Changing Column Headings With the Table window open right click the column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit Column Label Refer to section on Changing Column Headings for additional information Changing Column Headings To change the label of any column in the Table window right click the column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit Column Label from the context menu The backslash character can be used to insert a line break wherever you want the title to be split into multiple lines If you enter an empty label the column heading will be restored to the default label Abbreviated Labels Using label abbreviations will allow columns to take up less space This will permit more data to fit on each page when printing a report To toggle the Use Abbreviated Labels option on and off select Options Use Abbreviated Labels in the Table window Changing Column Display Properties You can change the display properties e g units precision of any numeric column in the Table window Right click the label of the column that you wish to change and select Properties from the pop up menu This opens t
19. 42 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons B 3 3 Scenario Base OF x Altematives Calculation Results Notes aa Scenario Base Iteration Summary Balanced Trials Flow Summary Flow Supplied 1 086 l min Flow Demanded 411 l min Flow Stored 675 l min Boundary Summary R 1 Reservoir Emptying Cee tte 3 You can view results by opening individual element dialog boxes clicking the Report button to generate detailed reports and graphs for the individual elements as well as through output tables color coding profiling contouring and annotation For example open the editor for the PRV and click the Report button Select Detailed Report from the menu Scroll and page through the report to view the Calculated Results Summary Notice that the PRV is throttling except for hours 18 to 20 when the fire occurs and the downstream pressure setting can no longer be maintained See Lesson 5 on reporting results for more information 4 Save this project before proceeding to Lesson 3 Lesson 3 Scenario Management One of WaterCAD s many powerful and versatile project tools is Scenario Management Scenarios allow you to calculate multiple what if situations in a single project file You may wish to try several designs and compare the results or analyze an existing system using several different demand alternatives and compare the resulting system pressures A scenario is a set of alternatives while a
20. 6 7 GO Button 171 Grade Line Energy 267 Hydraulic 267 Gradient Algorithm 269 Derivation 269 Graph Options 203 Graph Setup 193 Graphic Annotation 21 200 Graphical Editor 99 Graphical Layout AutoCAD 238 Stand Alone 99 Groundwater Well 254 Grouping Elements 101 Selection Sets 103 H Haestad Methods 5 8 Hastad Methods Software 305 CulvertMaster 306 307 FlowMaster 307 PondPack 306 SewerCAD 305 306 StormCAD 306 WaterCAD 305 Hazen Williams Equation 276 Coefficients 291 Roughness Values 290 Headloss 313 Coefficient 207 Headloss Gradient 314 Help 5 6 29 Button 23 Menu 23 Technical Support 8 Tutorials 7 HGL 267 268 Input Mode 92 Horse Power Pump 120 Hydrants 256 Hydraulic Analysis 167 Options 175 Hydraulic Grade 314 Hydraulic Grade Line 267 Hydraulic Grade Setting 314 Hydraulically Close Tanks 256 Hydropneumatic Tank 254 Import 16 Command 88 Cybernet 248 249 250 251 Database 213 Database and Shapefile Data Created in V3 253 DXF Background 17 DXF Files into AutoCAD 235 EPANET 252 KYPIPE 252 Microsoft Access Database 16 Polyline to Pipe 16 Shapefile 16 Shapefile Link Editor 225 Spot Elevations 16 252 WaterCAD 16 17 245 WaterCAD file 17 Import Export Tips 247 Importing Model Data Using a Database Connection 72 Importing Model Data Using a Shapefile Connection 65 Inactiv
21. 87 90 Setup 3 90 238 Drawing Options 93 Global Options 90 Problems 4 Project Options 92 Prototypes 132 SewerCAD 305 Shapefile 221 222 223 224 225 Format 228 Import 16 Shapefile Connection 221 222 224 225 Editor 222 Example 228 Export Example 227 Export Wizard 226 Import Example 225 Import Wizard 223 Link Wizard 223 Manager 221 Synchronization Options 224 225 Wizard 221 Share Fields 136 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects 227 Shortcut Keys 14 Shortcut Keys 14 Shutoff Point 120 317 Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method 269 Size 95 317 See also Diameter Size Elements AutoCad 241 Smoothing Contours 195 Snap Menu AutoCAD Mode 243 Software Registration 4 Solutions to Modeling Problems 253 Sort Custom 145 Tables 144 Source Pattern 176 177 Tracing 174 Source Identification 318 See also Trace Sparse Matrix 269 272 Splitting Pipes 101 Spot Elevations 195 196 252 Stand Alone Mode AutoCAD Mode 11 Standard Database Import Export 213 Standard Extended 274 Starting Elevation 317 Status 27 29 Bar 13 26 27 Log 203 Pane 90 Status Pane 317 Steady State Analysis 167 Sticky Tools 91 Storage Node 317 Storage Volume Active 318 Total 318 StormCAD 306 328 Index Stretch 102 Sub Menu 317 Suggestions 8 Support 8 Symbol Size Multiplier 94 Visibility 95 Visibili
22. Both the Stand Alone graphical editor and the AutoCAD interface perform actions through the WaterCAD model server This use of a common central model enables both modes to perform the same functions with the same behaviors For example graphical layout and model management are virtually identical between the two modes Because of the common WaterCAD model server model data is easily shared between AutoCAD and Stand Alone modes One advantage of Stand Alone mode is that your interaction is more streamlined and dynamic by virtue of the fact that the editing environment is a dedicated network editor Also since AutoCAD is not needed to run in Stand Alone mode less system resources and memory are required A significant advantage of the AutoCAD mode is that you can create and model your network directly within your primary drafting environment This gives you access to all of AutoCAD s powerful drafting and presentation tools while still enabling you to perform WaterCAD modeling tasks like editing solving and data management This relationship between WaterCAD and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of model features and provides the full array of output and presentation features available in AutoCAD This facility provides the most flexibility and the highest degree of compatibility with other CAD based applications and drawing data maintained at your organization 12 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window
23. Concentration at node k mg l Lj Length of link j m ft Q Flow rate in link j m s ft s Q External source flow into node k m s ft s Ce External source concentration into node k mg l The boundary condition at a variable level tank with an incoming link i can be expressed as Cy t t Where C t V t Vrht Q t C Li t Qit Vr t Cr t Concentration of the fully mixed tank mg I Volume of the tank mg I 286 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory Q Flow rate in link j m s ft s An outgoing link i of a tank is assumed to receive the full mixed tank concentration C 0 t t Cr t These transport equations are solved over the distributed range of volume states that are generated automatically using the water quality solver s DVEM algorithm implementation Once the hydraulic model has been solved for the network the velocities are known and the mixing at nodes is known Using this information the water quality behavior can be derived using a numerical method B 3 7 Water Quality Modeling Approaches There are several theoretical approaches available for the solution of water quality models These methods can generally be grouped as either Eulerian or Lagrangian in nature depending on the volumetric control approach that is taken Eulerian which is the method used by this program divides the system into fixed pipe segments and then tracks the changes that occur as water flows through these segmen
24. Unknown nodal heads are defined by T H H H2 Hy 1 x N unknown nodal head vector These topologic and quantity matrices can be formulated into the generalized matrix expression using the laws of energy and mass conservation A12H F Q AyoHy A12Q q A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is introduced It is generalized for Hazen Williams friction losses in this case Ra Raga A411 np 1 Rear This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form A11 A12 Q _ AroHs Ao 0 H q To solve the system of non linear equations the Newton Raphson iterative scheme can be obtained by differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to Q and H to get Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 271 NA44 A42 dQ _ dE A gt 0 dH dq with The final recursive form of the Newton Raphson algorithm can now be derived after matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions not presented here The working system of equations for each solution iteration k is given by H A NA Ap fann Q Ay AH q AQ Ge i N Q po N A A H A He The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally intensive This high speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver that is specifically tailored to the structure of this matrix system of equations Sources
25. 168 95 m 7 m Water Quality vfz a3 m Calculated Concentration 0 0 mg l Elevation fi 98 00 Zone j K ection Zone ia A Cancel Report Help H Efor AAA on 4 Open the element editor for the tank T 1 Enter the data from the table below Leave the other parameters set to their default values Click OK to exit the dialog Tank Data General Tab Max Initial Min Diameter ea Elev Elev a 2 m m m 5 Open the element editor for the pump PMP 1 Select Standard 3 Point from the Pump Type list box Enter the pump elevation and the discharge curve as given in the Pump Data tables below however before entering the first discharge value 3800 I min make sure to change the discharge units from m min to l min Do this by right clicking in the Design Discharge box selecting Design Properties and selecting l min from the Units list box Also notice the pump has an upstream pipe and a downstream pipe to define the direction If the pump is ever going in the wrong direction simply click the Reverse button to change it In this example the upstream pipe should be P 1 and the downstream pipe should be P 2 Click OK to exit the dialog Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 35 Pump Data General Tab Head _ Discharge General Tab m l min Pump Elevation Pump Shutoff m Type Design PMPA Max Operating 248 7500 6 Enter the element editor for the valve PRV 1 U
26. 187 187 187 188 189 189 190 Table of Contents 11 3 1 Predefined Reports 190 11 3 2 Element Details Report 190 11 3 3 Element Results Report 191 11 3 4 Tabular Report 191 11 3 5 Scenario Summary Report 192 11 3 6 Project Inventory Report 192 11 3 7 Calculation Results Table 192 11 3 8 Plan View Report 192 11 3 9 Calculation Problem Summary Report 192 11 3 10 Contour Plan View 193 11 4 Graphs 193 11 4 1 Pump Curve 193 11 4 2 Tank Storage Curve 193 11 4 3 Junction Demand Graph 193 11 4 4 Pattern Graph and Report 193 11 4 5 Plotting a Variable vs Time 193 11 5 Contours 194 11 5 1 Contour Map Manager 194 11 5 2 Contour Plot 195 11 5 3 Contour Smoothing 195 11 5 4 Enhanced Pressure Contours 195 11 5 5 Spot Elevations 195 11 6 Profile 197 11 6 1 Profile Setup 197 11 6 2 Profile Plot 197 11 6 3 Export Profiles in AutoCAD Mode 198 11 6 4 Walk 198 11 6 5 Walk Selection 198 11 7 Scenario Comparison 198 11 7 1 Annotation Comparison Wizard 198 11 7 2 Scenario Comparison Window 199 11 8 Graphic Annotation 200 11 8 1 Legend 200 11 9 Preview Windows 201 11 9 1 Plot Window 201 11 9 2 Print Preview Window 201 11 9 3 Graph Options 201 11 10 Status Log 203 Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries 205 12 1 Engineering Library Manager 205 12 1 1 Engineering Library Editor 206 12 1 2 Material Properties 207 12 1 3 Minor Loss Properties 207 12 1 4 Liquid Properties 208 12 1 5 Constituent Properties 208
27. 315 Library 207 Maximum Elevation 315 Maximum Extended Operating Point 120 315 Maximum Operating Point 120 315 Menu 14 15 22 Pull Down 14 316 Toolbars 14 Menus 14 Messages 132 315 Metric 90 96 Microstation 234 Minimum Allowed Value 97 System Requirements 2 3 Minimum Elevation 315 Minimum System Junction 315 Minimum System Pressure 315 Minimum Zone Junction 315 Minimum Zone Pressure 315 Minor Loss 315 Minor Losses 279 Fitting 292 Properties 207 Mix Units in a Tabular Report 147 Mode Input 92 93 Scaled 93 94 Schematic 93 94 Stand Alone AutoCAD 11 Model 111 167 Modeling Tips 253 Morphing Elements 100 Mouse Buttons 315 Mouse Tips 262 Move Elements 102 242 Labels 243 Multi Segmented Polyline 262 Multiple Pump Curve 274 Sessions 88 Units 147 Index 325 Multipliers 94 N Native AutoCAD Entities Converting 231 244 Needed Fire Flow 315 Network Layout 32 Network Element 316 Network Hydraulics Theory 265 New Project 89 Node Color Coding 189 261 Non Convergence 167 Northing Easting Mode 92 Notation Scientific 96 97 Notes 316 Number 316 of Digits After Decimal Point 95 Reynold s 317 O ODBC 218 316 On Off Status 316 Online Help 5 23 Open Database Connectivity 218 Open Closed Status 316 Operating Point 121 Maximum See Maximum Extended See Operat
28. By default the path will reference the standard library shipped with your Haestad Methods product To browse for other libraries of the same type that you may have already created click the Browse column e Browse Click this column and the button that appears if you wish to search your computer or network and locate other engineering libraries To reference a library in the path field the library must already exist To create it you may copy a standard library using Windows File Manager or Explorer or click New as described below e Edit Click this column and the button that appears if you wish to add delete or edit the objects within a specific kind of engineering library e New Click this column and the button that appears if you wish to create a new library J Most users do not need to create custom libraries or edit the library paths You only need to change path values if you wish to create and use custom libraries The Engineering Library Manager can be accessed by selecting Tools Engineering Libraries from the pull down menu 12 1 1 Engineering Library Editor The Engineering Library dialogs consist of a table of two columns e Label This column contains a textual description of the object In general objects are considered to be the same if their labels are the same For example when a project is loaded the engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library based on label e A
29. Coefficients defining the formula relating the unit cost to the attribute value In order to help you enter and visualize the function use one of the buttons at the bottom of the dialog e Plot Display a graph of the unit cost function e Initialize Range Initialize the minimum and maximum values of the attribute used to define your unit cost function based on all the elements present in your project If the function is invalid for any interval within the Valid Cost Data Range it is set to 0 0 in that interval Click the Plot button to visualize any problem with the function If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost Function is outside the Valid Cost Data Range for any element in the network the formula will still be applied to calculate that element unit cost but an error message for that element will be reported when computing the cost for the system Formula Unit Cost General Data This section contains general information identifying the unit cost function as follows 184 Chapter 10 Cost Estimating e Label Unique identifier for your unit cost function e Element Type Displays the type of element to which the function applies which is always Pressure pipe in WaterCAD but could also be Gravity Pipe Junction Inlet Manhole or Junction Chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD e Attribute Label Element attribute that controls the unit cost such as pipe diameter This attribute is select
30. Edit or view the alternatives to be used by this scenario e Calculation Specify the type of hydraulic water quality calculations to be performed and click the GO button to run these calculations e Results View the hydraulic water quality calculation results summary e Notes Edit or view notes for this scenario To open the Scenario Editor dialog for the active scenario press the GO button from the toolbar To open the Scenario Editor dialog for any scenario select Analysis Scenarios from the pull down menu to open the Scenario Manager right click the scenario that you wish to edit and select Edit from the pull down menu that appears Or highlight the scenario you wish to edit press the Scenario Management button and select Edit Scenario Editor Alternatives Tab The Alternatives tab located in the Scenario Editor allows you to specify the alternatives that will be used by this scenario There is one row for each Alternative Type You need only concern yourself with the rows that correspond to the changes you would like to model using this scenario To specify the alternatives you would like to work with simply click the check box next to the alternative type For example if you would like to see how your system behaves by changing the shape or sizes of a few pipes then click the check box next to the Physical alternative row If you would like to use an existing alternative that you have already set up use the dr
31. For instance if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical you should add the following line to the Haestad ini file TextFlipAngle 0 Reasonable values fall in the range from 15 0 degrees to 15 0 degrees Attribute Annotation Dialog In the main view in Stand Alone mode double click the annotation text to display the corresponding Attribute Annotation dialog Here you can easily modify the format of that 188 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results attribute annotation without going through the Annotation Wizard again The parameters v and u represent the attribute s value and unit respectively 11 1 2 The Annotation Wizard You can use the Annotation Wizard to add annotations to the drawing as well as to remove or modify existing annotations in the drawing The wizard is divided into three steps e Select Elements Select the types of elements to annotate e Choosing Attributes Select the attributes to annotate e Summary Summary of the annotation settings you have selected To access the Annotation Wizard click the annotation tool 5l in the toolbar or select Tools Element Annotation from the main menu Annotation Wizard Select Elements This step allows you to specify the types of elements you wish to annotate Check the appropriate box for each type of element you wish to annotate You may annotate more than one type of element at a time by checking all the desired element type
32. General status information includes any messages that relate to the user s current activities These messages include information such as pull down menu command descriptions currently selected elements and indications regarding the progress of an executing command DXF Background Status This area of the status bar simply indicates whether or not a DXF background is currently visible for the active project Cursor Location The status bar displays the current X and Y or Northing and Easting coordinates for the cursor s position within the drawing pane Calculation Results Status In Stand Alone mode if the current calculation results are out of date or otherwise invalid an indicator will appear in the status bar that signifies that the results no longer match the state of your input data If the results are currently valid no such indicator will appear COMPUTE File Status If changes have been made since the last time the project file was saved an image of a diskette appears in the status bar If the file is currently in a saved state no such image will appear 4 Notes Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 29 3 1 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons The purpose of Chapter 3 is to provide step by step lessons in order to give you hands on experience with many of the features and capabilities of WaterCAD These detailed lessons will assist you in getting started with the exploration and use of the software
33. Hydraulic Element Editors 119 General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the tank such as e Label Unique name referencing the tank in reports error messages and tables e X Easting The location of the tank may be represented by an X value or an Easting value depending on individual preferences e Y Northing The location of the tank may be represented by a Y value or an Northing value depending on individual preferences e Elevation Ground elevation of the tank e Zone Specify the zone the tank belongs to You may click the ellipsis button to access the Zone Manager which allows you to edit or add zones Hydraulics Section This section reports the hydraulic data of the tank e Hydraulic Grade Calculated hydraulic grade in the tank e Inflow Outflow Flow entering leaving the tank the field label changes accordingly Reservoirs General Tab The General tab for reservoirs is organized into the following sections e General General geographic information about the reservoir e Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Calculated flow entering or leaving the reservoir e Water Quality Result of the water quality computations at this node reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed For more information on the data see the topic on each section The Water Quality section is identical for all elements and is described in the Pressure Pip
34. In the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog change the Physical Alternative to P 8 and P 9 Set to 200 mm Change the Demand to Max Day and leave all other Alternatives set to their defaults Click the Calculation tab make sure that Steady State is selected and check the Fire Flow Analysis box Note that all fire flow calculations must be performed under steady state conditions Click Close to exit the Scenario dialog To run the Scenario click GO Batch Run Check the box for Automated Fire Flow Analysis and uncheck the other Scenarios Click Batch to run the analysis and Yes at the confirmation prompt When the calculation is complete click OK and Close to exit the Scenario Manager 3 5 3 Part 3 Viewing Fire Flow Results 1 Click the Tabular Reports button located to the right of the GO button on the WaterCAD toolbar to open the Table Manager Highlight the Fire Flow Report and click the OK button to view the report Make sure that Automated Fire Flow Analysis is selected in the Scenario list box 60 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons B 3 6 w wWaterCAD Table Fire Flow Report joi lt fl rie_ cony 3 Print Eher IZ Options Hf cose 2 Herp Time H4 a ll 0 00 hr z a aa Increment fi 00 hr z Scenario Automated Fire Flow amp z al Label Zone Fire Flow Calculated Fire Sal Available Residual Minimum Zone Minimum Minimum System Minimum Iterati
35. Unique name referencing the junction in reports error messages and tables e X Easting The location of the junction may be represented by an X value or an Easting value depending on individual preferences e Y Northing The location of the junction may be represented by a Y value or an Northing value depending on individual preferences e Elevation Elevation of the junction e Zone Specify the zone the junction belongs to You may click the ellipsis button to access the Zone Manager which allows you to edit or add zones Junction Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the following results e Demand Calculated Total demand leaving or entering the pipe network at the junction at the current time e Calculated Hydraulic Grade Hydraulic grade at the junction e Pressure Pressure at the junction Tanks General Tab The General tab for tanks is organized into the following sections e General General geographic information about the tank e Hydraulics Calculated flow entering leaving the tank and the calculated hydraulic grade in the tank e Water Quality Result of the water quality computations at this node reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed For more information on the data see the topic on each section The Water Quality section is identical for all elements and is described in the Pressure Pipe General Tab section Chapter 6
36. and click Preview to view the resulting output Click Close when you are finished to exit the preview and the Analysis Results Report dialog 9 Select Scenario Summary from the Reports pull down menu This report summarizes the alternatives and options selected in the current scenario Click Close 10 Click the Report pull down menu again and select the Project Inventory option This report will tell you the total number of each type of element and the total length of pipe in the system Click Close 11 Finally click the Cost Manager button wl in the toolbar Assuming Cost Estimating calculations had already been run clicking on the Report button located above the Scenario Costs tree view would generate a Capital Cost Analysis Report Click Close Part 2 Tabular Reports FlexTables Tabular Reports are an extremely powerful tool in WaterCAD These reports are not only good presentation tools they are also very helpful in data entry and analysis When data must be entered for a large number of elements clicking each element and entering the data can be tedious and time consuming Using the tabular reports elements can be changed using the global edit tool or filtered to display only the desired elements Values that are entered into the table will be automatically updated in the model The tables can also be customized to contain only the desired data Columns can be added or removed or you can display duplicates of the same column w
37. change the associated database files and perform other changes to the connection configuration Duplicate Create an identical connection to the selected one This feature is very helpful when defining two or more connections with many similar attributes Delete Remove the selected connection from the list Synchronize In Update the network attributes from the databases defined in the selected connection Synchronize Out Update all databases in the connection from the current status of the model Reset Return a highlighted standard database import or export connection to default settings When synchronizing in output fields such as hydraulic grade line or computed pipe flow will not be updated If an attempt is made to update an output field during a Synchronize In operation a Read Only Warning will be issued to the status log indicating which attribute could not be updated When synchronizing out all mapped information will be overwritten in the database files including input and output conditions If you do not want your input values overwritten upon synchronizing out simply duplicate the connection Then edit one connection such that it includes only the values you want to synchronize in and one that includes only the values you want to synchronize out When synchronizing out be sure that the model element labels are of the same data type as the database column you are mapping to For example if you we
38. i 16 00 hr 226 86 263 01 97 7 294 80 33 33 Filling i 17 00 hr 226 90 26340 98 4 296 80 22 22 Filling i 18 00 hr 225 93 263 66 98 9 298 14 1 376 1 376 Draining i 19 00 hr 224 29 237 59 71 5 216 57 1 147 1 147 Draining i 20 00 hr 222 92 224 20 48 7 146 76 970 970 Draining i 21 00 hr 221 76 212 87 29 4 88 56 1 033 1 033 Filling i 22 00 hr 222 99 224 93 49 9 150 54 854 854 Filling i 23 00 hr 224 01 234 91 66 9 201 78 6389 689 Filling i 24 00 hr 224 84 242 95 80 6 243 12 706 706 Filling his Every element can generate a report in the same general format which includes the name of the calculated scenario and a series of tables describing the element s properties and results in detail You can print this report or copy it to the clipboard using the buttons at the top of the dialog The report is What you see is what you get WYSIWYG so it will print or paste into a word processor in the exact format seen on the screen Click the Close button on the report and then click OK to exit the tank dialog You can also print detailed reports for several elements at one time In the stand alone version use the Select tool to draw a window around the elements you want to report or hold down the shift key while selecting the elements individually Then select Report Element Details from the pull down menus to bring up the Detailed Reports dialog In the AutoCAD version start by selecting Report Element Details from the pull down menus The
39. list If the selected element is a pipe the associated node will not be removed e Remove All Following Remove all elements that appear after the selected element in the list If the selected element is a pipe the associated node will not be removed When everything is set up to your satisfaction click the Profile button to generate the graph To open the Profile Setup dialog Click on the Profile button on the toolbar of the main window or Select Tools Profiling from the main menu Profile Plot The Profile Plot window displays the results of an analysis in a profile format The plot can be copied to the Windows clipboard or printed out directly By selecting the Options Graph Options menu button you can also adjust the titles axes colors and other characteristics of the graph 198 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results There is also a time toolbar on the Profile Plot window that allows you to follow the profile through extended period simulation results For an extended period simulation the extents of the axes are determined based on the J minimum and maximum attribute values for the entire time step not just the current time step This is done so that stepping through the time steps gives a more accurate portrayal of the system behavior without rescaling 11 6 3 Export Profiles in AutoCAD Mode Profiles can be exported to the AutoCAD drawing using the File menu on the Profile Plot dial
40. on the junction and select it If you have difficulty seeing the selected element increase the zoom factor in the Drawing Review dialog Wh WaterCAD by Haestad Methods i x File Edit Analysis View Tools Report Help nalala i 4 9 fia e o zla S e 2 w Time HJE HA Increment cab E Scenario fBase Hl 0 00 hr Ine J 75 J 76 Zoom 100 0 3 of 183 elements Background OFF x 700 768 62 y 21 177 91 m a 7 Open the element and click the Messages tab There will be a message telling you that the node was added during the Polyline to Pipe conversion The junction had to be added because there was no node at that location in your DXF drawing but there was a polyline endpoint In the Polyline to Pipe Wizard you instructed WaterCAD to add junctions to endpoints Even though you now have your drawing converted to a pipe network it is still not ready to be run because you can only bring in element types and network connectivity using this type of import Before you could run this model you would have to input data for elevations demands pipe sizes etc either directly into WaterCAD or through database connections 86 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons For users in AutoCAD mode only 1 The WaterCAD elements are now on layer 0 since that layer was current when you performed the conversion If you turn off layers HMI_PIPE and HMI_NODE only the actual WaterCAD elements will be visible C
41. over the time step the mass balance at the wall is given by kilCi Cwi kwCw Where k Wall reaction rate constant m s ft s Solving for the wall concentration and substituting into the general decay rate equation above results in the general first order reaction rate expression for substance decay R C KC 282 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory B 3 3 Where K Overall rate constant equal 1 s K can be expressed as Kaige et Ru ky ky It follows that dropping the negative sign ahead of K in the equation above will model the growth of a substance with mass transfer from the pipe wall to the bulk flow In this program the bulk coefficient and wall reaction rate coefficient are supplied by the user as part of the constituent properties These are determined empirically using observed reaction rate data A typical scenario might have the bulk coefficient being derived from jar tests and the wall coefficient estimated over the course of model calibration by adjusting its value to best match actual observed field concentrations to simulated results The mass transfer coefficient is a function of internal pipe hydraulics and is computed automatically by the constituent transport algorithm Mass Transfer Coefficient The mass transfer coefficient which is used to model the constituent transfer between the bulk fluid and pipe wall is calculated internally by the modeling engine using the unitless Sherwood Numb
42. 1 5 15 2 15 2 1 In AutoCAD it is possible to delete element label text using the ERASE command You should not use ERASE to control visibility of labels If you desire to control the visibility of a selected group of element labels you should move them to another layer that can be frozen or turned off See Rebuild Figure Labels for more information on restoring labels that have been erased using the native AutoCAD command Rebuild Figure Labels When running WaterCAD in the AutoCAD mode it is possible to delete associated element label text entities Element labels which have been erased can be selectively undeleted using the command WTRCREBUILDLABELS AutoCAD Project Files When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode there are two files that fundamentally define a WaterCAD model project e Drawing File DWG The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities that define the model in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that serves as the model background e Model File WCD The native WaterCAD model database file that contains all the element properties along with other important model data WaterCAD WCD files can be loaded and run using the Stand alone mode These files may be copied and sent to other WaterCAD users who are interested in running your project This is the most important file for the WaterCAD model The two files will have the same base name It is important to understand that s
43. 6 EPS in the list of Scenarios click the Scenario Management button and select Add Child Scenario from the menu Name the new Scenario P 8 and P 9 Set to 200 mm and click OK Under the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog check the box for Physical Click the ellipses button to open the Physical Properties Alternatives dialog Click the Add Child button and name the new Alternative P 8 and P 9 Set to 200 mm Click OK Under the Pipe tab for this Alternative change the pipe sizes in the table for pipes P 8 and P 9 from 150 mm to 200 mm Click the Close button to exit the editor and click Close again to exit the Physical Properties Alternatives dialog Physical Alternative P 8 and P 9 set to 200 mm lolx Pipe Pump Valve Junction Reservoir Tank Diameter Hazen Minor mm Williams Loss E Coefficient Ductile Iron 130 0 0 00 Ductile Iron 130 0 0 00 130 0 0 00 PYC Ductile Iron Ductile Iron cee e Base Data 0 Inherited Data Local Data 48 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 4 3 4 1 8 Select the new Physical Alternative from the list box for the scenario and click Close to return to the Scenario Manager Select Batch Run to run the model Turn off the check boxes for the first two scenarios and turn on the check box for Pipes P 8 and P 9 Set to 200 mm Click Batch and select
44. Child Alternatives there are also Base Parent and Child Scenarios The difference is that instead of inheriting model data Scenarios inherit sets of Alternatives To change the new Scenario change one or more of the new Scenario s Alternatives For this lesson we will create a new Scenario for each different set of conditions we need to evaluate 1 Select Analysis Scenarios from the pull down menus You are now in the Scenario Manager There is always a default Base Scenario that is comprised of the ten base Alternatives listed in the right pane The left pane of the Scenario Manager contains a list of the Scenarios Only the Base is available initially because we have not created any new Scenarios 2 You should first rename the Base Scenario as something more descriptive Click the Scenario Management button and select Rename from the pull down menu The Scenario name in the left pane will become editable Type in a descriptive name for the Scenario such as 2000 l min 3 hour Fire Flow at J 6 EPS and then press the Enter key 3 Now you will create a Child Scenario from our existing Base Scenario to incorporate our new Demand Alternative Click the Scenario Management menu button and select Add Child Scenario from the menu Type in a Scenario name of 4000 I min Fire Flow at J 6 EPS and click OK A dialog box for the new Scenario appears listing the Alternatives as inherited from the Base Scenario 4 Your new Child S
45. Demand Alternative Physical Alternative Average Day Preliminary Pipes Maximum Day Peak Hour Note again that we did not change any physical data so the physical alternatives remain the same Correcting an Error This analysis results in acceptable pressures until it is discovered that the industrial demand is not actually 500 gpm it is 1 500 gpm Because of the inheritance within the demand alternatives however only the Average Day demand for J 2 needs to be updated The changes will ripple through to the children After the single change is made the demand hierarchy is as follows Appendix C Scenario Management Guide 303 C 18 C 19 Average Day Maximum Day Peak Hour Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results When these results are reviewed it is determined that the system does not have the ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought The pressure at J 2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions Analyzing Improvement Suggestions To counter the headloss from the increased demand load two possible improvements are suggested e A much larger diameter is proposed for P 1 the pipe from the reservoir This physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative inheriting all the diameters except P 1 s which is overridden e S
46. For this example choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade Next click the Select From Drawing button The dialog disappears and the crosshairs change to a pick box in AutoCAD Click on pipes P 1 P 2 P 6 P 8 and P 9 selecting a continuous path or walk through the network Right click when you are finished and select Done in Stand Alone The Profile Setup dialog reappears with the selected elements appearing in order in the list Click the Profile button to view the profile Plot Window olx cony S amp S Print A Options Te cese Q Help Time 144 0 00 hr x gt mi Increment lt All gt x Scenario 5 yr old D LP J Ol Profile from R 1 to J 6 230 0 225 0 220 0 215 0 210 0 205 0 o 5 0 fea g E 5 5 Hd as gt L 5 2 s D od O 200 0 195 0 4 4 4 n 4 4 n 4 0 0 100 0 200 0 300 0 400 0 500 0 600 0 700 0 800 0 900 0 1000 0 Distance along Pipe Walk m Once the profile is created you can make adjustments to its appearance if desired by clicking the Options button and selecting Graph Options A dialog opens in which you can change the titles fonts scaling and line types used in the graph Leave everything set to the defaults for this example and click Cancel to exit the dialog When you have finished setting up the graph it can be printed or copied to the clipboard using the buttons at the top of the Plot window Click Close to exit the Plot window when you
47. Import Shapefile Choose the Shapefile you would like to import and choose the Key Label Field to specify the column in the Shapefile that contains the matching element labels in the network Define as many field links as necessary For each link specify the network attribute the associated Shapefile column and the Unit in which the Shapefile attribute is stored e Create Shapefile Connection Choose whether or not you want to establish a Shapefile Connection The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the Shapefile with values from your model or to update your model from the Shapefile While using the wizard you can move forward or backward through the process to make changes by clicking the Next and Back buttons Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to import Shapefiles To access the Import Shapefile Wizard select File Import Shapefile from the pull down menu 224 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections Select Element Types The Select Element Types window is used for selecting the types of network elements that are of interest when importing and exporting Shapefiles or when creating a Shapefile Connection The window contains a list of network element types and a check box precedes each type To select an element type for Shapefile Import Export or Connection put a check mark in the corresponding box Shapefile Synchronization Options Several options are available to customize the Shape
48. Importing GIS Data and click Next Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second screen 5 In this dialog set up the drawing as Scaled with a horizontal scale of 1 5000 and a vertical scale of 1 500 Change the three Annotation Multipliers Symbol Size Text Height and Annotation Height to 2 8 Click Next leave the Prototypes set to their default values and click Finished The remaining commands are for both Stand Alone and AutoCAD modes 1 Select File Synchronize Shapefile Connections from the pull down menus If you have not defined any Shapefile connections in WaterCAD yet you will be asked if you want to create a Shapefile connection answer Yes to start the Shapefile Connection Wizard Or if you have already defined Shapefile Connections in any other WaterCAD project start the Shapefile Connection Wizard by clicking Add in the Shapefile Connection Manager that appears Enter the Connection Label Lesson 7 Part 1 for this connection and click the Next button Now you need to check the boxes for the types of elements you will be importing For this connections check the boxes for Pressure Junction Pressure Pipe PRV Pump Reservoir and Tank Click Next Shapefile Connection Wizard x r Select Element Types IV Pressure Junction IV Pressure Pipe Jv PRY V Pump IV Reservoir Cancel Help Finished Leave the Shapefile Unit set to m and check the box to establish missin
49. Part 4 Physical Alternative You need to further examine what is going on in the system as a result of the fire flow and find solutions to any problems that might have arisen in the network as a result You can review output tables to quickly see what the pressures and velocities are within the system and create new Alternatives and Scenarios to capture your modifications 1 Click the Close button to exit the Scenario Comparison Window Click Close again to exit the Scenario Manager and return to the drawing pane Select the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar Highlight Junction Report in the list and click OK Select 4000 l min Fire Flow at J 6 EPS in the Scenario list box and set the Time to 18 00 hr Most of the system pressures look acceptable at this time increment however the pressure at J 6 is actually negative Click the Options button and select Table Manager from the menu Highlight Pipe Report and click OK In the Pipe Report table notice that the headloss gradient for pipes P 8 and P 9 are significantly higher than in the rest of the system We can reduce the headloss gradient by increasing the sizes of these pipes The pressure at J 6 should increase as a consequence Click Close to exit the table We will create a new Scenario having a new Physical Alternative with the pipe sizes for P 8 and P 9 increased to 200 mm From the pull down menus select Analysis Scenarios Highlight 4000 l min Fire Flow at J
50. Please refer to the Database Connection Manager topic for a more detailed explanation e Add Create a new Shapefile connection This will open the Shapefile Connection Wizard e Edit Change the configuration of the currently selected connection This will open to the Shapefile Connection Editor e Duplicate Duplicate the selected connection e Delete Delete the selected connection from the list e Synchronize In Update the network attributes from the Shapefiles defined in the selected connection e Synchronize Out Update all Shapefiles within the connection from the current status of the model See the Overview at the beginning of this chapter for a general discussion of Shapefile Connections To open the Shapefile Connection Manager select the File Synchronize Shapefile Connections menu item Select No when prompted to create a new shapefile connection Shapefile Connection Wizard The Shapefile Connection Wizard provides an easy to use interface for defining a new Shapefile Connection It is similar to the Shapefile Import Wizard but has a few additional steps The major steps in the wizard are as follows e Label Enter an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify the Shapefile Connection e Select Element Types Choose the types of network elements you wish to connect to Shapefiles e Shapefile Synchronization Options Specify the spatial data unit and configure other options e
51. Tabular Report Using the powerful FlexTables feature you can very quickly generate a tabular report containing any attribute in columns and any network element in rows All tabular data in this program can be copied to the Windows Clipboard by right clicking the desired table and selecting Copy in the context menu You can then paste this data into your favorite spreadsheet or word processor to generate custom reports and graphs 192 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results To access the Table Manager click the Table button fii on the main toolbar or choose Report Tables from the main menu 11 3 5 Scenario Summary Report The Scenario Summary provides a detailed report of the active scenario including alternatives and a brief summary of the calculation options To access the Scenario Summary Report select Report Scenario Summary from the menu bar 11 3 6 Project Inventory Report The Project Inventory report provides a detailed report that includes a summary of the active scenario a network inventory and a detailed pipe inventory grouped by pipe section To access the Project Inventory Report select Report Project Inventory from the menu bar 11 3 7 Calculation Results Table The calculation results for each element in a network can be viewed in a table format This table is predefined and you cannot change it It displays the set of the most commonly desired output attributes for the type of element for each repo
52. The amount of time from the Start Time of the pattern to the time step point being defined e Multiplier The multiplier value associated with the time step point Format e Stepwise Format The multiplier values are considered to be the average value for the interval between the specified time and the next time Patterns using this format will have a staircase appearance Multipliers are set at the specified time and held constant until the next point in the pattern e Continuous Format The multipliers are considered to be the instantaneous values at a particular time Patterns using this format will have a curvilinear appearance Multipliers are set at the specified time and are linearly increased or decreased to the next point in the pattern Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value This is because patterns will be repeated if the duration of the Extended Period Analysis is longer than the pattern duration In other words the last point in the pattern is really the start point of the pattern s next cycle An Extended Period Analysis is actually a series of steady state analyses where the boundary conditions for the current time step are calculated from the conditions at the previous time step This software will automatically convert a continuous pattern format to a stepwise format so that the demands and source concentrations remain constant during a time step 178 Chapter 9 Model
53. The on line tutorials have step by step instructions for performing common tasks in the graphical editor and Lesson 1 also offers assistance Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor Most network editing tasks can be performed using only your mouse The pull down menus and AutoCAD command line also offer the ability to perform many of these tasks but by simply pointing and clicking with the mouse you will be able to e Create New Elements e Select Elements e Edit Elements e Move Elements e Delete Elements e Annotate the Drawing As you move your mouse over each element a tool tip is displayed informing you of the element s label and annotations Creating New Elements The tool palette contains all of the tools necessary for adding network elements to the drawing These element tools include 100 Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools Pipe Layout Tool Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes pumps valves tanks and reservoirs Pressure Junction Tool Junctions are non storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy consumer demands or enter the network as an inflow Junctions are also where chemical constituents can enter the network Tank Tool Tanks are a type of storage node The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation Reservoir Tool Reservoirs are a type of storage
54. Use Excel to open Lesson7 xls in another window Click on the tab for the Junction worksheet and add a new column heading in cell F1 called Pressure Save and Close the file 80 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Ea Microsoft Excel Lesson7 xls Jaf x 8 Eile Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help la EEA ETAT EA ora BE A blaag 100 GB drial 0 B z u EFS SH 8 ee mrar Pre ssure kPa x m Y m Elevation m Demand l min Pressure kPa l J 698 402 36 21 935 70 148 0 00 J 2 698 296 41 21 687 92 148 0 00 J 3 698 168 78 21 230 38 150 3 60 J 4 698 287 46 21 145 02 147 23 40 J 5 698 769 63 20 836 15 138 19 80 J 6 698 871 56 20 792 04 136 11 70 J 7 699 288 18 20 663 98 135 11 70 J 8 699 509 25 20 596 53 134 1 80 J 9 700 066 90 20 428 38 131 31 50 J 10 700 084 93 20 553 02 134 0 00 J 11 700 232 98 20 680 03 135 0 00 J 12 700 405 74 20 828 20 135 22 50 J 13 700 632 07 21 022 87 136 900 00 J 14 700 462 33 21 219 73 144 0 00 15 700 259 96 20 370 14 127 16 20 J 27 699 513 73 20 448 31 130 14 40 x gt IPIN Pipe Junction Tank f valve Pump Z Reservar 4 gt Ir Draw amp AutoShapes N OOR 48 o9 4 A S2EB Ready I NUM 16 Go back to the WaterCAD window and choose File Synchronize Database Connections from the menu Highlight Lesson 7 Part 2 and click the Edit button Select t
55. Yes to confirm and run the Scenario Click OK when the run is complete 9 Close the Scenario Manager and return to the drawing pane Select the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar and open the Junction Report In the Scenario list box select the new Scenario and examine the pressures at J 6 for 18 19 and 20 hours The pressures for this node are now at acceptable levels If you would like to learn more about the various results presentation methods available in WaterCAD see Lesson 4 Close the open dialogs and save this project before proceeding with Lesson 4 Reporting Results Lesson 4 Reporting Results An important feature in all water distribution modeling software is the ability to present results clearly This lesson outlines several of WaterCAD s reporting features including e Reports which display and print information on any or all elements in the system e Tabular Reports FlexTables for viewing editing and presentation of selected data and elements in a tabular format e Profiles to graphically show in a profile view how a selected attribute such as hydraulic grade varies along an interconnected series of pipes e Contouring to show how a selected attribute such as pressure varies throughout the distribution system e Element Annotation for dynamic presentation of the values of user selected variables in the plan view e Color Coding which assigns colors based on ranges of values to eleme
56. a pipe network Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 65 3 7 1 There are multiple ways of importing data from outside sources into WaterCAD You can set up one or more database connections to bring in information stored in many standard database and spreadsheet formats GIS information can be brought in through connections to ESRI Shapefiles If you have existing drawings of your network in a DXF format DWG format in the AutoCAD version you can have WaterCAD convert your lines and or blocks into distribution system elements setting up preferences for handling situations such as T intersections and line endpoints and creating tolerances to allow for drawing imperfections Or you can display a DXF file as a background drawing for use in laying out a scaled network stand alone version only Finally WaterCAD will automatically import networks created in EPANet KYPipe and previous versions of Cybernet WaterCAD WaterCAD again utilizes database and Shapefile connections to export data from the model for use externally You can also copy tables reports and graphs and paste them into other Windows applications or save plan and profile views in DXF format for use when creating construction documents in CAD This lesson covers the three main methods of building your network using external data summarized in the following table Method Description Advantages Disadvantages Database Create Extremely versatile Allows Pipes will
57. alternative to e Summary Summary of the calculation options for the highlighted scenario and any notes you have associated with it e Results Summary of the last calculation performed for the highlighted scenario When you delete a scenario keep in mind that because scenarios never actually hold J calculation data records alternatives do you are not losing data records The alternatives and data records referenced by that scenario will still exist until you explicitly delete them By accessing the Alternative Manager you can delete the referenced alternatives and data records To open the Scenario Manager window select Analysis Scenarios Or click the ol button next to the scenario drop down list in the main application window Batch Run Performing a batch run allows you to set up and run multiple scenarios at once This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations or simply manage a group of smaller calculations as a set The list of selected scenarios for the batch run will remain with your project until you change it Using the dialog is simple First check the scenarios you want to run and click the Batch button Each scenario will be calculated You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation When the batch is completed the scenario that was current will remain current even if it was not one that was calculated Select a calculated scenario from the main window drop down list to
58. are finished and close again to exit the Profile Setup dialog Part 4 Contouring The contouring feature in WaterCAD enables you to generate contours for reporting attributes such as elevation pressure and hydraulic grade You can specify the contour interval as well as color code the contours by index values or ranges of values In this lesson we will contour based on hydraulic grade elevations To create a plan view of the water distribution system with contours click the Contour button from the toolbar Within the Contour Manager choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade from the Contour list box Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 2 Create a Selection Set of elements you will use in contouring by clicking the ellipses button next to the Selection Set list box Click Add name the set Contour by HGL and click OK 3 Define your selection set so that it consists of all junctions in Zone 1 Click Select By Filter Pressure Junctions Under Column select Zone for Operator select and for Value select Zone 1 Click OK to return to the Selection Set dialog 4 Notice that the selected elements are now highlighted under Available Items Click gt to move the elements to the Selected Items list and click OK Click OK again to exit the Selection Set Manager 5 Select Contour by HGL in the Selection Set list box and click Initialize to update the Minimum and Maximum HGL elevations Enter an Increment of 0 1 m
59. at a relative speed setting other than 1 00 use a setting control Node Condition A node condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the hydraulic condition of a specified tank or pressure junction is reached The comparison component allows the following e Above Trigger the control when the junction or tank s hydraulic parameter is above the node condition s hydraulic parameter e Below Trigger the control when the junction or tank s hydraulic parameter is below the node condition s hydraulic parameter You can express the conditions at the control node in terms of Pressure or Hydraulic Grade Example Closed if node J 2 below 10 psi means that the controlled pipe will close when the pressure at junction J 2 goes below 10 psi Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 127 6 2 5 Time Condition A time condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the specified amount of time has elapsed Examples e Closed at time 2 00 hr At 2 00 hours into the analysis this link will be closed e Set hydraulic grade to 440 ft at time 5 50 hr At 5 5 hours into the analysis the hydraulic grade of this pressure regulating valve will be set to 440 feet Quality Tab The Quality tab of an element allows you to edit the input data related to water quality Three types of water quality analyses can be performed as defined in the Scenario Editor dialog accessed by clicking the GO
60. be depicted Connection connections to exchange of most any model data as straight lines import and with a wide variety of applications connecting the to and export model including anything with an ODBC from nodes so pipe data using format A topographic bends will not be common representation of the network can be displayed database and created by using node coordinates spreadsheet and assigning to and from nodes formats to pipes Once a connection is established it can be saved for later use and multiple connections can be created and synchronized simultaneously Shapefile Create Advantages are similar to those of More proprietary You Connection connections to Database Connections except the have to have software import and topographic data exchange is that supports ESRI export model automatic and pipe bends are Shapefiles in order to data in ESRI accounted for utilize the data Shapefile format Polyline to Convert existing Enables you to use legacy CAD Elements are assigned Pipe lines polylines drawings to build your network You default labels as they Conversion and blocks in can set up tolerances to allow for are created Only DXF DWG drawing imperfections and topographic data can be format into pipes preferences for how nodes will be brought in not model and other created values Requires user tol network carefully review the elements drawing for accuracy Part 1 Importing Shapef
61. column in the Shapefile that contains the matching element labels in the network Define as many field links as necessary For each link specify the model attribute the associated Shapefile column and the Unit in which the Shapefile attribute is stored e Shapefile Link Summary Quick review of the details specified in the wizard As with all wizards you can move forward or backward through the process to make changes Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to the Shapefile Link Shapefile Link Summary The Shapefile Link Summary window provides an opportunity to review the details of the Shapefile Link before completing the editing process The following information is provided in the summary window e Type Type of element represented by this Shapefile Link e Shapefile Full path and file name of the Shapefile referenced by this Shapefile Link e Key Label Field Shapefile field used to map Shapefile records to their corresponding network elements in the model e Attributes Mapped Number of Field Links mapped in this Shapefile Link Import Shapefile Wizard The Import Shapefile Wizard will guide you step by step through the process of importing ESRI Shapefiles These are the basic steps for importing Shapefiles e Select Element Types Choose the type of network elements you wish to import e Shapefile Synchronization Options Specify the spatial data unit and configure other options e
62. current view Zoom Tools Stand Alone Only E e e BE Zoom Extents Zoom to the full extents of the drawing Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Window Zoom to an area selected by you Zoom Previous Zoom to the previous view Calculation and Data Management Tools Al S GO Open the Calculation dialog for the current scenario Tabular Reports Open the Table Manager dialog Reporting Tools Gt Hks Color Coding Color code the network Annotation Annotate elements with input or output data Profile Open the Profile wizard to develop a network profile Contours Open the Contours window to generate countours of various atributes Quick View Open the Quick View window for easy data viewing Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 25 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 Updates and Help Tools 6 Globe If you are connected to the Internet this will take you to Haestad Methods web site for product updates and other services 2 Help Access the on line help system v The Tool Palette WaterCAD Layout Rjg olaj ajx HE The tool palette contains a Select tool Network Element tools and Annotation tools e The Select tool allows you to select elements for group editing detailed reporting deleting or moving elements e The Network Element tools allow you to add elements to your network These tools can also be used to split pipes morph nodes and add spot elevatio
63. data corruption could occur Project Management Project Setup Wizard The Project Setup Wizard dialog can only be accessed at the start of a new project File New from the pull down menus or from the Beginner s Welcome dialog All of the options that are edited from the wizard however can be changed individually from other pull down menus The Project Setup Wizard assists you in the creation of a new project by stepping you through many of the project wide options allowing you to set most of your notes and defaults before you even create the first pipe Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 89 4 2 2 4 2 3 The areas covered by this wizard include Project Summary Includes information about the project such as the project title the project engineer and general comments Project Options Include information regarding global options such as the desired friction method and coordinate system Drawing Options Include information regarding the drawing pane such as the drawing scale annotation multipliers and background drawing data for Stand Alone mode only Prototypes Enable you to set default values for elements which are used to initialize values for any new elements that are added to the project Creating a New Project To create a new project in Stand Alone 1 3 4 At the Welcome dialog click Create New Project and click OK Or select File New from the pull down menu The Create Pr
64. database or version Rather than being a specific database this is actually a link to the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program running on your computer This link will provide an interface between the Haestad Methods Database Connection feature and a specific DBMS and source database file ODBC Database File If you have selected ODBC as the Database Type when you click the ellipsis button next to the Database File field the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program will take over and offer a list of the ODBC data sources installed on your computer Depending on how your computer is configured you may see database systems or actual database files from which to choose Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 219 13 1 5 You will also see database systems such as Microsoft Jet or Excel that are also supported directly via choices in the Database Type list In general the Database Connection feature will work faster and better by choosing these database systems directly rather than going through ODBC If you choose a data source from the Administrator Program upon returning to the Table Link Editor you will see an ODBC connect string in the Database File field rather than a file path This connect string is a series of key value pairs separated by semicolons It specifies the database location security parameters and access options needed by the particular ODBC driver you are using In general you should not ed
65. down menu 1 4 5 Glossary The glossary contains many terms used throughout the dialogs and the on line Help To use the Glossary 1 Click Help Contents to open the main Help window 2 Click the Contents tab then double click the Glossary book Chapter 1 Orientation 1 4 6 1 4 7 1 4 8 1 5 1 5 1 3 Click the Glossary page and the Glossary topic will appear 4 Click the first letter of the word for which you are looking for more information 5 Click the term and a pop up box will appear with a definition of the selected word Tutorials The tutorials along with the lessons located in Chapter 3 quickly introduce you to specific features of the program To access the tutorials click Help Tutorials from the pull down menus Run a tutorial by selecting one of the entries in the list and clicking the OK button End a tutorial at any time by either pressing the Esc key in Stand Alone mode or by clicking the cross in the upper right hand corner of any tutorial dialog If you need further information access our on line help by pressing the F1 key Sample Projects 1 Select the File Open command from the pull down menu to access the Open Project File dialog 2 Choose EXAMPLE WCD or EXAMPLE DWG if using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode from the Sample directory and click Open These are working network models so you can explore the systems and see how different elements are modeled First calculate the sy
66. drawing produced would show positive values where the velocity increased under 2010 conditions and negative values where the velocity decreased under 2010 conditions For applications that support extended period simulations you can choose the same scenario for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 effectively comparing a scenario to itself to annotate the differences between two time steps of that scenario To access the Annotation Comparison Wizard open the Scenario Manager and click the Scenario Comparison button Scenario Comparison Window The Scenario Comparison window allows you to view print export and modify scenario comparison annotations Along the top of the window is a row of buttons that perform the various functions listed below e File Export To DXF Export the drawing in the standard DXF file format e File Export To AutoCAD available only in AutoCAD mode Export the drawing to the current AutoCAD drawing e Zoom Tools Provide standard zoom capabilities for navigating the drawing e Options Annotation Manager Open the Annotation Comparison Wizard to add delete or modify the scenario comparison annotations e Options Annotation Height Multiplier Modify the text height for the scenario comparison annotations e Options Find Element Allows you to locate an element by its label e Print Preview Open the Print Preview window to view how the printed page s will look e Close Close the Scen
67. drawing itself It will also allow you to invert the selection set thereby unselecting the ones already selected and selecting the ones not already selected You can also clear the selected items using the Select button The features mentioned above are also available to remove items from the Selected Items pane Duplicate Selection Set Allows you to make a copy of the highlighted selection set Rename Selection Set This dialog allows you to change the name of the highlighted selection set Selection Set Notes The memo field on the Notes dialog allows you to input free form paragraph text that will be associated with the highlighted selection set Use it to write detailed notes 5 3 Find Element This is a powerful feature that allows you to quickly locate any element in the drawing by its label alone It performs a case insensitive search The Find Element feature is available from the Edit menu on the main window To find an element 1 Choose Edit Find Element 2 Type the label of the element you wish to find or you can click in the list box to choose from a sorted list of elements in the system 3 You may wish to choose a Zoom Factor from the list provided 100 is the default zoom factor If you wish to magnify the view of the drawing then choose a zoom factor greater than 100 To decrease the view of the drawing choose a zoom factor less than 100 4 Click the OK button 5 4 Zooming Zooming controls how large o
68. e Edit e Analysis e View e Tools e Report e Help File Menu The File menu contains many of the items dealing with project management It provides features to create read write and print project files as well as features for sharing data with databases and GIS systems e New Create a new project When you choose this item a dialog will appear so that you can enter a drive directory and filename for your new project file The Project Setup Wizard will then help you set up your new project Toolbar Button iu Shortcut Key Ctrl N e Open Load an existing project file from disk When you select this item a dialog will appear so that you can choose the name and location of the project you want to open Ta Toolbar Button l Shortcut Key Ctrl O 16 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window B e Save Save the current project file to disk While saving the project file the status pane will briefly display a message to show you the progress of the save command Toolbar Button al Shortcut Key Ctrl S e Save As Save the current project to disk under a different filename When you use this command a dialog will appear prompting you to enter the drive directory and a new file name for your project e Project Summary Access the Project Summary information such as the project title and the project engineer e Import Database Import data from a Microsoft Access database mdb using o
69. enter a Label of 3 Hour Fire a Start Time of 0 00 hr and a Starting Multiplier of 0 00 Select the radio button for Stepwise format Enter the information given below into the pattern table 3 Hour Fire Pattern Data Time from Start hr After you have filled in the table select the Report button at the bottom of the dialog box Choose Graph from the menu to display a graph of the demand pattern Notice that the value of the multiplier is zero except for the period between 18 and 21 hours when it is 1 0 Since we input the demand as 2000 l min the result will be a 2000 l min fire flow at junction J 6 between hours 18 and 21 Click Close to exit the graph OK to exit the Pattern dialog and OK again to exit the Pattern Manager Finally select your new pattern 3 Hour Fire from the Pattern selection box in row 3 of the Demands table and click OK to exit the Junction Editor Part 2 Running an Extended Period Simulation 1 To run the Extended Period Simulation click on the GO button on the toolbar Select the radio button for Extended Period Accept the defaults of a Start Time of 0 0 a Duration of 24 hours and a Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour Then click the GO button to run the analysis After the model runs the green light on the Results tab indicates that there are not any warnings for the analysis and WaterCAD was able to compute a balanced solution for the distribution network Click the Close button
70. entered the fire flow as a demand at a specific Results of fire flow calculations which are obtained from calculations performed junction Fa All parameters defining a fire flow analysis such as the residual pressure or the Yy minimum zone pressure are explained in detail in the Fire Flow Alternative and in the Fire Flow tab topics An on line tutorial on fire flow can be found by selecting the Help Tutorials menu 9 6 1 Fire Flow Results After performing a fire flow analysis calculation results are available for each junction node in the fire flow selection set These results can be viewed in the predefined Fire Flow Report in tabular format accessed by clicking the Tabular Reports button highlighting Fire Flow Report and clicking OK Note that results for the nodes that were not included in the fire flow selection set are reported as N A 9 6 2 Not getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node Perform the following checks if you are not getting expected fire flow results 1 Check the Available Fire Flow If it is lower than the Needed Fire Flow the fire flow conditions for that node are not satisfied Therefore Needed Fire Flow Constraints is false Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 173 9 7 9 7 1 9 7 2 2 Check the Calculated Residual Pressure If it is lower than the Residual Pressure Constraint the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied Therefore Needed Fire Flow Constra
71. factors Friction Loss Methods Hazen Williams Equation The Hazen Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe systems such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains The formula is as follows Q k C A R083 90 54 Where Q Discharge in the section m s cfs C _ Hazen Williams roughness coefficient unitless A Flowarea m ft R Hydraulic radius m ft S Friction slope m m ft ft Constant 0 85 for SI 1 32 for US Il Darcy Weisbach Equation Because of its non empirical origins the Darcy Weisbach equation is viewed by many engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses It most commonly takes the following form 2 ere D 2g Where he Headloss m ft f Darcy Weisbach friction factor unitless D Pipe diameter m ft Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 277 B L Pipe length m ft V Flow velocity m s ft s g Gravitational acceleration constant m s ft s For section geometries that are not circular this equation is adapted by relating a circular section s full flow hydraulic radius to its diameter D 4R Where R Hydraulic radius m ft This can then be rearranged to the form Q A Jeg 45 Where Discharge m s cfs Q A Flowarea m ft R Hydraulic radius m ft S Friction slope m m ft ft f Darcy Weisbach friction factor unitless 8 Gravitational acceleration constan
72. follows e Main File A binary file with an extension of SHP It contains the spatial attributes associated with the map features For example a polyline record contains a series of points and a point record contains X and Y coordinates e Index File A binary file with an extension of SHX It contains the byte position of each record in the main file e Database File A dBase III file with an extension of DBF It contains the non spatial data associated with the map features All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension and be located in the same directory 13 2 8 Shapefile Connection Example Follow these steps to connect one or more Shapefiles to the model 1 From the File menu select Synchronize Shapefile Connections 2 If you do not have any connections currently defined you will be asked if you want to create a new one now Select Yes If you already have one or more connections defined you will go to the Shapefile Connection Manager Click Add to access the Shapefile Connection Wizard 3 Provide an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify this new connection Click the Next button 4 Choose the element types that you wish to import by clicking one or more of the check boxes in the list and click the Next button 5 Configure the options for this connection First select the unit for the spatial data of the Shapefile Then if appropriate for your situation click the E
73. for all network elements e Show Graphic Annotations Graphic annotation includes lines borders and text in Stand Alone mode only e Show Element Annotations Element annotation includes any dynamic annotation that is added to the project by the Annotation Wizard e Show Source Symbols For a water quality analysis a symbol may be displayed next to nodes that are defined as a Constituent Source e Show Control Symbols A symbol may be displayed next to pump valve and pipe elements with one or more controls as defined in the Controls tab of the element editors e Show Flow Arrows Arrows indicating the flow direction may be displayed after calculations have been run FlexUnits Unit flexibility is available from almost anywhere within Haestad Methods software including elemental dialogs FlexTables and the FlexUnits Manager Set Field Options Most dialogs allow you access to FlexUnits to set such options as the units rounding and scientific notation for any field in the dialog To set the display options for a unitized attribute 1 Right click the field and select Properties from the pop up context menu The Set Field Options dialog will appear 2 Set the options you want for your units 3 Click OK to set the options for the field or Cancel to leave without making changes You will be able to change the following characteristics e Units e Display Precision e Scientific Notation e Min
74. for which several points in the pattern are known and sections in between are transitional resulting in a smoother pattern On the continuous pattern in the figure above the value and slope at the start time and end times are the same This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns that repeat Because of the finite time steps used for calculations this software converts continuous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms 9 9 1 Pattern Manager Patterns provide an effective means of applying time variable system loads to the distribution model There are two separate managers for organizing and editing your patterns one for hydraulic demand the other for constituent source loading used when performing a water quality analysis to analyze a constituent concentration The Pattern Manager allows you to do the following e Add Click the Add button This will open the Pattern dialog where the specifics of the pattern can be entered e Edit Select the label of the pattern you wish to edit and click the Edit button The Fixed pattern cannot be edited e Duplicate Select the label of the pattern you wish to duplicate and press the Duplicate button The Fixed pattern cannot be duplicated e Delete Select the label of the pattern you wish to delete and click the Delete button The Fixed pattern cannot be deleted Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 177 9 9 2 In this program an individual j
75. gives you a powerful tool for modeling real world engineering scenarios when analyzing system response to different demands reviewing the impacts of future growth and iterating to find the least expensive design That means you will be able to finish your projects faster spend less money and improve your bottom line Appendix D Haestad Methods Software 305 D 1 D 2 Appendix D Haestad Methods Software Haestad Methods offers software solutions to Civil Engineers throughout the world for analyzing modeling and designing water distribution networks storm and sanitary sewer networks watersheds culverts hydraulic structures open channels and more All software is Windows based with point and click data entry flexible units and report quality outputs In addition to the ability to run in Stand Alone mode with a CAD like interface three of our products WaterCAD StormCAD and SewerCAD can be totally integrated within AutoCAD These three programs also share numerous powerful features such as scenario management unlimited undo redo customizable tables for editing and reporting customizable GIS database and spreadsheet connection and annotation Be sure to contact us or visit our web site at www haestad com to find out about our latest software books training and open houses WaterCAD WaterCAD is a powerful easy to use program that helps engineers design and analyze complex pressurized distribution pipe
76. have been changed in this alternative 152 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives e If the box is checked the record on that line has been modified and the data is local or specific to this alternative e If the box is not checked it means that the record on that line is inherited from its higher level parent alternative Inherited records are dynamic If the record is changed in the parent the change will be reflected in the child The records on these rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternative s parent As you make changes to records the check box will automatically become checked If you want to reset a record to its parent s values simply uncheck the corresponding check box Many columns support Global Editing allowing you to change all values in a single column Right click a column header to access the Global Edit option The checkbox column will be disabled when you edit a base alternative To access the Alternatives Editor for a particular alternative select it in the Alternatives dialog and click the Edit button 8 1 3 Physical Alternative One of the most common uses of a water distribution model is the design of new or replacement facilities During design it is common to try several physical alternatives in an effort to find the most cost effective solution For example when designing a replacement pipeline it would be beneficial to try several sizes and pipe materials
77. in length and should not be duplicated Define as many field links as necessary For each link specify the network attribute The shapefile variable will default to a preset calue which can be edited e Create Shapefile Connection Choose whether you want to establish a Shapefile Connection for this Shapefile or not The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the Shapefile with values from your model or to update your model from the Shapefile This component is identical to the Import Wizard s Create Shapefile Connection component While using the Wizard you can move forward or backward through the process by clicking the Next and Back buttons When you are finished defining the Shapefile click the Finished button to create it To export a specific network element type as a Shapefile choose File Export Shapefile from the pull down menu This opens the Shapefile Export Wizard Export Shapefile Link Editor The Export Shapefile link editor is similar to the Database Table link editor with the following differences Shapefile The name and location for the file that is being exported The Shapefile name is limited to eight characters The Field Links group is used to specify the attributes and Shapefile column headings that you wish to export as follows e Model Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being exported to the Shapefile The list of available attributes depends on the type of table
78. insight about the tools in this version of WaterCAD that are different from Cybernet v2 methods We have seen the questions that arise in technical support We designed WaterCAD v3 and v4 specifically to help our users avoid many of these problems while offering even more flexibility and a much friendlier interface Working with the Graphical Editor One of the first differences is the interface aside from just the difference of it being a Windows application WaterCAD v4 actually has two interfaces one for AutoCAD called WaterCAD s AutoCAD mode and our own CAD style stand alone interface called WaterCAD s Stand Alone Mode This offers an amazing amount of flexibility especially since both interfaces can be used with the exact same hydraulic model Organizations now have the flexibility to allow AutoCAD users and non AutoCAD users to work with the same model without struggling through any type of intermediate conversion Even the style of the two interfaces is similar with identical toolbars and menus Where is the Modeling Control Center MCC The Modeling Control Center in Cybernet v2 served two purposes tabular reporting and scenario management including calculation In WaterCAD v4 these same purposes are served by two separate objects which are each orders of magnitude better than anything that has come before FlexTables and Scenario Management Report Tables Flex Tables In Cybernet v2 you were provided with a t
79. instances of a character or series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text For instance if you selected elements with labels P 1 P 2 P 12 and J 5 you could to replace all the P s with the word Pipe by entering P in the Find field Pipe in the Replace With field and clicking the Apply button The resulting labels would be Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pipe 12 and J 5 You can also use this operation to delete portions of a label Suppose you now want to go back to the original labels you can enter ipe in the Find field and leave the Replace With field blank to reproduce the labels P 1 P 2 P 12 and J 5 There is also the option to match the case of the characters when searching for the characters to replace This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case field e Renumber This operation allows you to generate a new label including suffix prefix and ID number for each selected element For example if you had the following labels P 1 P 4 P 10 and Pipe 12 you could use this feature to renumber the elements in increments of five starting at five with a minimum number of two digits for the ID number field You could specify a prefix P and a suffix Z1 in the Prefix and Suffix fields respectively The prefix and suffix are appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number The value of the ID number for the first element relabeled five is entered in the Next fiel
80. is the same for every element and will appear in a single FlexTable column If at a later point you decide the date should be in a different format you can change the format for one type of element That change will filter through to all the elements that share that attribute 6 5 Zone Manager The zone manager allows you to manipulate zones quickly and easily Zones listed in the Zone Manager can be associated with each nodal element using the Element Editors Prototypes or FlexTables This manager includes a list of all of the available zones and standard manager features such as e Add Add a new zone to the zone list e Edit Make changes to an existing zone e Duplicate Create a copy of an existing zone e Delete Delete an existing zone J A Zone cannot be deleted if it is referenced by any element To open the Zone Manager dialog choose Zones from the Analysis menu 6 5 1 Zone Dialog The zone dialog allows you to name the zone label When a zone is named the junctions are automatically assigned the new name The zone dialog contains pertinent information including e Label Required name to identify the zone e Notes Optional input describing the zone Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 137 In addition to this information there are also buttons that enable you to make changes to the collection of elements in the zone such as adding elements to the zone Only one zone c
81. it is not checked the Concentration Limit field is applicable This box will typically be checked but certain constituents such as trihalomethanes THM s have a limiting concentration or formation potential that needs to be modeled e Concentration Limit Limiting concentration or potential for the constituent When a concentration limit is given reaction rates will be proportional to the difference of the current concentration and the concentration limit Concentration limit has units of mass per unit volume typically mg l or Ibs million gal Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries 209 The constituent library shipped by Haestad Methods includes a single constituent labeled Constituent The values for this constituent do not correspond to anything in particular It is not intended that you use this constituent for an actual analysis but it was provided simply as a starting point for the library A negative value for the reaction rate constants indicates constituent decay and a positive value indicates constituent growth Notes Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 211 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections Haestad Methods GIS Database Connection feature provides the modeler with the ability to dynamically exchange data with a variety of applications You can establish a Connection between your hydraulic model and relational and non relational database management systems RDBMS and DBMS
82. mode Right clicking over any other entity in the drawing will invoke standard AutoCAD right click behavior Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project AutoCAD drawing and right click to obtain a pop up menu from which you can select Edit 3 In AutoCAD 2000 this option is always available Simply select the element in the 4 3 2 Project Options The Project Options dialog allows you to set essential information about your project grouped into the following e Friction Method e Liquid e Input Modes e Pipe Length Rounding To access the Project Options tab select Tools Options from the pull down menus Friction Method The friction method option enables you to select the methodology for determining flow resistance and friction losses during calculations Available methodologies include e Darcy Weisbach Colebrook White Equation e Hazen Williams Formula e Manning s Formula If you change the friction method after pipes have been entered into the network the program will ask if you want to update the roughness values of those pipes If you select Yes the program will assign all pipes a new roughness that corresponds to the default roughness of the pipe material Liquid You can specify the type of liquid transported by the network the characteristics of which kinematic viscosity and specific gravity are defined in the Liquid Library J The kinematic viscosity is used in determining the friction coeffic
83. no For each AutoCAD block to be converted specify 4 the WaterCAD node element to be created Preview AutoCAD Block WaterCAD Element Insert m i junction Pressure Junction Delete jev PV O E aid 4 PUMP Pump O 4 RESERVOIR jeservol a Cancel Help Finished You will be given the option to alter the prototype settings This option is useful if you want to import in multiple passes grouping like data together to make the data entry process more automated For instance we could have chosen to import all of the 100 mm pipes then the 150 mm pipes etc changing the prototype each time For this example we will leave the prototypes as we set them in the Project Setup Wizard Click Next Make sure that the layers HMI_NODE and HMI_PIPE are both checked and click Finished to perform the conversion When it is completed Close the statistics window Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 85 Polyline to Pipe Wizard Eg Select the layers that contain elements you would like to convert Preview Drawing IV Only include elements that will be converted v V HMI_PIPE Cancel Help lt Back Nery 6 A Drawing Review dialog element opens with junctions listed The purpose of the Drawing Review is to alert you to problems or assumptions made during the import Find any one of these junctions by highlighting it in the list and clicking Go To The drawing pane will center
84. node The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation Pump Tool Pumps are elements that add head to the system as water passes through A Pump is represented as a node Valve Tool Valves are elements that open throttle or close to satisfy a condition you specify A valve is represented as a node EE E EB Spot Elevation Tool In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements supplemental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unnecessary model nodes S a Although elements can be inserted individually the most rapid method of network creation is through the Pipe Layout tool The Pipe Layout tool enables you to connect existing nodes with new pipes but also allows you to create new nodes as you lay out the pipes For example when the Pipe Layout tool is active clicking within the drawing pane will insert a node Clicking again at another location will insert another node and connect the two with a pipe Use the on line tutorials to experience it interactively 5 1 3 Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node While laying out the network you may need to change the type of node that the pipe layout tool inserts This can be done very easily and quickly by following the steps outlined below 1 Right click in a blank area of the graphical editor 2 A context menu w
85. of Contents D 5 CulvertMaster D 6 FlowMaster References Glossary Index 306 307 309 311 319 Preface xi Preface Thank you for purchasing WaterCAD At Haestad Methods we pride ourselves in providing the very best engineering software available Our goal is to make software that is easy to install and use yet so powerful and intuitive that it anticipates your needs without getting in your way WaterCAD is a feature rich program with extensive on line documentation that is able to provide a level of instruction appropriate to your needs Do not be fooled by the existence of this user s guide You do not need to read anything to get started When you first use the program WaterCAD s intuitive interface and interactive dialogs will guide you If you need more information go to our comprehensive context sensitive on line help by either pressing the Help button present in each dialog box pressing the F1 key or right clicking anywhere in a dialog Help text regarding the area of the program in which you are working will be displayed We are betting that you will be able to use our product right out of the package If you know how to run Setup within Windows then go ahead and get right to work Install WaterCAD and enjoy Notes Chapter 1 Orientation 1 1 1 2 Chapter 1 Orientation What Is WaterCAD WaterCAD is a powerful yet easy to use program that helps engineers design and a
86. of a pump because pumps have built in check valves that prevent reverse flow The pump editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs e General General pump information including geographical data pump curve data initial settings and hydraulic results e Controls Data specifying the on off elevation settings of the pump as well as relative speed factor settings in the case of a variable speed pump e Quality Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog e Cost Cost Analysis input output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations e User Data Additional data as defined by the user New fields can be added e Messages Calculation messages such as warnings or error messages and user defined notes and descriptions For more information on the data refer to the topics describing each tab Valve Editor A valve is an element that opens throttles or closes to satisfy a condition you specify This software can model several different types of valves The behavior of a valve is determined by the upstream From Pipe and downstream To Pipe conditions The valve types include Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 115 6 2 6 2 1 e Pressure Reducer Valve PRV PRVs throttle to prevent the downstream hydraulic grade from exceeding a set value If the downstream grade rise
87. of a selected set of elements An instance where this is especially useful is with a model built from a database that uses numeric ID s to identify elements The element labels will be numeric identifiers when they are imported through a database connection making it difficult to distinguish between the different types of elements in the system With the element relabeling tool you can quickly append a prefix such as P to all the pipes in your system so that it is obvious which labels belong to elements representing pipes 108 Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools The Relabel Elements dialog contains two sections e Relabel Operations Allows you to select and define the operations you want to perform e Elements Selected Allows you to select which elements in your project you want to relabel To access the Relabel Element dialog select Tools Relabel Elements from the main menu 5 6 2 Relabel Operations The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of element labels Append Replace and Renumber The active relabel operation is chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements dialog The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section The following list presents a description of the available element relabel operations e Replace This operation allows you to replace all
88. of any AutoCAD polyline by performing a LIST command on it Selection Sets Selection sets are user defined groups of network elements They allow you to predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together Selection sets are defined through the Selection Set Manager in the Tools menu Selection Set Manager The Selection Set Manager is used to create edit and duplicate selection sets e Add Add a new selection set e Edit Edit an existing selection set e Duplicate Copy an existing selection set e Delete Delete an existing selection set e Rename Rename an existing selection set e Notes Add a note regarding the selection set 104 Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools New Selection Set After clicking Add in the Selection Set Manager a dialog appears Simply enter the name of your new selection set in the dialog Click OK to name the selection set or Cancel to exit the dialog without creating a selection set Selection Set Dialog In this dialog you will notice two panes A listing of all the elements in the network is displayed in the Available Items pane To add items to the Selected Items pane select elements using the mouse and click the gt button under Add To add all the elements to your selection set click the gt gt button Additionally you can click the Select button to highlight those items in the Available Items pane using sorts filters or the actual
89. of any memo fields displayed as multiple line scrolling text panes User Memos are defined in the User Data Extension dialog which is accessed from the Tools menu 6 2 9 Messages Tab All element dialogs have a Messages tab which contains three parts e Message List Contains information that is generated during the calculation of the model such as warnings errors and status updates e Description An informative statement that you may enter about the element e Notes Contains notes that you enter and may include a description of the element a summary of your data sources or any other information of interest J Messages descriptions and notes will be printed in any element report 6 3 Prototypes Prototypes allow you to enter default values for the elements in your network These values are used while laying out the network Prototypes can reduce data entry requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data For example if a section of the network contains all PVC pipes use the pipe prototype to set the Material field to PVC When a new pipe is created its material attribute will default to PVC J Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect any elements created prior to the change If a section of your system has distinctly different characteristics than the rest of the system adjust your prototypes before laying out that section This will save t
90. of pumping can be reversed by clicking the Reverse button e Operating Point Values of pump head and discharge which are computed by the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow rates e Water Quality Result of the water quality computations at this pump reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed For more information on the data see the topic on each section The Water Quality section is identical for all elements and is described in the Pressure Pipe General Tab section General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the pump such as e Label Unique name referencing the pump in reports error messages and tables e X Easting The location of the pump may be represented by an X value or an Easting value depending on individual preferences e Y Northing The location of the pump may be represented by a Y value or an Northing value depending on individual preferences e Elevation Elevation of the pump Pump Section The information required for the pump varies depending on the type of pump which was selected The possible information presented is as follows e Pump Type Select one of the six available types of pump curve definitions e Pump Power Represents the horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump into the water Depending on the pump s efficiency the actual power consumed brake horsepower may vary e Shutoff Po
91. of the WCD file is created with a WCK extension Note that AutoCAD also generates a backup drawing file with a BAK extension Shapefile Database Connection Files If you use the Shapefile or Database Connections Managers to exchange data with external data sources the connection files you create use have the HSC and HDC extension respectively By default they are named WTRC HSC and WTRC HDC and are located in your haestad wtre directory In this case these connections are shared between all your projects You are also given the option to keep these connections local to your project In this case these files are placed in your current project directory with the same name as your WCD file but with the HSC and HDC file extensions respectively See the Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects and Sharing Database Connections between Projects topics in the GIS and Database Connections chapter for more information 88 Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 Libraries Libraries are saved in separate files so they can be shared between projects The paths are specified in the Engineering Library Manager They have a HLB extension and are located by default in your haestad wtre directory Additional Files WaterCAD creates additional files in the same directory as your WCD file to save the calculation results Since recalculating the scenarios can regenerate these results these fil
92. of the project to Lesson 5 Fire Flow Analysis Click OK Previously we ran an analysis with a fire flow at node J 6 by manually adding a large demand to the individual node Before running the automated fire flow analysis we will create a new Demand Alternative removing that demand Select Analysis Alternatives from the pull down menus and click the Demand tab Highlight Average Daily with 2000 l min Fire Flow and click Duplicate In the Demand Summary column for node J 6 row 6 click the word Composite and it changes to a button Click the Composite button to open the editor for the composite demand Click the 2000 l min demand and click Delete Select Yes to confirm OK to close the editor and Close to exit the Demand Alternative You will now see the Demand Alternative Copy of Average Daily with 2000 l min Fire Flow in the list Highlight it and click the Rename button Rename this Alternative Base Average Daily You are going to analyze the fire flows by adding to the Maximum Day Demands which are 1 5 times the Average Day Demands Set up the Maximum Day Demand Alternative by highlighting the Base Average Daily Alternative and selecting Duplicate Right click the Demand column and select Global Edit Set the Operation to multiply and enter a value of 1 5 Click OK Click Close to exit the new Demand Alternative and Rename this Alternative Max Day Then click the Fire Flow tab in the
93. of the User Data tab in the element editor dialog e Number Use this data type for fields that contain numeric values You can specify a unit for the information in this field The values contained in this field will then be automatically converted if you change the unit for this field e Text Use this data type to create a single line text field e Yes No Use this data type to display the attribute as a check box to represent the affirmative or negative state of the information Format Section This section is enabled only if you select Date Time or Number in the Type section letting you define the properties governing the type of data selected Number Format If the type of data you selected was numeric you can select a unit type length volume intensity etc a unit a display precision and whether or not to use scientific notation There are not any format options for memo text and Yes No data types Date Time Type Format If you selected the Date Time type you can specify whether you expect the date or time to be displayed first in the input field and the format of the date and time information The format in which the date and time information will be displayed can either be selected from the drop down lists or you can type your own custom format directly into the Date Picture and Time Picture fields If one of these fields is left blank the corresponding information will not be displayed The Date Time data ty
94. off and enter the desired values for the minimum maximum and increment If desired you can customize a single axis while leaving the other in the Automatic Scaling mode e Log Scale Place a check mark in this box to use a log scale for this axis You can use a log scale for one or both axes Grid for graphs only e X Axis Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the X Axis labels e Y Axis Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the Y Axis labels e Line Color Use this selection list to define the color to use for both axes grid lines e Line Style Use this selection list to define the line type solid dashed etc to use for both axes grid lines e Fill Color Use this selection list to define the color to use for background fill within the plotting boundaries of the graph e Save as Default Place a check mark in this box to save the current grid settings as the default for subsequent graphs J You can choose to use grid lines for one or both axes Display for pie charts only e Data Labels Allows you to annotate the pie charts with percentages labels or both e Chart View Allows you to generate a 3D view pie chart e Legend Location Allows you to place the legend if any on the left right top or bottom of the pie chart e Percentages Indicates how many decimals are to be displayed for the percentage figures Legen
95. or arc as a template to define an equivalent WaterCAD pipe or series of pipes While you are in the Pipe Layout command you may invoke the Entity conversion option by using the Entity keyword or by selecting Entity from the right mouse button context menu Once selected you will be prompted to choose an entity to use as a basis for a new pipe and conditionally specify the type of nodal WaterCAD element s to use at each end of the pipe In these cases use an arc as the defining template entity for the pipe creation This command is extremely useful for constructing pipes that follow a curved alignment 15 7 3 Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode this special AutoCAD command allows you to use a selection of AutoCAD entities arcs lines polylines and blocks as a defining template set for the creation of equivalent WaterCAD elements This command performs the element generation in batch fashion You are prompted for the selection of entities to convert and the selection is followed by the Polyline to Pipe Conversion Wizard that leads you through a sequence of steps defining the basis of the batch conversion The actual steps to be followed in the Wizard are fully described in the AutoCAD Polyline to Pipe Conversion topic the selection set that is going to be used as a basis for generating actual WaterCAD model elements For instance it may be desirable to select like sized
96. pipe positive in the flow direction m ft This software implements a first order reaction rate model that uses a composite reaction rate coefficient This effectively simulates reactions occurring in the bulk fluid as well as at the fluid pipe wall interface Sources Rossman Lewis A et al Discrete Volume Element Method for Network Water Quality Models Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management Vol 119 No 5 Sep Oct 1993 Rossman Lewis A and Paul F Boulos Numerical Methods for Modeling Water Quality in Distribution Systems a Comparison Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management Vol 122 No 2 Mar Apr 1996 Reaction Rate Model This software s reaction model recognizes that the growth or decay of a substance is driven by reactions occurring both within the bulk flow component and with the material along the pipe wall The model uses first order kinetics to simulate the wall and bulk reactions The expression for the general substance decay rate model for each link i is given below R C k C Je Cay R Hi Where k First order bulk reaction rate constant 1 s Ci Substance concentration in bulk flow mg l ke Mass transfer coefficient between bulk flow and pipe wall m s ft s Ryui Hydraulic radius of pipe Diameter 4 m ft Cwi Substance concentration at the wall mg l Assuming the rate of reaction at the wall is first order and no net accumulation of material occurs
97. regarding Haestad Methods latest products and prices Fax 1 203 597 1488 Phone 1 203 755 1666 Email Sales haestad com Technical Support We hope that everything runs smoothly and you never have a need for our technical support staff However if you do need support our highly skilled staff offers their services seven days a week and may be contacted by phone fax and the Internet For information on the various levels of support that we offer contact our sales team today and request information on our ClientCare Program When calling for support in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your problem please be in front of your computer and have the following information available Operating system your computer is running Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT etc Name and version number of the Haestad Methods software you are calling about Version of AutoCAD you are running if applicable Any error messages or other information that was generated A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem When e mailing or faxing for support please provide the following additional details to enable us to provide a timely and accurate response Company name address and phone number A detailed explanation of your concerns Hours Monday Friday 9 00 AM to 8 00 PM EST Saturday and Sunday 9 00 AM to 5 00 PM EST You can contact our technical support team at Phone 1 203 755 1666 Fa
98. section or a variable area cross section The cross section of a tank with a constant area is the same throughout the depth The cross section of a tank with a variable area varies throughout the depth Crosshairs The cursor consisting of two lines that look like a plus sign Current Storage Volume The volume of water currently stored in a tank It includes both the hydraulically active volume and the hydraulically inactive volume Database See external file Database Connection A connection between WaterCAD and a data source which is represented by a group of database links There may be a single linked external file within a connection or there may be several external file links within a single connection DBMS An acronym that stands for Database Management System Demand The total demand from an individual junction for the current time period It is based on the information from the Demand tab of the Junction Editor Design Point Point at which a pump was originally intended to operate and is typically the best efficiency point BEP of the pump At discharges above or below this point the pump is not operating under optimum conditions Diameter The distance between two internal points directly opposite each other in a pipe or a valve Discharge Volumetric rate of flow given in units of length time Double Click To click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession Glossary 31
99. select the node type 2 Inthe Drawing Pane place the cursor over the pipe and click 3 You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to split the pipe If you choose to split the pipe the node will be inserted and two new pipes will be created with the same characteristics as the original pipe lengths are split proportionally 4 If you choose not to split the pipe the new element will be placed on top of the pipe without connecting to anything Selecting Elements You can select one element or a group of elements in the graphical editor on which you can then perform various operations such as moving deleting and editing Selecting Elements Stand Alone Mode In Stand Alone mode first activate the Select tool N To select a single element simply click it To select a group of elements click in the drawing pane and drag the mouse to form a rectangle around the elements you want to select then click again to choose the other corner of the rectangle All elements that are fully enclosed within the selection rectangle will be selected To select or deselect other elements or groups of elements you can follow the same instructions as above while holding down the Shift key Note that there are also many other ways to select elements through the Edit menu When an element is selected in the Stand Alone drawing pane it will be displayed with at least one grip A grip is a black box as shown below that indicates the figure s ins
100. set up a new Scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating the new Alternative Select Analysis Scenarios from the pull down menus Create a new Child off of the Age Analysis Scenario by highlighting it and clicking Scenario Management Add Child Scenario Type in Trace Analysis as the new Scenario name and click OK Under the Alternatives tab click to check the box labeled Trace and select the Trace Analysis for Tank Alternative from the list box 3 In the calculation tab select the Trace radio button in the Analysis section and leave everything else set to the inherited values Click Close to exit the dialog click GO Batch Run and run the analysis for the new Scenario 4 Use color coding by Calculated Trace tables and graphs to view the results of this run As you scroll through the time periods notice how the colors spread outward from the tank during periods when the tank is draining and recede when the tank begins to fill For more information on reporting features see Lesson 4 Close the open dialogs and save this project before proceeding with Lesson 7 Lesson 7 Data from External Sources WaterCAD supports several methods of exchanging data with external applications preventing duplication of effort and allowing you to save time by reusing data already present in other locations For instance you can exchange data with databases or a GIS system or you can convert existing CAD linework to
101. shortest travel time through any network link over the analysis interval as expressed below with i representing all links in the network ef Where V Total volume of liquid in link i m ft Qi Flow rate in link i m s ft s Once T has been established the number of volume elements and the volume of each element in a pipe i can be calculated as follows Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 287 B 4 Vi ni Q t Vi Vi ni Where n Number of volume elements in link i Volume of each volume element in link i m ft Vi To develop a water quality simulation based on a series of EPS hydraulic intervals the network links are individually partitioned into component volume elements for each hydraulic time step Ideally this partitioning should honor the numerical constraints defined above Under extreme conditions this may not be possible and the modeler may wish to modify the segmentation scheme by setting practical limits on quality time step maximum number of segments or a limiting hydraulic time interval The constituent mass is propagated through the system network over each water quality time step in four phases 6 Kinetic reaction The mass concentration undergoes a kinetic concentration change by applying the kinetic reaction function 7 Nodal mixing The constituent mass and incoming volumes are mixed at nodes 8 Advection The constituent mass is transferred between volume el
102. solution there are some governing principles that drive the behavior of the network including the Conservation of Mass and Energy Principle and the Energy Principle The two modes of analysis are Steady State Network Hydraulics and Extended Period Simulation Regardless of the mode used this program solves for the distributions of flows and hydraulic grades using the Gradient Algorithm B 1 2 The Energy Principle The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system the change in energy is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus the sum of the potential kinetic and internal molecular forms of energy such as electrical and chemical energy The internal energy changes are commonly disregarded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude In hydraulic applications energy is often represented with units of energy per unit weight resulting in units of length Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel for the resulting behavior of the system When using these length equivalents the state of the system is expressed in terms of head The energy at any point within a hydraulic system is often represented in three parts e Pressure Head p e Elevation Head Z e Velocity Head V7 2g Wh
103. spreadsheets and ESRI Shapefiles Throughout the rest of this chapter the term external file will be used to generically refer to any one of these types of files Where information pertains to a specific type of external file that type will be used The GIS Database Connection system is extremely powerful It can be used to update hundreds or thousands of database records with a few clicks of the mouse This chapter provides a detailed look at the structure and behavior of the system so that you can use it in the most effective manner The purpose of the GIS Database Connection system is to provide you with a safe and convenient means of exchanging data with external files This system has several advantages over simply providing an open file format for direct manipulation by the end user Generality Open file formats have a specific form that must be adhered to This restrictiveness is problematic for both the developer and the end user Developers are now under additional constraints when modifying the software They must be cognizant of the fact that users may depend on this format and are therefore less free to modify it The end user on the other hand has no control over this format and is therefore at the mercy of the developer A new version may change the format completely and all of your existing data must be converted In addition the file format is rarely convenient for an end user since it is typically chosen for efficient pro
104. that it is ALWAYS best to model the entire system back to the source This method is only an approximation and may not represent the water system under all flow conditions Qr Qf Ar Hf 54 Where Qr Flow available at the desired fire flow residual pressure Qf Flow during test Hr Pressure drop to desired residual pressure Static Pressure minus Residual Pressure Hf Pressure drop during test Static Pressure minus Design Pressure Example Determining the Three Point Pump Curve First point This point is generated by measuring the static pressure at the hydrant when the flow Q is equal to zero Q 0 gpm H 90 psi or 207 9 feet of head found from 90 2 31 2 31 is the conversion factor used to convert psi to feet of head Second point The engineer chooses a pressure for this point and the flow is calculated using the formula below The value for Q should lie somewhere between the data collected from the test Q H 55 psi or 127 05 feet found from 55 2 31 chosen value Formula Qr Of Hr Hf 54 Qr 800 90 55 90 22 54 Qr 800 35 68 54 Qr 800 514 54 Qr 800 69 Qr 558 Therefore Q 558 gpm Third point This point is generated by measuring the flow Q at the residual pressure of the hydrant Q 800 gpm H 22 psi or 50 82 ft of head from 22 2 31 258 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions Pump curve values fo
105. the flow Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints A true or false statement indicating whether or not this junction node meets the fire flow constraints A checkmark in the box means the Fire Flow Constraints were satisfied for that node If there is no checkmark the Fire Flow Constraints were NOT satisfied Select The process of adding one or more elements to an active selection set Selection Set The active group of selected elements A selection set allows editing or an action such as move or delete to be performed on a group of elements Shape The cross sectional geometric form of a conveyance element i e circular box arch etc Shutoff Point The point at which a pump will have zero discharge Typically the maximum head point on a pump curve Size Inside diameter of a pipe section for a circular pipe See also diameter Starting Elevation The value that is used as the beginning condition for an extended period simulation Status Pane The area at the bottom of the window used for displaying status information Storage Node Special type of node where a free water surface exists and the hydraulic head is simply the elevation of the water surface above sea level Sub Menu A list of related options that is typically reached by selecting a pull down menu item 318 Glossary Table Links A table link must be created for every database table or spreadsheet worksheet that is to be linke
106. the form of rainfall tables or rainfall equations Flows are then calculated using the rational method The gravity network is solved using the built in numerical model which utilizes both the direct step and standard step gradually varied flow profile computation methods Flow calculations are valid for both pressure and varied flow situations and will solve for hydraulic jumps backwater and drawdown curves StormCAD s flexible reporting feature allows you to customize and print the model results in any type of report including plan and profile views for analysis construction documents or agency review D 4 PondPack PondPack is a powerful comprehensive Windows based hydrologic modeling program that analyzes a tremendous range of situations from simple sites to complex networked watersheds The program analyzes pre and post developed watershed conditions and estimates required storage ponds PondPack performs interconnected pond routing and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects multiple outfalls pond infiltration and pond detention times This program can utilize any rainfall duration or distribution In a single run it computes hydrographs for multiple storm events adds them at junctions and routes them through reaches and ponds PondPack graphically displays many items including watershed diagrams hydrographs rainfall curves and IDF curves All graphics are fully AutoCAD compatible via DXF export
107. the material engineering library Use this button to specify specific uses for the material The Engineering Library dialogs can be accessed by selecting Tools Engineering Libraries from the pull down menus and clicking the Edit column and the button that appears next to the Library you want to edit Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries 207 12 1 2 12 1 3 Material Properties A user editable library of materials is provided Pipes and ditches channels in StormCAD are constructed from various materials It is often useful to specify the material of the pipes and channels ditches in your hydraulic and hydrologic models Materials provide the pipe or channel with a default value for the roughness coefficient used in the friction equations Therefore a material must be defined with the following properties e Label Name of the material as it will appear in material choice lists e Culvert Inlet Material Type Limits the type of culvert inlets that are available in the material used in CulvertMaster The inclusion of this property allows the sharing of libraries among Haestad Methods products e Manning s Coefficient Default value for Manning s n This is a unitless number generally between 0 009 and 0 300 e Roughness Height Default value for absolute roughness height This will be used in conjunction with the Darcy Weisbach friction equation The roughness height has units of length typically mm or ft e K
108. to display all pipes sizes between 2 and 8 in green those between 10 and 24 in blue and those between 27 and 48 in red To access Color Coding select Tools Color Coding from the main menu or click the Color Coding rainbow button on the main toolbar or double click a color coding legend figure in the drawing Color Coding Dialog At the top of the Color Coding dialog are two tabs Link and Node You can set up color coding for both links and nodes or just one of the two Attribute Select the attribute by which you would like to color code or select lt None gt to turn color coding off Selection Set Choose All Elements from the scroll down list for color coding to be applied to all elements nodes or links in the network or choose a selection set from the scroll down list Click on the ellipses button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection sets Minimum Maximum Calculated minimum and maximum for the specified attribute for elements in the specified selection set Calculate Range Automatically determine the minimum and maximum for the specified attribute and selection set Initialize Automatically calculate a set of default color coding ranges for the specified attribute and selection set based on the values in your project Use the Initialize and or the Insert buttons to define your color coding map Then click OK and the specified colors will be assigned to the elemen
109. tolerance is defined in the Pipe Split Candidates dialog which opens when this option is selected This option is useful for finding and correcting connectivity problems e Select Orphaned Nodes This option allows you to select all orphaned nodes in your network A node is an orphan when it is not connected to any pipe e Select Elements with Messages This option allows you to select all the elements that have warnings or error messages which appear in the Messages tab of an element editor dialog This is useful for correcting data entry errors Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 107 5 5 1 5 6 5 6 1 e Select Clear Drawing Review Messages This option allows you to reset Drawing Review messages for all elements in the list Drawing Review messages are automatically added during various Import operations such as Polyline to Pipe Import Land Development Desktop Import in SewerCAD or StormCAD etc After you review and fix these problems you may want to clear the review messages If you want to retain some of the drawing review messages simply remove those elements from the list prior to performing this operation The elements you select will appear in the primary list located along the left side of the Drawing Review window e Go To To navigate to an element select the desired element in the list and press the Go To button o Next Prev To navigate to the elements sequentially use the Next or Prev but
110. traits as eye color hair color and bone structure There are two significant differences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is implemented in software e Overriding inheritance e Dynamic inheritance C 8 Overriding Inheritance Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics A child can override inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic These overriding values do not affect the parent and are therefore considered local to the child Local values can also be removed at any time reverting the characteristic to its inherited state The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes only in local attributes For example suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent Now the child puts on a pair of green tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye color When the contact lenses are on we say his natural eye color is overridden locally and his eye color is green When the child removes the tinted lenses his eye color instantly reverts to blue as inherited from his parent C 9 Dynamic Inheritance Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world When a parent s characteristic is changed existing children also reflect the change Using the eye color example this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to brown and the children s eyes instantl
111. u options are added to display and control the value and units associated with the attribute The Preview column shows an example of the annotation with values for the variables For this example we will add annotation for the demand summary at each junction 4 In the first row of the attribute column select Demand Calculated from the list and click Next Add Discharge and Velocity annotations for the pipes in the same manner and click Next 5 The final dialog of the Annotation Wizard contains a summary where you can check your annotations If there are any errors click the Back button to go backwards in the wizard and make any necessary changes Click Finished A Ev NE Oe ye oc a2 58 Y 25 RESIDENTIAL a s as COMMERCIAL P 3 Discharge 141 l min Velocity 1 65 m s J 2 Demand Calculated 4 l min y e 6 The drawing will now display all of the annotations You can try changing the properties of an element and recalculating The annotations will update automatically to reflect any changes in the system 7 If the annotation is crowded you can click and drag the annotation to move it In the AutoCAD version click on the annotation and then click the grip to move it or use an AutoCAD command such as Move or Stretch Alternatively you could go back into the Annotation Wizard and abbreviate or remove the Mask labels A third option is to decrease the Annotation Height This option is f
112. unit system This is specified on the Global Options tab accessed from the Tools Options menu from the main menu The display units can also be changed from several other areas in the program with any changes being project wide For example if length is changed from units of feet to meters all pipe dialogs will display length in meters If you change the units in the pipe dialog from meters to yards the FlexUnits Manager will indicate that length is in yards FlexTables have the ability to use localized units which are maintained separately from the current project settings This allows you to create reports using units that differ from the currently active ones Notes Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 99 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools This chapter describes the various tools that are available to simplify the process of graphically or manually entering network data These tools allow you to select elements to perform various graphical or editing operations locate particular elements review the network for potential connection problems label or relabel elements review your data or define any new type of data Graphical Editor One of the most powerful features of the graphical editor both in Stand Alone and AutoCAD mode is the ability to create move edit and delete network elements graphically With these capabilities modeling becomes a simple point and click exercise
113. would result in the following set 12 15 18 not 10 13 16 19 e Index Increment Value for which contours will be highlighted and labeled The index increment should be an even multiple of the standard increment e Initialize This button located to the right of the Contour section will initialize the Minimum Maximum Increment and Index Increment values based on the actual values observed for the elements in the selection set e Color by Index The standard contours and index contours have separately controlled colors so you can make the index contours more apparent e Color by Range Contours are colored based on attribute ranges Use the Initialize button to create five evenly spaced ranges and associated colors Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 195 11 5 2 11 5 3 11 5 4 11 5 5 Initialization can be accomplished by clicking the Initialize button This program will then automatically generate values for the minimum maximum and so on to create an evenly spaced contour set These values may or may not be the desired range for your purposes but should at least give you a better concept of the range of values with which you are dealing oY To access the Contour Map Manager click on the Contour button on the main toolbar or select Tools Contouring from the menus Contour Plot The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accurate straight lin
114. you must hold down the Shift key while making multiple selections When you are finished right click and select Done in Stand Alone The nodes you selected are now in the Selected Items list Click OK to exit the Selection Set dialog Note that the Selection Set table is now filled with your Selection Set Click the Close button to exit the Fire Flow Alternative dialog and Close again to exit the Alternative Manager dialog Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 59 Fire Flow Alternative Base Fire Flow x m Flow Constraints m Pressure Constraints Needed Fire Flow 3 000 Imin Residual Pressure 150 00 kPa Fire Flow Upper Limit 6 000 Imin Minimum Zone Pressure 150 00 kPa Apply Fire Flows By Adding to Basel 7 I Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint A Minimum System Pressure 150 00 kPa Selection Set S NAE Label hae Adds Upper Limit Residual dinimum Zonlinimum Syste Use Defaults To Demand Adds To Demand Pressure Pressure Pressure BEEE l min l min kPa kPa kPa Close Help Base Data 0 Inherited Data Local Data 3 5 2 Part 2 Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis 1 You must now set up a new Scenario to utilize the appropriate alternatives and set up the calculation options Select Analysis Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager and choose Scenario Management Add Base Scenario Name your new Scenario Automated Fire Flow Analysis and click OK
115. 0 References Walski Thomas M Water System Modeling Using CYBERNET Haestad Methods 1993 Zipparro Vincent J and Hasen Hans Davis Handbook of Applied Hydraulics McGraw Hill Book Company New York 1993 Glossary 311 Glossary Age Length of time the water has been in the system which is used as a general water quality indicator than a measurement of anything specific Available Fire Flow Amount of flow available at a node for fire protection while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints Base Elevation and Level Elevation from which all tank levels are measured For example a tank level of two meters represents a water surface elevation two meters above the base elevation Boundary Node Node with a known hydraulic grade It may be static unchanging with time such as a reservoir or dynamic changes with time such as a tank Every pipe network must contain at least one boundary node In order to compute the hydraulic grade at the other nodes in the network boundary nodes must be reachable from a boundary Bulk Reaction Coefficient Coefficient used to define how rapidly a constituent grows or decays over time It is expressed in units of 1 time Calculated Minimum System Pressure See minimum system pressure Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same zone as the node where fire flow withdrawal occurs Calculated Residual Press
116. 223 Shapefile Connection 222 223 Eulerian Approach 286 Examining Another Physical Alternative 47 Example Projects 7 Lessons 29 Tutorials 7 Exit WaterCAD 17 Explode Elements AutoCAD Mode 242 Export Database 16 213 214 215 DXF 17 235 Profiles in AutoCAD 198 Shapefile 16 226 227 Shapefile Link Editor 226 Spot Elevations 16 252 253 Table to ASCII 147 Extended Edit Button 313 Extended Period Analysis 167 Lesson 2 38 External File 313 Extrapolate 313 F Factor Relative Speed 121 Fax Number 8 Field Links 217 Share 136 Field Links 313 Figure Properties 240 File Extension 313 File Management 87 Filter Tables 145 Find Element 17 104 Fire Flow 128 129 Alternative 156 157 158 Analysis 172 Available 311 Input 129 Needed 315 Results 129 172 Theory 172 Total Needed See Fire Flow Constraints Satisfies See Fire Flow Upper Limit 313 Fire Hydrants 256 First Order Reaction Rate Function 280 Fitting Loss Coefficients 279 292 Fittings Library 207 FlexTables 139 FlexUnits 95 96 Table 97 99 Flow 313 Arrows Visibility 95 Flow Control Valve 275 FlowMaster 307 Format 96 User Data 134 Formulas 287 Friction Method Theory 275 From Node 313 From Pipe 313 G General Status Information 27 Global Edit 144 Global Options 90 91 Global Settings 87 Globe Button 5 Index 323 Glossary
117. 3 Drag To hold down one of the mouse buttons while you move the mouse Element An object such as a tank junction node or pipe in a drawing Elevation The distance from a datum plane to the center of the element Elevations are often referenced with mean sea level as the datum elevation Energy Grade Line EGL Sum of datum base elevation elevation velocity head and pressure head at a section Extended Edit Button A small button with an ellipsis as the label Extended edit buttons are located next to drop down choice lists and provide further editing for the associated choice list items External File Any file outside of this program that can be linked These include database files such as FoxPro Dbase or Paradox and spreadsheets such as Excel or Lotus Throughout the documentation all of these file types will be referred to as databases or external files interchangeably Extrapolate To estimate the value of an unknown point based on other known values with the desired point lying outside the known range Often based upon extending the slope of the line connecting the previous known values to the desired point See also interpolate Field Links The actual mapping between model element attributes and columns within each database table File Extension The period and three characters typically at the end of a filename A file extension usually identifies the kind of informatio
118. 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Lesson 1 Constructing a Network Steady State Analysis 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 Part 1 Creating a New Project File Part 2 Laying Out the Network Part 3 Entering Data Part 4 Entering Data through Dialogs Part 5 Entering Data through FlexTables Part 6 Performing a Steady State Analysis Lesson 2 Extended Period Simulation 3 2 1 3 2 2 Part 1 Creating Demand Patterns Part 2 Running an Extended Period Simulation Lesson 3 Scenario Management 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 Part 1 Creating a New Alternative Part 2 Editing and Creating Scenarios Part 3 Calculate and Compare Part 4 Physical Alternative Lesson 4 Reporting Results 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 Part 1 Reports Part 2 Tabular Reports FlexTables Part 3 Create a Plan and Profile Part 4 Contouring Part 5 Element Annotation Part 6 Color Coding Lesson 5 Automated Fire Flow Analysis 3 5 1 3 3 2 3 5 3 Part 1 Inputting Fire Flow Data Part 2 Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis Part 3 Viewing Fire Flow Results Lesson 6 Water Quality Analysis 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 Part 1 Computing Water Age Part 2 Analyzing Constituent Concentrations Part 3 Performing a Trace Analysis Lesson 7 Data from External Sources 3 7 1 3 7 2 Part 1 Importing Shapefile Data Part 2 Importing Data fro
119. 97 Plot 197 Project Example 7 Files 87 88 239 Inventory Report 192 New 89 Open 89 90 Options 88 92 Settings 87 Setup Wizard 88 Summary 15 88 90 Title 89 90 Project Summary 16 Prototype 88 132 Proxies 245 Publications 305 Pull down Menu 14 316 Pump 114 255 Affinity Laws 272 Constant Horsepower 274 Curve 120 272 273 274 Definition 120 Groundwater 254 Groundwater Well 254 Importing from EPANET 252 Initial Settings 155 Initital Condition 121 Operating Point 121 272 273 274 Parallel and Series 255 Power 120 Theory 272 Type 274 Variable Speed 273 Pump Curve 120 121 272 273 Pump Status 316 Pumps In Series 255 Parallel 255 Q Quick View Window 20 R RDBMS See DBMS Reaction Rate Model 280 281 Rebuild Figure Labels 239 Recent Files 15 Redefine WaterCAD Blocks 235 Redo 17 18 243 Reference Engineer s 287 References 309 Registration 4 23 Software 4 Regulating Valves 275 Relabel Elements 107 Relabel Operations 108 Relative Speed Factor 121 317 Remove Columns 142 Elements 103 Haestad Methods Products 3 Reports 48 49 50 187 Analysis Results 191 Detailed 190 191 Menu 22 Plan View 192 Predefined 190 Project Inventory 192 Scenario 192 Tabular 191 Reservoirs 113 Residual Pressure 317 Results 187 Review Drawing 106 Reynold s Number 317 Right Click Contex
120. Alternative Manager Click the Edit button to set up the Base Fire Flow Alternative Enter a Needed Fire Flow of 3 000 l min a Fire Flow Upper Limit of 6 000 l min and Apply Fire Flows By Adding to Baseline Demand This selection means that in performing the analysis the fire flow will be added to any demands already assigned to the junction Alternatively you could have selected to replace these demands so that the fire flow would represent the total demand at the node For Pressure Constraints set both the Residual Pressure and Minimum Zone Pressure to 150 kPa Leave the box for Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint unchecked so that the minimum pressure will only be checked for the zone a particular node is in Note that if you had multiple zones within your project and wanted to insure that a minimum system wide pressure constraint was met you could check the Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint box and type it in the box provided This box is grayed out until the check box is activated Using the Selection Set list box you can choose to apply the fire flow to All Junctions or a Subset of Junctions For this example choose the Subset of Junctions option Then click the ellipses button to open the Selection Set dialog For this example a fire flow analysis is only needed for the junctions at the four street corners in our drawing Choose the Select From Drawing button and click on nodes J 1 J 2 J 3 and J 4 in Stand Alone
121. Alternatives Calculation Results Notes alal Scenario Base Iteration Summary Balanced Trials 4 Accuracy 0 000674 Flow Summary Flow Supplied 1 217 l min Flow Demanded 847 l min Flow Stored 370 l min Boundary Summary R 1 Reservoir Emptying coe J ee 4 Click Close when you are done After a model run all the calculated fields in dialogs and tabular reports will display results See Lesson 4 for an overview of the output options available Before proceeding to the next lesson save this project for instance as MyLesson1 wcd in Stand Alone mode or MyLesson1 dwg in AutoCAD mode Lesson 2 Extended Period Simulation This lesson will illustrate how WaterCAD can model the behavior of a water distribution system through time using an extended period simulation EPS An EPS can be conducted for any duration specified by the user System conditions are computed over the given duration at a specified time increment Some of the types of system behaviors that can be analyzed using an EPS include how tank levels fluctuate when pumps are running whether valves are open or closed and how demands change throughout the day If at any time during this lesson the program asks Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N A click NO This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 1 If you have not completed Lesson 1 then open the project Lesson2 wcd Lesson2 dw
122. AutoCAD 237 Files 239 WaterCAD v4 New Features 1 WCD File 87 88 239 Welcome Dialog 23 90 91 Well 254 Groundwater 254 White Table Columns 143 Window Color 91 Wizards 188 226 Annotation Comparison 198 199 Polyline to Pipe 231 232 Project Setup 88 Scenario 162 Shapefile Connection 221 Shapefile Export 226 Shapefile Link 223 Workshops 7 X X Y Mode 92 X Coordinate 92 Y Y Coordinate 92 Z Zone 136 137 139 Manager 136 Zone Junction Minimum 315 Zone Pressure Minimum 315 Zoom 20 24 105
123. Before proceeding with the lessons however it is a good idea to run through the brief online tutorials accessed from the Help menu These interactive tutorials will take you rapidly through overviews of key program features Another way to become acquainted with WaterCAD is to run and experiment with the included sample files located in the Haestad Wtrc Sample directory Remember you can right click or press the F1 key to access the context sensitive online Help at any time In order to follow these lessons you can either do them in sequence since each lesson uses the results of the previous ones or do the lessons in any order using the catch up files located in Haestad Wtrc Lesson Lesson 1 Constructing a Network Steady State Analysis WaterCAD is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a water distribution network It is easy to prepare a schematic or scaled model and let WaterCAD take care of the link node connectivity In constructing a distribution network for this lesson you do not need to be concerned with assigning labels to pipes and nodes because WaterCAD will assign labels automatically When creating a schematic drawing pipe lengths are entered manually In a scaled drawing pipe lengths are automatically calculated from the position of the pipes bends and start and stop nodes on the drawing pane In this lesson you will create and analyze the network shown below You will use a scaled background dr
124. CAD menu that provides options for picking an exact location on an object Refer to the standard AutoCAD help system for more information Undo Redo In AutoCAD mode you have two types of Undo Redo available to you From the Edit menu you have access to WaterCAD Undo and Redo Alternatively you can perform the native AutoCAD Undo and Redo by typing at the AutoCAD command line The implementations of the two different operation types are quite distinct The menu based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on WaterCAD elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server The main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited undo and redo levels This is an important difference since in layout or editing it is quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions If you use the native AutoCAD undo you are limited to a single redo level The WaterCAD undo redo is also faster than the native undo redo If you are rolling back WaterCAD model edits it is recommended that you use the menu based undo redo implementation Whenever you invoke a native AutoCAD undo the server model will be notified when any WaterCAD entities are affected by the operation WaterCAD will then synchronize the model to the drawing state Wherever possible the model will seek to map the undo redo invocation onto the model server s managed command history If the drawing s sta
125. Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 211 13 1 Database Connections 213 13 1 1 Database Connection Manager 213 13 1 2 Standard Database Import Export 213 Table of Contents vii 13 2 13 1 3 Database Connection Editor 13 1 4 ODBC 13 1 5 Sharing Database Connections between Projects 13 1 6 Database Connection Example Shapefile Connections 13 2 1 Shapefile Connection Manager 13 2 2 Shapefile Connection Editor 13 2 3 Shapefile Link Wizard 13 2 4 Import Shapefile Wizard 13 2 5 Export Shapefile Wizard 13 2 6 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects 13 2 7 Shapefile Format 13 2 8 Shapefile Connection Example Chapter 14 Exchanging Data with CAD Software 14 1 14 2 AutoCAD Polyline to Pipe Conversion 14 1 1 Polyline to Pipe Conversion Overview 14 1 2 Converting your Drawing in Multiple Passes 14 1 3 Polyline to Pipe Wizard Import Export of DXF Files 14 2 1 Import a DXF from AutoCAD or MicroStation 14 2 2 Exporting a DXF file 14 2 3 Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD 14 2 4 Advanced DXF Import Techniques Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 15 1 15 6 15 7 AutoCAD Environment 15 1 1 AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout 15 1 2 Toolbars 15 1 3 Drawing Setup 15 1 4 Symbol Visibility 15 1 5 Rebuild Figure Labels AutoCAD Project Files 15 2 1 Drawing Synchronization 15 2 2 Saving the Drawing as Drawing dwg WaterCAD Element Properties 15 3 1 Select Layer 15 3 2 Select Te
126. Delete 9 When you are finished setting up the database connections click OK to close the Database Connection editor and then click the Synchronize In button WaterCAD will give you a confirmation prompt Click Yes to proceed You will then get a message asking if you want to add an element Click Yes to All 10 A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data is read into the model When the import is complete you should get a green light in this window If there were warnings or errors you would get a yellow light or red light respectively You could then scroll through the log to see where any problems might be occurring Click Close to exit the Status Log and OK to exit the Database Connection Manager Status Log x Success Initializing element Initializing element Initializing element Initializing element Initializing element Initializing element Initializing element Initializing element Initializing element Reviewing drawing for potential problems No problems were found Synchronization Results Summary 183 element s added 0 element s DELETED 183 element s updated 0 element s disregarded due to blank record key 0 element s missing one or both end node s Elapsed 0 hour s 0 minute s 9 second s 11 You should now be able to see the imported network in the drawing pane but the symbol and label sizes are very small Select Tools Options from the pu
127. Editing Tips The following tips will be discussed in this section 262 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions A 4 1 A 4 2 A 4 3 e Special Mouse Tips e Lay out a Pipe as a Multi segmented Polyline e Make a Pipe into a Multi segmented Polyline Mouse Tips The right mouse button can be used to e Select units and precision for displaying data e Get context sensitive Help for dialog boxes and data entry fields e Open a pop up context menu of command options for an element Laying out a Pipe as a Multi segmented Polyline When laying out pipes using the Pipe Layout tool this program will allow you to draw pipes with multiple bends by using the Control key on your keyboard To draw a pipe with bends 1 Click the Pipe Layout tool to begin laying out your network 2 Move the mouse to the desired location and click to insert the first element 3 The layout tool will rubber band indicating that a pipe will be inserted when the next element is added In Stand Alone mode 1 At this point hold down the Control key The cursor appearance will change to crosshairs to indicate that pipe bends will be added 2 While holding the Control key down click to insert any number of pipe bends 3 When you are through adding pipe bends release the Control key 4 The appearance of the cursor will change to reflect the next element to be added 5 Click with the mouse to terminate the pipe and add the next element
128. Engineer s Reference 287 Colebrook White Equation 278 Typical Values 289 Color Coding 48 55 56 57 188 189 190 200 201 261 Column Allow Duplicate 142 Change Units 260 Heading 146 Table Customization 145 Table Setup 141 Command Line AutoCAD Only 14 Commands AutoCAD Mode 242 Compare Scenarios 199 Composite Minor Loss 116 117 Computing Water Age 61 Concentration 173 Concentration Limit 208 Configuration 90 Conjugate Gradient Method 271 Connection 211 212 Database 215 216 Editing 215 Hiding 219 Lesson 7 64 Management 213 Shapefile 222 223 Sharing 220 Synchronization 239 240 Connectivity Tolerance 233 Conservation of Mass amp Energy 268 Constant Power Pump 120 274 Constituent 208 285 312 Alternative 156 Analysis 173 Library 208 209 Source Pattern 176 Context Menu 312 Context Menu Option 91 92 Contour 194 195 Plan View 193 Smoothing 195 Contouring 53 54 Control 126 Valve 275 Control Status 312 Converting CAD Drawing Entities to Network Elements 81 Conveyance Element 312 Coordinates 312 Copy to Clipboard 26 Table 148 Copy Paste 17 Cost 179 180 Alternative 158 Analysis 179 Manager 180 Scenario 184 Unit Cost Function 181 Create a Plan and Profile 52 Creating a New Alternative 43 Creating a New Project File 30 Creating Demand Patterns 39 Cross Section T
129. Export Database Export data to a new Microsoft Access database mdb using one of the standard database connections e Export Shapefile Export your project to shapefile format in GIS applications This command will start the Shapefile Wizard which will help you create shapefiles with the desired project elements and associated data e Export Spot Elevations Export spot elevation data to a space or comma delimited ASCH file in a variety of formats Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 17 2 2 2 Export DXF File Export the entire network drawing to a DXF format which can be read by all popular CAD programs This command will open a dialog prompting you to enter the name and location for the DXF file you would like to create Synchronize Database Connections Access the Database Connection Manager which allows you to share WaterCAD data with external databases spreadsheets and other ODBC compliant files Details of this comprehensive feature are explained in the section entitled GIS and Database Connections Synchronize Shapefile Connections Access the Shapefile Connection Manager which allows you to share WaterCAD data with external GIS systems Details of this feature are explained in the section entitled GIS and Database Connections Print Print the current view of the project drawing to a printer Profiles and tabular reports are printed from their respective windows The print command invokes the sta
130. Help window e To print a Help topic click the Print button at the top of the Help window e To make Help stay on top of other windows open the main Help window and select Options Keep Help On Top On Top from the pull down menu An Example Suppose that a primary aspect of your project is to exchange data with ESRI Environmental Systems Research Institute Inc Shapefiles To obtain a detailed description on how to import your shapefiles 1 Click Help Contents to open the main Help window 2 On the left side of the Help window select the Index tab In the box where the cursor is flashing enter the word Shapefile 3 This will automatically scroll through the topics and display a list of topics concerning shapefiles For instance you can select Shapefile Import A sublist will pop up where you can select Shapefile Import Example A detailed Help topic will appear on the right 1 4 3 How Do I How Do I is an easily referenced topic in WaterCAD s on line documentation It is a listing of commonly asked questions about WaterCAD Follow these steps to find your way to How Do I 1 Click Help How Do I from the pull down menu 2 The listing of How Do I topics will appear Click on the topic of your choice for a detailed explanation 3 To return to the listing of How Do I questions click the Back button 1 4 4 Help Command 74 Access the Help menu Using the Help command is the same as selecting z Help from the pull
131. If it does not find this file then it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called WTRC HDC If you are working on a local drive and you have several project files all of which reference common connection information let your project files automatically default to the WTRC HDC file Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be automatically reflected when you open any other project If there are several people working on different projects on different computers but they still wish to have common connectivity information the appropriate HDC file can be copied and renamed if necessary to the individual local drives Preventing Database Connectivity Sharing between Projects There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful such as when there are many projects each with different database connectivity At these times it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project rather than with all projects To do this simply copy the WTRC HDC file from the installed WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file and rename it to the same name as your WCD file For example if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1 WCD rename WTRC HDC to PROJECT1 HDC The connections in PROJECT1 WCD can then be modified without the effects being reflected in any other projects 13 1 6 Database Connection Example To connect your model to an external file
132. Import DXF Background command from the pull down menu to access the Import DXF File dialog 2 Select the DXF file you wish to import and click the Open button Chapter 14 Exchanging Data with CAD Software 235 N 14 2 2 14 2 3 14 2 4 Exporting a DXF file A project file can be saved in a format that can be used by AutoCAD and other common CAD based applications When you use the Export command a window appears so that you can enter the file name drive and directory of the DXF file you are saving A status bar appears at the bottom of the screen as the file is being exported To export the drawing plan view select the File Export pull down menu option You will be able to redefine all elements except pipes as blocks in AutoCAD Pipes will be exported as polylines so you will be able to set their line weight in AutoCAD Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD If you would like to change the appearance of these blocks in your AutoCAD drawing you can redefine them as follows To begin start AutoCAD and create thirteen separate drawing files named HMI_CKV DWG HMI_CSRC DWG HMI_FARW DWG HMI_PS DWG JUNCTION DWG TANK DWG RESERVOIR DWG PUMP DWG PRV DWG PBV DWG PSV DWG FCV DWG and TCV DWG Save these drawings in your AutoCAD directory Open the existing drawing that contains the network blocks 1 At the AutoCAD Command prompt type INSERT and press enter 2 At the Block Name
133. Import Shapefile Link Editor Choose the Shapefile to which you want to connect and specify the details of the link e Synchronize Now Choose whether or not you want to synchronize the Shapefile Connection when finished with the wizard You can choose to synchronize in either direction Shapefile Connection Label The Shapefile Connection Label window allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric label for your Shapefile Connection This window is presented during both the Import and Export Shapefile Connection Wizards as well as the Shapefile Connection Wizard 222 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 13 2 2 Synchronize Now The last step in the Shapefile Connection Wizard the Synchronize Now window allows you to specify that you wish to synchronize the Shapefile Connection immediately after editing it in the wizard The following options are available e Synchronize Shapefile Connection Check this box if you wish to synchronize the connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button By default this box is checked If you uncheck it you will return to the Shapefile Connection Manager after clicking the Finished button e In Click this radio button if you wish to synchronize the connection in to the model This will update the model data from the Shapefiles defined in the connection e Out Click this radio button if you wish to synchronize the connection out to the Shapefiles defined in the connectio
134. In AutoCAD mode 1 Select Bend from the right click menu 2 Draw the pipe as you would draw a polyline 3 Right click and select the end node of the pipe Changing a Pipe into a Multi segmented Polyline To make a straight pipe into a multi segmented polyline In Stand Alone Mode 1 Right click the pipe to which you would like to add a vertex Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 263 2 From the context menu select the Bend Add Bend menu item 3 A vertex will be added to the pipe You may then move the vertex by dragging with the mouse In AutoCAD Mode 1 Select Edit from the Main Menu 2 Select Modify Pipe 3 Select Insert Bend 4 Click the location in the pipe where you want the bend 5 Use the AutoCAD Move command to move the bend in the pipe J There is no limit on the number of vertices that a pipe may have G In Stand Alone mode you can remove vertices by selecting the pipe Right click the vertex you wish to remove and select the Bend Remove Bend menu item In AutoCAD mode you can remove vertices by selecting Edit Modify Pipes Remove Bends from the pull down menu Select the pipe and the location of the bend that you would like removed Notes Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 265 B 1 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory WaterCAD is a state of the art software tool primarily for use in the modeling and analysis of water distribution systems However the meth
135. K and then click Close to exit the Constituent Library You should now be back in the editor for the Constituent Alternative Select Chlorine from the Constituent list box Notice that the Bulk Reaction in the table is automatically updated For the Pump and Valve set the pumps and valves to an initial concentration of 1 mg l Click the Junction tab and initialize the chlorine concentrations by entering a value of 1 mg l at each junction node Under the Reservoir tab enter a value of 2 0 mg L for the reservoir and for the Tank enter a value of 0 5 mg l To quickly enter the initial concentrations for an element type use the Global Edit feature Close out of the Editor and the Alternative Manager Now open the Scenario Manager and set up a new Scenario in order to run the Constituent Analysis Create a new Child off of the Age Analysis Scenario by highlighting it and clicking Scenario Management Add Child Scenario Type in Chlorine Analysis as the new Scenario name and click OK Under the Alternatives tab click to check the box labeled Constituent and select the Chlorine Injection Alternative from the list box Click the Calculation tab select the Constituent radio button in the Analysis section and leave everything else set to the inherited values Click Close to exit the dialog click GO Batch Run uncheck Age Analysis check Chlorine Analysis then click Batch to run the model Make sure Chlorine Anal
136. Label Label of the junction whose fire flow record is being displayed o Needed Fire Flow Flow rate required at the junction to meet fire flow demands This value will be added to the junction s baseline demand or it will replace the junction s baseline demand depending on the default setting for applying fire flows 158 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives e Fire Flow Upper Limit Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location This value will prevent the software from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains which have large diameters and high service pressures This value will be added to the junction s baseline demand or it will replace the junction s baseline demand depending on the default setting for applying fire flows e Residual Pressure Minimum Zone Pressure Minimum System Pressure Set of pressure constraints for each Fire Flow node See description for each of these parameters in the Default Flow and Pressure Constraints section above Use Defaults Click the Use Defaults button to reset the selected row to the default values for the Fire Flow Alternative This does not cause the record to inherit from its parent only causes it to reflect the Default values The Defaults for a fire flow alternative can only be set in the root alternative All child alternatives inherit the Default values from the root The set of junction nod
137. Perform the following steps for each Export Shapefile Link Editor 4 Enter the name of the Shapefile you wish to create for the specified element type Click the ellipsis button to interactively browse for a directory in which to store the Shapefile 5 Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and providing a name for the associated Shapefile column Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient Click the Next button 6 Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent link between the Shapefile s you are exporting and the model If you choose to create a Shapefile Connection enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connection Click the Finished button to export Shapefiles Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects When WaterCAD works with shapefile connections it is using a file with a HSC extension which stores the information regarding the shapefiles and field mapping for each element type When you open a WaterCAD project file WCD WaterCAD first looks for a file in the same directory and with the same filename but with the HSC extension If it finds this file it uses the shapefile connectivity information contained therein If it does not find this file it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called WTRC HSC Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects If you are working on a local drive and you have sev
138. PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories and automatically creates section and page numbers tables of contents and indexes You can quickly create an executive summary for an entire watershed or build an elaborate drainage report showing any or all report items D 5 CulvertMaster CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert hydraulics from single barrel to complex multi barrel culverts with roadway overtopping CulvertMaster Appendix D Haestad Methods Software 307 D 6 computations use FHWA HDS 5 methodology This allows you to solve for most hydraulic variables including culvert size flow and headwater as well as generate output for rating curves and tables showing computed flow characteristics CulvertMaster provides a choice of culvert barrel shapes including circular pipes pipe arches boxes and more Flow calculations handle pressure and varied flow situations such as backwater and drawdown curves Design discharge can be calculated using either the Rational or SCS Graphical Peak Discharge method Rainfall information is calculated using rainfall tables equations or the National Weather Services Hydro 35 data CulvertMaster s flexible reporting feature allows you to print the design and analysis results in report format or as a graphical plot FlowMaster FlowMaster is an efficient and powerful program for the design and analysis of pipes ditches open chann
139. Preview Command pret Open a Print Preview on the contents of the current window review E Page Up Down 4 PgUp gt PgDn Navigate between pages of a multi page report File Button im File Export the data in the current window to a file format that can be used by other v applications such as DXF and ASCII text files F Copy to Clipboard Ei N Copy data to the clipboard where it can be pasted into most Windows based Ba coy spreadsheets databases and word processors Print gI Print Print the contents of the current window Options 3 Options vary depending on the context They may include things such as layer P Options Y control or background color for the current window Close Close the current window Close 7 The Status Bar The status bar located along the bottom of the main application window provides relevant information about the current state of the model and information about the drawing pane The data displayed in the status bar includes e General Status Information DXF Background Status e Cursor Location Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 27 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 2 4 5 e Calculation Results Status e File Status The AutoCAD status bar also contains relevant messages but deals with your AutoCAD drawing status rather than your hydraulic project For more information about AutoCAD s status bar please refer to AutoDesk s documentation General Status Information
140. Remove buttons are located in the center of the Table Setup dialog gt Adds the selected item s from the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list gt gt Adds all of the items in the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list lt Removes the selected item s from the Selected Columns list lt lt Removes all items from the Selected Columns list To rearrange the order of the attributes in the Selected Columns list 1 Highlight the item to be moved 2 Move it up or down in the list by clicking the up button or the down button located below the Selected Columns list or by simply dragging it to the desired location You can select multiple attributes in the Available Columns list by holding down the Shift key or the Control key while clicking with the mouse Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection behavior Holding down the Control key will provide single element selection behavior The items displayed in yellow represent non editable columns e g columns that contain calculated data while those in white represent editable columns e g columns that contain input data 7 3 5 Allow Duplicate Columns Set this check box to allow duplicate columns in a table Allow Duplicate Columns is an advanced feature that allows you to place two identical columns in the same table and set them to different unit systems 7 4 Table Window The Table window is where you will perform
141. Search tab at the top context sensitive Help Import Export Tips The following tips will be covered in this section Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD Cybernet Versions Transitioning from Cybernet v2 Importing EPANET Data Importing KYPIPE Data Importing Spot Elevations Exporting Spot Elevations 248 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions Nz You can import data from virtually any model using our intuitive and powerful Y Database and Shapefile Connections feature A 1 1 Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD Cybernet Versions Cybernet v1 drawing No support is available for importing a Cybernet v1 drawing directly into WaterCAD v4 If you want to import a Cybernet v1 drawing load it into Cybernet v2 for DOS and re save the data as a Cybernet v2 drawing The data can then be imported into WaterCAD v4 following the procedure described below Cybernet v2 drawing If you are running WaterCAD v4 in AutoCAD mode simply open the drawing that contains the Cybernet v2 data The import Wizard of WaterCAD v4 will automatically begin importing the data If you are running WaterCAD v4 in Stand Alone mode you must first convert the Cybernet v2 drawing into a special C2W file format that can then be imported into WaterCAD v4 This is accomplished by using one of the C2W utilities inside any of the following AutoCAD versions AutoCAD 12 13 Dos 13 Windows 14 or 2000 Consult the C2W utilities Help for s
142. Stand Alone mode of operation in AutoCAD R14 15 1 2 Toolbars In AutoCAD mode this command toggles the display of the program toolbars The following toolbars are available e Command Tools Enables the Commands Toolbar for quick access to the main commands including computations table and graphic reports Quick View and direct access to the Haestad Methods Web Site e Layout Tools Enables the Layout Toolbar for access to the Tool Palette e Analysis Toolbar Enables the Analysis Toolbar in order to display the current scenario and provide quick access to the Scenario Manager and Cost Manager It also displays the current time step and time step viewing controls WaterCAD Only To toggle the display of the Haestad toolbars select Toolbars from the View menu 15 1 3 Drawing Setup When working in the AutoCAD mode you may work with Haestad Methods products in many different AutoCAD scales and settings However Haestad Methods product elements can only be created and edited in model space 15 1 4 Symbol Visibility In AutoCAD mode you can control display of element labels using the checkbox in the Drawing Options dialog The following commands allow you to customize the drawing by turning the visibility of flow arrows and labels on or off e To turn on the element labels type WIRCLABELSON e To turn them off type WIRCLABELSOFF Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 239 15
143. Tutorials 7 23 29 Lessons 29 Type Coercion 211 U ei ndo 17 18 ndo Redo Operations in AutoCAD 243 ninstall 3 Problems 4 ninstall Haestad Methods Products 3 nit Conversion 211 nit Cost 181 182 Data Table 183 Function Formula 183 ea ar cs an Function Manager 182 Table Coefficients 184 Unit System 90 91 97 Units 90 91 94 96 97 260 261 Index 329 Change in a Column 260 DXF 94 Local 146 147 Synchronized 146 147 Updates 5 23 Upgrades 4 5 US Customary Units 90 91 96 Usage 207 User Data 133 Alternative 159 User Memos 132 Vv Validation 165 170 171 Valve 115 Characteristics 122 Importing from EPANET 252 Theory 275 Valve Status 318 Variable Speed Pumps 260 273 Velocity 318 Head 267 Vertex 318 Vertices Adding to a Pipe 262 View Menu 20 21 Tabular 139 Viewing Fire Flow Results 59 Visibility of Symbols 95 238 Volume Inactive 314 Total Active 318 Total Storage 318 W Walk 198 Selection 198 Wall Reaction 208 Wall Reaction Coefficient 318 Water Main 256 Water Quality 280 318 Analysis Options 175 Initial 314 Models 286 Simulations 283 Theory 280 Water Quality Analysis 318 WaterCAD 1 305 Custom AutoCAD Entities 242 Documentation 5 Elements 111 Import 245 Main Window 12 Modes 11 Theory 265 User s Guide 5 WaterCAD in
144. WaterCAD Theory 291 B 4 4 Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes Typical pipe roughness values are shown below These values may vary depending on the manufacturer workmanship age and many other factors Comparative Pipe Roughness Values Material Manning s Hazen Darcy Weisbach Coefficient Williams Roughness Height n Cc k mm k ft Asbestos Cement 0 011 140 0 0015 0 000005 Brass 0 011 135 0 0015 0 000005 Brick 0 015 100 0 6 0 002 Cast iron new 0 012 130 0 26 0 00085 Concrete Steel forms 0 011 140 0 18 0 006 Wooden forms 0 015 120 0 6 0 002 Centrifugally spun 0 013 135 0 36 0 0012 Copper 0 011 135 0 0015 0 000005 Corrugated metal 0 022 45 0 15 Galvanized iron 0 016 120 0 15 0 0005 Glass 0 011 140 0 0015 0 000005 Lead 0 011 135 0 0015 0 000005 Plastic 0 009 150 0 0015 0 000005 Steel Coal tar enamel 0 010 148 0 0048 0 000016 New unlined 0 011 145 0 045 0 00015 Riveted 0 019 110 0 9 0 003 Wood stave 0 012 120 0 18 0 0006 292 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory B 4 5 Fitting Loss Coefficients For similar fittings the K value is highly dependent on things such as bend radius and contraction ratios Fitting Pipe Entrance Bellmouth Rounded Sharp Edged Projecting Contraction Sudden D3 D4 0 80 D3 D4 0 50 D3 D4 0 20 Contraction Conical D3 Dy 0 80 D3iDy 0 50 Dz D4 0 20 Expansion Sudden D3 Dy 0 80 D3 Dy 0 50 D3 D4 0 20 Expansion Co
145. WaterCAD v4 Installation Upgrades and Updates 1 3 1 Minimum System Requirements 1 3 2 Installing Haestad Methods Products 1 3 3 Uninstalling Haestad Methods Products 1 3 4 Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstall 1 3 5 Software Registration 1 3 6 Upgrades 1 3 7 Globe Button Learning WaterCAD 1 4 1 WaterCAD Documentation 1 4 2 How to Use Help 1 4 3 How Do I 1 4 4 Help Command 1 4 5 Glossary 1 4 6 Tutorials 1 4 7 Sample Projects 1 4 8 Haestad Methods Workshops Contacting Haestad Methods 1 5 1 Sales 1 5 2 Technical Support 1 5 3 Your Suggestions Count 1 5 4 How to Contact Us Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 2 1 2 2 Main Window Components 2 1 1 Stand Alone Mode AutoCAD Mode 2 1 2 WaterCAD Main Windows 2 1 3 Drawing Pane 2 1 4 Status Bar 2 1 5 Menus Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 2 1 6 Command Line WaterCAD Menus 2 2 1 File Menu 2 22 Edit Menu xi OCMANNT NNN AAAA AUANHPHWWONN ii Table of Contents 2 3 2 4 2 2 3 Analysis Menu 2 2 4 View Menu 2 2 5 Tools Menu 2 2 6 Draw Menu in AutoCAD Mode Only 2 2 7 Report Menu 2 2 8 Help Menu WaterCAD Toolbars 2 3 1 Tool Pane Summary 2 3 2 The Tool Palette 2 3 3 Analysis Toolbar 2 3 4 Other Toolbar Buttons The Status Bar 2 4 1 General Status Information 2 4 2 DXF Background Status 2 4 3 Cursor Location 2 4 4 Calculation Results Status 2 4 5 File Status Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 1 3 2 3 3 3
146. a Haestad Product license since a fully exploded drawing will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects See Working with Proxies for more information on this topic 15 5 4 Moving Elements When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode the AutoCAD commands Move Scale Rotate Mirror and Array can be used to move elements Refer to Selecting Elements for more details on this topic To move a node execute the AutoCAD command either by typing it at the command prompt or selecting it from the pull down menu Follow the AutoCAD prompts and the node and its Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 243 15 5 5 15 5 6 15 6 associated label will move together The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the new location of the node This is the only way to move pipes Moving Element Labels When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode the AutoCAD commands Move Scale Rotate Mirror and Array can be used to move element text labels Refer to the help topics Selecting Elements and Working with Selections in AutoCAD To move an element text label separately from the element click the element label you wish to move The grips will appear for the label Execute the AutoCAD command either by typing it at the command prompt or selecting it off the tool palette Follow the AutoCAD prompts and the label will be moved without the element Snap Menu When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode the Snap menu is a standard Auto
147. a constituent source e Click the check box in the Constituent Source group title e Enter values for Constituent Baseline Load Concentration of the constituent to be modeled used in conjunction with the constituent pattern to represent the concentration over time Constituent Pattern EPS Pattern that will apply to this load The multipliers defined in the pattern will be applied against the baseline constituent load The behavior of the source during the course of a water quality calculation varies depending on the type of element as follows e Junction The concentration is the source concentration and varies with time according to the constituent pattern e Tank Concentration is always calculated If the tank is tagged as a source the discharge from the tank will have the source concentration It will vary with time according to the source pattern e Reservoir Constituent concentration does not vary from the initial value with time unless the reservoir is tagged as a source for the constituent The concentration at the reservoir will vary with time according to the selected pattern J Any water leaving a constituent source has a concentration in accordance with the baseline concentration and the chosen pattern 6 2 6 Fire Flow Tab The Fire Flow tab of the junction editor offers the ability to adjust an individual junction s required fire flows and pressures If these values are not sp
148. a sets or Alternatives An Alternative is a group of data that describes a specific part of the model There are ten Alternative types Physical Demand Initial Settings Operational Age Constituent Trace Fire Flow Cost and User Data In this example you need to set up a different Physical or Demand Alternative for each design trial you want to evaluate Each Alternative will contain different pipe size or demand data In WaterCAD we create families of Alternatives from Base Alternatives Base Alternatives are Alternatives that do not inherit data from any other Alternative Child Alternatives can be created from the Base Alternative A Child Alternative inherits the characteristics of its Parent but specific data can be overridden to be local to the Child A Child Alternative can in turn be the Parent of another Alternative 1 Select Analysis Alternatives from the pull down menu Select the Demand tab from the top of the dialog Currently there is only one Demand Alternative listed The Base Demand Alternative contains the demands for the current distribution system 2 You can change the default Base Average Daily demand name to be something more descriptive of our data Click on the Rename button and enter the new name Average Daily with 2000 l min Fire Flow 3 You would like to add a Child of the Base Demands Alternative because the new Alternative will inherit most data Then you can locally change the data that you
149. ab set the Attribute list box to Calculated Age and then click the Initialize button to set up a default color scheme Accept this default scheme and repeat this procedure for the Node tab When you are finished click OK 7 Once back in the drawing pane click the Legend button on the toolbar and select either the Node Legend or Link Legend in this case the color coding should be the same for both Click in your drawing to place the legend If you don t place it correctly the first time you can always drag it and drop it in a new location 8 Set the time increment in the toolbar to 4 hours Use the VCR style buttons to scroll through time in your analysis and observe the color changes in your network reflecting water age 9 A good way to check if your network has had sufficient time to reach an equilibrium point is to look at Age vs Time graphs for your elements Open the editor dialog for Tank T 1 click the Report button at the bottom of the editor and select Graph Set up the Independent Variable as Time and the Dependent Variable as Calculated Age Make sure Age Analysis is checked in the Available Scenarios box and click OK Plot Window olx Ba c Bem IZ Options Iie cvse Q Heb Tank T 1 Calculated Age Varying Time Sitti yessecess Rees esse Se a Tala eiaa ed A t Age Analysis hr v D lt 5 D S a 5 2 G O 100 0 1500 2000 2500 3000 350 0 Time hr 10 From the graph you can see
150. ab allows you to specify the costs associated with a pipe which can be divided into unit costs per pipe length and fixed costs Itis divided into the following sections e Fixed Cost Table Specify the fixed cost of this pipe e Unit Costs The cost of the pipe can be calculated as a cost per unit length That cost per unit length can itself be a function of a pipe variable such as pipe diameter or material and be a value specific to a pipe e Total Costs Display the calculated total cost of this pipe You can specify if the total cost of this pipe is to be included in the Total System Cost Tabular Report by checking the Include Element in Cost Calculation Pressure Pipe Fixed Cost Table This table allows you to define any pipe cost that is not proportional to the pipe length such as bends valves etc e Label Description of a fixed cost item associated with the pipe e Quantity Number of identical cost item associated with the pipe e Unit Cost Cost of one such fixed cost item Pressure Pipe Unit Costs Section This section allows you to define costs that are proportional to the length of a pipe e Unit Cost Function Allows you to associate a unit cost function selected from the Unit Cost Function scroll down list Click the ellipsis button to access the Unit Cost Functions Manager This allows you to edit or add unit cost functions in a tabular or formula format based on a pipe attribute such as p
151. ables Toolbar Button Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 23 2 2 8 B 2 3 Scenario Summary Generate a report for the current scenario including an alternative summary calculation options and so forth Project Inventory Generate a report summarizing the project elements including the number and breakdown of pipes the number of manholes and so forth Plan View Generate plan view printable reports of the network for either the current drawing display Current View or the entire drawing extents Full View Help Menu The Help menu contains items that relate to on line documentation for WaterCAD which includes the information contained in the printed documentation as well as updated information and built in tutorials Help menu items can also be accessed from the Help button Contents Open the Table of Contents for the on line Help Toolbar Button Bl How to Use Help Access instructions for using the Help system AutoCAD Help Topics Access the AutoCAD on line Help Release Notes Provide the latest information on the current version of WaterCAD This topic which takes the place of a ReadMe file includes information about new features tips performance tuning and other general information Services The services menu items will open an Internet browser on Haestad Methods internet site or a local page that provides an overview of the services and products offered by Haestad Metho
152. abular edits Additionally to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state the undo redo history will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued Shortcut Key Ctrl Z Redo Last Action Undone Reverse the effects of the last undone action Any action that can be undone can be redone Shortcut Key Ctrl Y 18 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window Delete Erase selected elements Deleting an element removes it from all aspects of the project including all scenarios Shortcut Key Delete Select All Select all of the elements in the current project Shortcut Key Ctrl A Select By Element Element Type Select all elements of a certain type such as all pipes or all junctions Select By Selection Set Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set Select Clear Selection Reset empty the current selection set Find Element open the Find Element dialog which allows you to locate an element and bring it to the center of the drawing pane This element search is based on the element label note that this is not case sensitive Shortcut Key Ctrl F Drawing Review Open the Drawing Review window to isolate elements that may need to be scrutinized for potential problems orphaned nodes elements with messages superposed nodes etc In AutoCAD mode WaterCAD Undo Last Action Performed Reverse the last reversible action performed Rever
153. abular view of the network that was a bit inflexible and tedious at times WaterCAD v4 s FlexTables provide tabular reporting tools that are so powerful and flexible that you can perform your typical tasks in less time than it used to take you just to enter the MCC With features like sorting filtering and global editing you can review and adjust your data in a fraction of the time it used to take and with none of the hassle Even the variables and sequences that are presented in tabular form are totally customizable to fit your needs Scenario Management Cybernet v2 had two levels of definition the base data as entered in the AutoCAD interface or through the Edit menu in the MCC and scenario changes as entered through the Setup Analysis menu Although this was far better than any competing scenario management it was very limited and certainly not oriented toward data reuse WaterCAD v4 has a whole new outlook on scenarios stemming from the basic principle that every system has unknowns If there is only one unknown such as junction demand for example the options are quite simple With the addition of more unknowns the options quickly become difficult to manage How can a modeler keep track of so many unknowns Through alternatives and inheritance Alternatives are collections of very specific data such as junction demands or pump and valve operational settings A scenario references a certain combination of these alternatives simila
154. ale 93 Setup AutoCAD Mode 238 Synchronization AutoCAD Mode 239 DWG 87 239 DXF 94 95 235 Background 27 94 Exporting from WaterCAD 235 Import 234 235 Units 94 Dynamic Inheritance 297 298 E Editable Table Columns 143 144 Editing and Creating Scenarios 44 Editing Elements 102 261 EGL 267 268 313 Element 111 241 313 Annotation 187 Deleting 103 241 Editing 17 18 112 241 Find 104 Labeling 109 261 Modify 241 Morphing 100 Moving 102 242 Numbering 108 261 Rotate AutoCAD Mode 17 Scale AutoCAD Mode 17 241 Search 104 Selection 101 103 109 Type 100 Visibility 95 Element Annotation 54 Elevation 313 Input Mode 92 Spot 195 196 Email Address 8 Enclosed Area 103 Energy Conservation 268 Equation 267 322 Index Grade Line 267 Principle 266 Energy Grade Line 313 Engineering Library 205 206 Constituent 208 Editor 206 Liquid 208 Manager 205 Material 207 Minor Loss 207 208 Enhanced Pressure Contours 195 Enter Key Behavior 90 91 Entering Data 32 Entering Data through Dialogs 33 Entering Data through FlexTables 36 Entities Change into Pipe 244 in AutoCAD 242 to Pipes 244 Entity Conversion 244 EPANET Import 252 EPS 167 Analysis 167 168 Patterns 176 Equations 265 Error Messages 170 Results Report 165 ESRI 3 211 228 Export Shapefile 226 Import Shapefile
155. alternative from the Constituent Alternative choice list 6 Return to the Calculation tab and Click the GO button 9 7 3 Trace Analysis A trace analysis determines the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the system The source is designated as a specific node in the system and is called the trace node In systems with more than one source it is common to perform multiple trace analyses using the various trace nodes in successive analyses The source node and initial traces are specified in the Trace Alternative dialog To configure for a trace analysis 1 Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button 2 Activate the Extended Period radio button 3 Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis 4 Select the Trace radio button 5 Assuming you have not already set up a Trace alternative for this scenario including defining the trace node go to the Alternatives tab click the ellipses or New button next to the Trace scroll down list and add or edit a trace alternative Specify the trace node to be used for this analysis and provide the appropriate data Back in the Alternatives tab choose the desired alternative from the Trace Alternative choice list 6 Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button J Water quality analysis can only be performed for extended period simulations 9 8 Calculation Options Calculations depend on a variety of parameters that may be configured
156. alues are now set to 120 To deactivate the filter right click anywhere in the dialog and select Filter Reset from the pop up menu Click Yes to reset the filter You may also wish to edit a table by adding or removing columns using the Table Manager Click the Options button at the top of the table dialog box and select Table Manager Select the Junction Report from the list then click the Table Management button Notice in the Table Management pull down menu there is a New option that would allow you to create your own table from scratch Any tables you add will be saved for use with other projects For now click the Edit option to edit the existing Junction Report 52 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 10 Scroll through the list on the left side to see the types of data available for placement in the table You can highlight a particular item then use the lt and gt buttons to add or remove that column from your table For this example we can display junction elevations in both meters and feet by checking the Allow Duplicate Columns box highlighting Elevation shown in gray in the list of available columns and clicking the gt button Elevation now appears twice under Selected Columns You can adjust the order in which the columns will be displayed using the arrows below the right hand list or simply drag items up and down Click OK and OK again to exit the Table Manager Table Setup Table Type Pressure Ju
157. an import entities into an existing project Polylines will automatically be connected to nodes within the specified Tolerance You can add nodes to your project prior to performing the import Stand Alone mode issues You should take some time to clean up your AutoCAD drawing prior to performing the conversion Look for entities that should not be converted such as leader lines and move them to their own layer Turn off layers that you do not wish to convert Do a quick review of your drawing and correct any potential conversion problems that you may find After performing the conversion we recommend that you use the converted file as a DXF Background This will greatly enhance your review process If you change the entities in your background drawing to a gray color from within AutoCAD it will make it easier to distinguish between foreground elements and background entities 232 Chapter 14 Exchanging Data with CAD Software AutoCAD mode issue You can interactively convert individual entities to pipes by using the Layout Tool 14 1 2 Converting your Drawing in Multiple Passes Depending on how your drawing layers are set up you may be able to save yourself a considerable amount of data entry time by converting your drawing in multiple passes For example if your 12 pipes are located on a 12InchPipes layer 18 pipes are on a 18InchPipes layer etc you can import layers one at a time Just
158. an reference an element If you add an element to a zone the element is automatically removed from the zone that it was previously in Notes Chapter 7 FlexTables 139 7 1 7 2 Chapter 7 FlexTables Tables FlexTables provide you with a powerful data management tool that can be used to edit input data and present output data in a quick efficient manner Haestad Methods provides you with some basic element tables However these tables can be customized to fit your particular needs You can create your own tables combining various input and output data from different model elements You can use FlexTables to view all elements in the network all elements of a specific type e g all pipes or any subset of elements Additionally tables can be filtered globally edited and sorted to ease data input and present output data for specific elements FlexTables may also be used for creating results reports that can be sent to a printer a file or the Windows clipboard Table Manager The Table Manager provides support for creating opening and managing tables The Table Manager dialog provides a list of all available tables Although the predefined tables provide access to most of the network element information it is sometimes practical to present model results and input data through user defined tables The Table Management menu button provides the following tools for manipulating user defined tables e OK Open th
159. and an Index Increment of 0 2 m Make sure the radio button for Color by Index is selected and click OK 6 A plan view of the water distribution model is opened in a separate window along with contours that interpolate between the elevations of the selected network components 7 To improve the appearance of the contouring press the Options button and choose Smooth Contours 8 Click Close to return to the drawing pane 3 4 5 Part 5 Element Annotation When you want to label network attributes in the plan view use the Annotation feature With it you can control which values are displayed how they are labeled and how units are expressed For this example we will annotate demands at the junctions and flow and velocity in the pipes 1 Click the Element Annotation option located in the Tools pull down menu or click the Annotation S button on the toolbar to open the Annotation Wizard 2 Select the elements you wish to annotate In this example we will add annotation to the pressure junctions and pipes Select these elements from the list and click Next Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 55 3 4 6 3 The next dialog allows you to choose the attributes you wish to annotate for the specified element type The Attributes column is used for selecting the attribute you would like to annotate The Mask is a template of how the annotation will appear on the screen The v and
160. and select Done 5 Insert the PRV Valve PRV on the pop up menu junction J 6 and the tank by selecting the Layout Elements tool and placing the elements in their appropriate locations Be sure to lay out the pipes in numerical order P 7 through P 9 so that their labels correspond to the labels in the diagram Right click and select Done from the pop up menu to terminate the Layout Elements command 6 Insert the tank T 1 and the pipe connecting it to node J 3 Right click and select Done The network layout is now complete T 1 Done Junction v Tank _ __ _ Reservoir Z Pump Valve gt Help 7 Save the WaterCAD network by clicking the Disk icon on the toolbar or by choosing File Save 3 1 3 Part 3 Entering Data There are four ways to enter and modify element data in WaterCAD e Dialogs You can use the Select tool and double click an element to bring up its editor dialog In AutoCAD click the element once with the Select tool to open the element s editor dialog e FlexTables You can click on the Tabular Reports button E to bring up dynamic tables that allow you to edit and display the model data in a tabular format You can edit the data as you would in a spreadsheet Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 33 e Database Connections The database connection feature allows you to import and export element data directly from external sources such as Excel spreadsheets GIS Jet Databa
161. and text elements to the project drawing b Toolbar Button Wi e Layout Legend Activate the legend tool used to add a key for the current drawing color coding for links and nodes Toolbar Button e Options Specify settings for the current project such as the friction method coordinate system unit system and auto prompting e Element Properties AutoCAD mode only Control on which layer each type of object and its associated text is placed Also controls the text style for labels and annotations e Preferences AutoCAD mode only Activate the AutoCAD Preferences command in order to edit general AutoCAD settings Draw Menu in AutoCAD Mode Only This is only available in the AutoCAD mode The Draw menu provides access to a variety of AutoCAD commands Refer to the standard AutoCAD help system for more information Report Menu The Report menu provides access to a collection of preformatted textual and graphical reports Furthermore the report menu provides access to FlexTables which enable you to create your own custom reports e Report Element Details Open the Detailed Reports dialog which enables you to print detailed reports for any set of elements e Report Element Results Open the Analysis Results dialog which enables you to print reports of the results for any set of elements e Tables Access the Table Manager which enables you to open predefined tables or generate your own custom t
162. ank A tank element in WaterCAD is modeled as a bottom feed tank Some tanks however are fed from the top which is different hydraulically and should be modeled as such Top Feed Bottom Gravity Tank Elevated Tank To distribution system Reservoir To model a top feed tank start by placing a pressure sustaining valve PSV at the end of the tank inlet pipe Set the elevation of the PSV to the elevation of the tank inlet The pressure setting of the PSV should be set to zero to simulate the pressure at the outfall of the pipe Next connect the downstream end of the PSV to the tank with a short smooth large diameter pipe The pipe must have these properties so that the headloss through it will be minimal The tank attributes can be entered normally using the actual diameter and water elevations The outlet of the tank can then proceed to the distribution system 260 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions Example Layout psy Tank Pump P P 6 P 4 Reservoir J 1 J 2 A 2 10 Pump Maintaining a Constant Downstream Pressure To model a variable speed pump that is set to maintain a constant downstream pressure you will want to use a multiple point pump curve Enter the points so that the maximum pump head is the downstream pressure to be maintained and the curve remains relatively flat until the pumps maximum discharge Then the curve should taper down to its maximum flow rate With this curve the pump will discharg
163. apter 1 Orientation 1 3 6 1 3 7 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 Upgrades When you click the Registration button on the Help About Product Name dialog the current registration status number of licenses expiration date feature level etc is displayed To upgrade to more pipes or inlets higher feature levels or additional licenses call Haestad Methods see Contacting Haestad Methods to obtain a new registration number We will have you up and running in no time Globe Button Haestad Methods makes it easy to stay up to date with the latest advances in our software Software maintenance releases can be downloaded from the Haestad Methods web site quickly and easily if you are a subscriber to our ClientCare Program Just click the Globe icon on the tool palette to launch your preferred web browser and open the Haestad Methods Program Update web site The web site will automatically check to see if your installed version is the latest available and if not it will provide you with the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring it up to date The ClientCare Program also gives you access to our extensive KnowledgeBase for answers to all Frequently Asked Questions FAQ Contact our sales team for more information on our ClientCare Program Use the Globe button S to keep your investment current Learning WaterCAD WaterCAD Documentation WaterCAD s on line documentation delivers extensive detail Simpl
164. are adequate for the hydraulic analysis Under special circumstances the accuracy may need to be adjusted downward This is necessary when the model converges yet there are larger than acceptable discrepancies between the total inflow and outflow at individual nodes Water Quality Analysis Options The following water quality analysis parameters are available for user configuration e Maximum Pipe Segments Unitless number that defines the maximum number of segments that any pipe can be separated into during a water quality analysis The default value is 100 e Minimum Pipe Travel Time Minimum time of travel through a pipe If travel time through any pipe is computed to be less than this number it is set equal to it The default value for minimum pipe travel time is 10 of the hydraulic time step and default units are hours e Set Quality Time Step Check this box if you want to manually set the water quality time step By default this box is not checked and the water quality time step is computed internally by the numerical engine e Quality Time Step Time interval used to track water quality changes throughout the network By default this value is computed by the numerical engine and is equivalent to the smallest travel time through any pipe in the system Patterns The extended period analysis is actually a series of steady state analyses run against time variable hydraulic demands and constituent source concentrat
165. are user you should have no difficulty learning and exploring the scenario management interface 294 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide Excellent tutorials and context sensitive on line help are also available within the software itself These learning tools will prove to be of tremendous assistance to you for all aspects of the software and should certainly not be ignored if you are having difficulty For more information just click the Help button which is available from anywhere within the program In addition call Haestad Methods for the schedule of workshops C 2 Before Haestad Methods Manual Scenarios Let us begin by understanding the approaches that have historically been used to attempt What If analyses Traditionally there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of change on a software simulation e Change the model recalculate and review the results e Create a copy of the model edit that copy calculate and review the results Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system the data duplication editing and re editing becomes very time consuming and error prone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase Additionally comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation because all output must be stored in physically separate data files Before Haestad Methods Manual Scenarios Build Model Build Model
166. ario Comparison window e Help Get quick access to this Help topic Several user interface elements are available to let you modify the scenarios that are being compared and to control when the scenario comparison annotations are updated These interface elements are described in more detail below e Scenario 1 This row of controls is similar to the Analysis Toolbar on the main window This field allows you to choose from the list of available scenarios the one that will be the baseline in the comparison 200 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results e Scenario 2 This row of controls is identical to those described above in Scenario 1 but instead of defining the baseline for the comparison they define the scenario to be compared to the baseline e Update Click this button to refresh the scenario comparison annotations This button is used when Auto Update described below is off and you have changed either Scenario or Scenario 2 e Auto Update A check in this box indicates that Auto Update is on and that the scenario comparison annotations will be refreshed whenever Scenario 1 or Scenario 2 is changed With Auto Update off you can select the desired combination of Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 time steps then click the Update button With Auto Update on the annotations will refresh even if you are not interested in the current combination The Scenario Comparison window is accessed by pressing the Scenario Compar
167. asured in degrees counter clockwise from the vertical For instance if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical you should add the following line to the Haestad ini file TextFlipAngle 0 Reasonable values would fall in the range 15 0 deg to 15 0 deg 110 Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 5 8 Quick View The Quick View window provides you with a fast way to view the data associated with any element in the network without having to open the element dialog It is a floating window that includes input and output information for any element that you have selected It also includes a convenient color coding legend Three tabs are provided on the window e Input Input data for the selected element e Output Output data for the selected element e Legend Ranges of the active color coding When the Quick View window is active the data for a selected entity will immediately be displayed You can change the size of the Label Value and Unit columns on the Input Output tabs by using the resizing bar at the top of the Quick View window You can highlight an Input or Output attribute e g Demand by clicking the label of that attribute in the Quick View window This provides for better visual feedback for example when monitoring the pressures at several nodes Use the Quick View button in the toolbar to toggle the Quick View window on and off Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Edito
168. ated flow rate passing through the valve e Velocity Calculated velocity inside the valve based on the valve diameter e Headloss Calculated headloss through the valve e From HGL Calculated hydraulic grade immediately upstream of the valve e To HGL Calculated hydraulic grade immediately downstream of the valve 124 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 6 2 2 Demand Tab This program provides the ability to define a hydraulic load connsisting of multiple demands and inflows for each junction node in the network Each individual hydraulic demand or inflow consists of a baseline flow rate and a pattern that is applied when performing an Extended Period Simulation EPS This software provides a table for editing hydraulic loads Each row represents an individual hydraulic demand or inflow The table has three columns Type Demand and Pattern e Type Choose the type of load Demand represents a withdrawal of liquid from the network system if the value entered is negative then the liquid is entering network Inflow represents the addition of liquid to the system negative inflow represents flow leaving the system e Demand Enter the baseline flowrate for the load This number will always be positive If you need to define an inflow change the load type The units are volume per unit time typically 1 s or gpm e Pattern Choose the EPS pattern that will apply to this load Each load in the table can have a d
169. ave user defined characteristics including e Label Unique name by which a spot elevation element will be referenced in reports error messages and tables e X Coordinate Easting The location may be presented as an X value or defined as an Easting value depending on individual preferences e Y Coordinate Northing The location may be presented as a Y value or defined as a Northing value depending on individual preferences e Elevation Elevation of the junction e Description Optional notes describing the element Spot Elevation Calculated Results Because spot elevations are not directly tied to the hydraulic network model there are only a few values that are calculated from the model results e Hydraulic Grade Interpolated hydraulic grade at this location e Enhanced Pressure Pressure based on the interpolated hydraulic grade These values are obtained by interpolating between three adjacent model nodes The hydraulic grade is determined from this interpolation and the pressure is then computed as a function of the interpolated hydraulic grade and the elevation Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 197 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 For spot elevations that are outside the model bounds there may not be three adjacent model nodes If this is the case the hydraulic grade will be determined to be zero which may result in negative pressures This does not necessarily
170. awing for most of the network however four of the pipes are not to scale and will have user defined lengths 30 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Water Distribution Network COMMERCIAL RESIDENTIAL P 4 COMMERCIAL SHOPPING CENTER P 3 In this network the modeling of a reservoir connected to a pump simulates a connection to the main water distribution system Simplifying the network in this way can approximate the pressures supplied to the system at the connection under a range of demands This type of approximation is not always applicable and care should be taken when modeling a network in this way It is more accurate to trace the network back to the source If at any time during this lesson the program prompts Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N A click NO 3 1 1 i AutoCAD specific instructions i 2 3 4 Part 1 Creating a New Project File zs Stand Alone specific instructions Double click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand Alone If the Welcome to WaterCAD dialog appears select the Close button Open the Global Options tab accessed from the Tools Options pull down menu Since we will be working in metric units click the Unit System selection box and select System International Click OK In the pull down menus select File New Click No when asked if you want to save the current project
171. ay demands so a new demand alternative is required No variation in demand is expected at J 2 which is an industrial site As a result the new demand alternative can inherit J 2 s demand from Average Day while the other two demands are overridden 302 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide C 16 C 17 Average Day 100 gpm 500 gpm 100 gpm L Maximum Day 200 gpm 200 gpm Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alternative but overrides the selected demand alternative As a result we get the following scenario hierarchy Scenario Hierarchy Demand Alternative Physical Alternative Avg Day Average Day Preliminary Pipes L Max Day Maximum Day Since no physical data pipe diameters have been changed the physical alternative hierarchy remains the same as before Another Set of Demands Peak Hour Conditions Based on pressure requirements the system is adequate to supply maximum day demands Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands with slightly lower allowable pressures Since the peak hour demands also share the industrial load from the Average Day condition Peak Hour can be inherited from Average Day In this instance Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day Average Day 100 gpm Maximum Day 200 gpm Peak Hour 250 gpm Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands as shown below Scenario Hierarchy
172. b wcd for your project and click Save The Project Setup Wizard will open In the Project Setup Wizard title the project Lesson 7 Part 1 Importing GIS Data Click Next Click the Next button again to leave this dialog set to its default values In this dialog set up the drawing as Scaled with a horizontal scale of 1 5000 and a vertical scale of 1 500 Change the three Annotation Multipliers Symbol Size Text Height and Annotation Height to 2 8 Click Next leave the Prototypes set to their default values and click Finished Double click the desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD Open the Global tab accessed from the Tools Options pull down menu Since we will be working in metric units click the Unit System selection box and select System International Click OK Choose New on the File pull down menu and select No when prompted to save the existing drawing If the Create New Drawing dialog opens move to step 4 otherwise do the following Click the Esc key Then type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter Type the value 1 and press Enter Then choose New on the File pull down menu again and don t save changes to the existing drawing 68 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons gt When the Create New Drawing dialog appears make sure that Metric is selected and click OK Answer Yes when asked if you want to set up the project In the Project Setup Wizard title the project Lesson 7 Part 1
173. be 200 000 and the total cost reported for the scenario would be 2 200 000 You can include as many cost adjustments as you wish in the cost for a particular scenario The cost adjustments are applied in the order that they appear in the table on this dialog For instance if you included a contingency of ten percent and a flat adjustment of 100 000 the amount of the contingency would depend on whether it came before or after the flat adjustment in the cost adjustment table If the contingency fee was listed first in the table and the total cost of the system was 2 000 000 the amount computed for the contingency would be 200 000 giving you a total cost of 2 300 000 after the flat adjustment is included If the contingency was listed after the flat adjustment then the amount of the contingency would be ten percent of 2 100 000 or 210 000 and the total cost of the system would then be 2 310 000 The easiest way to understand how cost adjustments are computed is to perform a few simple cost calculations and view the resulting values The amount of each cost adjustment is itemized in the cost analysis results for each scenario There is also a GO button on this tab that you can use to run the cost calculation for the scenario you are editing Cost Scenario Editor Results Tab The Results tab contains a summary of the last cost calculation performed for this scenario Click the Save button to save the results to an ASCII text file Click t
174. before a new installation can occur To uninstall the program Click Start Programs Haestad Methods Product_Name Uninstall Product_Name The original floppy disk labeled Disk 1 that came with the product must be in the floppy drive at the time of uninstalling If you own a network license version of the software please refer to the accompanying Network License Document If you still have questions consult our online KnowledgeBase on our web site www haestad com or contact Haestad Methods technical support Chapter 1 Orientation 1 3 4 Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstall Because of the multi tasking capabilities of Windows 95 98 2000 and NT you may have applications running in the background that make it difficult for the setup routines to determine the configuration of your current system If you have difficulties during the install setup or uninstall process please try these steps before contacting our technical support staff 1 Restart your machine 2 Verify that there are no other programs running You can see applications currently in use by pressing Ctrl Alt Del in Windows 95 Windows 98 or 2000 or Ctrl Shift Ese in Windows NT Exit any applications that are running 3 Run setup or uninstall again without running any other program first If these steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product contact our support staff immediately 1 3 5 Software Registration During
175. below Pipe Data User Defined Pipe Material Diameter Length mm m Pa P2 P3 Pd P5 P Pa Pa P9 P10 Part 5 Entering Data through FlexTables It is often more convenient to enter data for similar elements in tabular form rather than to individually open a dialog for an element enter the data into the dialog and then select the next element Using tabular reports you can enter the data as you would enter data into a spreadsheet 1 To access the tabular report click the Tabular Reports button E in the toolbar 2 Left click the Pipe Report and click OK to access the report Note that the white fields are editable but the yellow fields are not The pipes may not be in alpha numeric order in the table To sort the table by pipe label right click the Label column heading Select Sort Ascending from the pop up menu that appears 3 For each of the ten pipes enter the section size and the pipe material as outlined in the Pipe Data table above Notice that the C values for the pipes will be automatically assigned to preset values based on the material however these values could be modified if a different coefficient were required 4 Leave other data set to their default values Click the Close button to exit the table when you are finished Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 37 igi WaterCAD Table Pipe Report lel Ea Time miajn A PA Increment kao Scenario Bae H gl Control Discharge Up
176. bols and labels 7 Select Tools Options from the pull down menu and select the Drawing tab 8 In the Annotation Multipliers group change the Symbol Size Multiplier to modify the element size and the Text Height Multiplier to modify the label size Smaller numbers will make the element symbols and text decrease in size These changes will affect all symbols and text including color coding legends but will not have any effect on pipe lengths Color Coding Elements To color code the elements 1 Select Tools Color Coding from the pull down menu or click the Color Coding button on the toolbar 2 Inthe Color Coding dialog select the attribute you would like to color code 3 Click the Initialize button to automatically build a range of colors You may decide to modify these default ranges 4 Click OK to color code the drawing All link or node elements and their labels will be colored based on the specified ranges You can also use the Color Code button to quickly set up and modify Color Coding Options A Color Coding Legend may be inserted into the drawing by using the Legend tool located on the Tool Palette Reusing Deleted Element Labels To make the program reuse the label for a deleted element 1 Select Tools Element Labeling from the pull down menu 2 Enter the ID number for the deleted element in the Next field for the appropriate type of element 3 Click OK 4 Add anew element in the drawing editor
177. button in the main WaterCAD window These are Water Age Constituent Concentration and Source Tracing There are two basic parts to an element s water quality input data e Water Quality Display the active water quality alternative for the current scenario as well as initial water quality conditions or component reaction rates depending on the type of water quality analysis being performed e Constituent Source For nodes only Allows you to define this node as a source for a chemical constituent if a constituent analysis is to be done and to specify the corresponding constituent concentration at this node over time A constituent source may be a tank reservoir or junction but not a pump or valve The Water Quality data is only used when performing a Water Quality analysis which can only be done in Extended Period Simulation mode When performing a Constituent or Trace Analysis the constituent and source trace node are defined in the Constituent and Age Alternative Editor respectively Water Quality Section The general water quality information consists of several parameters some of which vary slightly for different types of water quality analysis Water Age Constituent Concentration or Source Tracing e Alternative Read only field showing which water quality alternative is active for the current scenario e Initial Age Constituent or Trace Specify the initial water age constituent conce
178. by you This program provides defaults for each of the calculation options If you make changes to the calculation options and decide that you would like to return to the default settings use the Reset button on the Calculation Options dialog The dialog is divided into two groups e Hydraulics e Water Quality To access the Calculation Options dialog click the Options button on the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor or select the GO button and click Options Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 175 9 8 1 9 8 2 9 9 Hydraulic Analysis Options The following hydraulic analysis parameters are available for user configuration e Trials Unitless number that defines the maximum number of iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution The default value is 40 e Accuracy Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations When the sum of the absolute flow changes between successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the absolute flows in all links and is less than the Accuracy the solution is said to have converged The default value is 0 001 and the minimum allowed value for Accuracy is 1 0e 5 The number of trials specifies the maximum number of iterations to be performed for each time step in an extended period simulation not the total number of iterations for the entire analysis In most cases the default values
179. c data e Water Quality Results of the water quality computations in the pipe reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed For more information on the data see the topic on each data section below Pipe Section In this section you enter all of the pipe general characteristics e Label Unique name referencing the pipe in reports error messages and tables e Material Pipe material with its associated roughness value selected from the material library e Diameter Diameter of the pipe e Roughness Coefficient Pipe roughness coefficient or value associated with the roughness method selected during the project setup Manning s n Hazen Williams C or Darcy Weisbach roughness height for the selected material You can keep the roughness value associated with the selected material as defined in the material library or override the roughness value for that specific pipe e Minor Loss Coefficient Coefficient K used in the minor loss equation as defined in the Minor Loss section in the WaterCAD Theory Appendix This is the equation most commonly used for determining the headloss in a fitting valve meter or other localized component e Check Valve When this box is checked flow can only travel from the From Node to the To Node in a pressure pipe Z By clicking the ellipsis button located next to the Material or the Minor Loss Coefficient field you can access the engineering librar
180. cenario Editor is the location to enter the cost adjustments and to run a cost calculation for the selected scenario e Batch Run Performing a batch run allows you to set up and run multiple cost scenarios at once This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations or simply manage a group of smaller calculations as a set The second section is the pane to the right of this column of buttons When you open the Cost Manager this pane will contain all the scenarios in the project Each scenario will have an icon located to the left of it indicating whether a cost calculation has been performed for that scenario If the icon is a green file folder then the scenario has not been calculated If the icon is a file folder with a dollar symbol then the cost results are available for that scenario If cost results are available for the scenario then the total cost of the scenario will be displayed to the right of the scenario label Clicking on a scenario for which cost results are available will expand the components comprising the total cost of the scenario These components include the following types of sections e A section for each cost function that is used in the cost analysis e A section detailing additional unit costs specified for the pipes in the system e A section detailing the fixed cost specified for each element in the system e A section detailing any cost adjustments made to the total cost of all the elements includ
181. cenario initially consists of the same Alternatives as its Parent Scenario except the Demand Alternative should be the new Alternative you created 4000 l min Fire Flow Check the box next to Demand A selection box for this Alternative appears Click Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 45 on the box and select the new Alternative from the list The new Alternative is no longer inherited from the Parent but is local to this Scenario Click Close to exit the Scenario i Scenario Manager OF x KR Scenario Scenarios E E Ea EAEN Alternatives Summary Results Wizard Z 2000 l min 3 hour Fire Flow at J 6 4 4000 l min Fire Flow at J 6 EP er Physical Base Physical n B Demand Average Daily with 2000 Ee Initial Settings Base Initial Settings Operational Base Operational Scenario 4 Management it Eb Alternatives Go Batch Ee Age Base Age Alternative ball EP Constituent Base Constituent Scenario E Trace Base Trace Alternative CA EE Fire Flow Base Fire Flow E Cost Base Cost Base User Data off Ee Local Alternative 3 Inherited Alternati 3 3 3 Part 3 Calculate and Compare 1 You are going to calculate both of the Scenarios at the same time using the Batch Run tool Click the Batch Run button on the left side of the Scenario Management dialog Check the boxes next to both Scenarios and then click the Batch button Click Yes at
182. cessing by the program The GIS Database Connection system allows you to exchange data between the model and any arbitrarily defined external files This flexibility allows you to set up a database or spreadsheet and it frees the developer to use a file format that is efficient for the program Data Protection Open file formats can typically be modified by anyone often without the knowledge of the modeler By providing an interface to exchange data the model is protected from inadvertent changes The modeler is in complete control of when and how the model or external files are updated Type Coercion Quite often the external files do not store the data using the format expected by the hydraulic model For example a database may store the length of a pipe using single precision floating point numbers whereas the model works with double precision floating point numbers When exchanging data between the model and the external file using the GIS Database Connection system the data is coerced from one type to the other automatically Unit Conversion The quantities used in hydraulic models almost always have some unit associated with them For example pipe lengths are typically expressed in meters or feet General purpose database and spreadsheet applications do not support the concept of unitized numbers A pipe length for example is simply represented as 100 0 Is that 100 0 meters or 212 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections
183. cessing the Polyline to Pipe wizard e DXF Filename Specify the name of the DXF file you would like to import Use the Browse button to select the file interactively Chapter 14 Exchanging Data with CAD Software 233 B e DXF Unit Specify the DXF conversion unit the unit that your DXF file is in For example if your drawing is in metric specify meters m If your drawing is in architectural units specify inches in Polyline to Pipe Wizard Step 2 This step allows you to specify the following Polyline to Pipe conversion options e Connectivity tolerance Polylines whose endpoints fall within the specified tolerance will be connected to the same node A default tolerance is supplied based on the current scale This is generally a good starting point but you may wish to increase or decrease this default tolerance depending on your particular drawing If you complete the conversion process and find that the tolerance was not correct pipes that should be connected were not or vise versa you may wish to repeat the conversion process using a new tolerance e Specifying which entities to convert You can optionally convert Polylines Lines or both You generally want to convert both Polylines and Lines However if your drawing is set up so that Polylines are always used to represent pipes and Lines are used for annotation purposes you may wish to convert only Polylines e Handling missing nod
184. ck to make sure your annotation is correct and then click Finished 6 A plan view of the system with annotation displaying the difference between the two Scenarios will appear To better view the data maximize the window and use the zoom buttons from the upper toolbar to look at different areas of the model The difference between the two is found by subtracting Scenario 1 from Scenario 2 For example say Scenario has a pressure of 50 kPa at a junction and Scenario 2 which represents a future scenario has a pressure of 45 kPa at the same junction Comparing these pressures for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 would result in annotation stating a difference of 5 kPa When you have more than two scenarios you can select different combinations of the scenarios from the two list boxes and click the Update button to view the differences between the two You could also click the Auto Update check box and the differences will automatically update every time you change the combination of scenarios and time increments in the list boxes 7 Check the Auto Update box and use the VCR style buttons to scroll through different increments Look at the difference in pressures at junction J 6 during the fire flow between 18 and 21 hours There is a very large pressure drop due to the substantial increase in demand In the next part of this lesson we will look at scenarios to reduce this decrease in pressure Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 47 3 3 4
185. cking on the Results tab Select the Tank T 1 and open its Editor dialog Click on the Report button at the bottom of the dialog and select Detailed Report from the pull down menu to view a formatted summary report for the tank On page 2 notice that you can see the tank s status draining or filling at each time increment E Print Preview ioj x J Pg Up gt Pan page 2 of 2 cony Pent w omens Hec Q Help Detailed Report for Tank T 1 Tj Calculated Results Summary Time Calculated Pressure Current Current Inflow Outflow Current Hydraulic Grade kPa Percent Volume l min l min Status m Full m3 i 0 00 hr 226 00 244 55 83 3 261 33 675 675 Filling 1 00 hr 225 81 252 42 96 8 291 80 509 509 Filling 1 32 hr 226 00 254 33 100 0 301 59 0 O Full 2 00 hr 226 00 25433 100 0 301 59 0 0 Full 3 00 hr 226 00 25433 100 0 301 59 0 0 Full 4 00 br 226 00 25433 100 0 301 59 0 0 Full 5 00 hr 226 00 254 33 100 0 301 59 0 O Full 6 00 hr 226 00 254 33 100 0 301 59 0 0 Full 7 00 hr 226 00 264 33 100 0 301 59 0 0 Full 8 00 hr 226 00 264 33 100 0 301 59 0 0 Full i 9 00 hr 226 00 254 33 100 0 301 59 109 109 Draining i 10 00 hr 226 87 263 05 97 8 295 03 73 73 Draining i 11 00 hr 225 78 262 20 96 4 290 66 49 49 Draining i 12 00 hr 225 72 251 63 95 4 287 72 32 32 Filling 13 00 hr 225 76 252 01 96 0 289 66 22 22 Filling i 14 00 hr 225 79 252 26 96 5 290 97 15 15 Filling i 16 00 hr 226 81 262 43 96 8 291 85 49 49 Filling
186. concept we see that any scenario simply references one alternative from each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed Note that different types of alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes and any category can have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from Generic Scenario Anatomy Scenario XYZ 2C Attribute Attribute 2B Attribute Attribute 2A Attribute Attribute 1B Attribute Attribute Attribute 1A Attribute Attribute Attribute Alternative Category 1 Alternative Category 2 Scenario Behavior Inheritance The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives groups of data meets one of the basic goals of scenario management maximizing the number of scenarios you can develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives Two other primary goals have also been addressed a single project file is used and easy access to input data and calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical interface But what about the other objective minimizing the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input Surely an entire set of pipe diameters should not be re specified if only one or two change 298 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide The solution is a familiar concept to most people inheritance In the natural world a child inherits characteristics from a parent This may include such
187. correct visually but may contain problems that are not readily apparent For example what appears to be a single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments or it could be made up of 2 lines one directly on top of another The Polyline to Pipe Wizard will guide you through the conversion process enabling you to set up options relating to tolerances node creation and handling T intersections To help alleviate some of the problems that you may encounter during the import process a comprehensive drawing review is also performed During conversion the network is analyzed and potential problems are flagged for review After performing the conversion the Drawing Review window will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that may be encountered 82 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons For users in Stand Alone mode only 1 Open WaterCAD and choose Tools Options from the pulldown menus In the Global Options tab make sure that the Unit System is set to System International and then click OK Next select File Import Polyline to Pipe You will be asked if you want to set up the project Click Yes to start the Project Setup Wizard For users in AutoCAD mode only 1 Start WaterCAD for AutoCAD and open the file Lesson7 dwg in the Haestad Wtrc Lesson directory Select Edit Change Entities to Pipes from the menus The AutoCAD command line will prompt you to Select objects Draw a selection window ar
188. crosshairs change into a pickbox Using the pickbox select elements from the drawing space 50 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 4 2 that you want to report individually or using a window and then right click once to bring up the Detailed Reports dialog 7 When the Detailed Reports dialog opens the elements selected from the layout view are already highlighted for output From this dialog you can edit the element selection set hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple elements from the list and then print the reports Click the Select button to go to the Selection Set dialog If you wished to select multiple elements based on some criteria you could do that here Click Cancel to return to the Detailed Reports dialog You can click the Print button to print all of the reports for the selected elements Click Cancel to exit the dialog 8 Another type of report available is the Element Results Report The elements to be included in this report are selected the same way as the elements for the Detailed Report except that Elements Results is selected from the Report pull down menu The result is a single report containing calculated analysis results for each of the elements selected From the Elements Results Report dialog you can print or copy paste the report for any element s The Elements Results Report contains all of the results calculated for the selected element s Go ahead and select elements to be included in this report
189. ct the color coding ranges in the table automatically Finally click OK to generate the Color Coding We can add a legends to the drawing by clicking the Insert Legend button choosing the Link Legend or Node Legend option and clicking anywhere on the drawing space to place the legend In AutoCAD accept the defaults when prompted about scale and legend Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 57 3 5 jt WaterCAD by Haestad Methods Lesson WCD OF x File Edit Analysis View Tools Report Help Deala fe e o ele Py 2 Color Coding Legend Background ON x 588 49 y 7 35 m 5 Color coding is dynamic that is it updates automatically as you change time increment or Scenario using the list boxes above the drawing pane Notice that as you switch from the first Scenario to P 8 and P 9 set to 200 mm the color of these pipes changes from red to blue 6 To turn the color coding off simply open the Color Coding dialog and set the Attribute to lt None gt on both the Link and Node tabs To delete a legend select it by clicking once and hit the Delete key Close the open dialogs and save this project before proceeding with Lesson 5 From these four lessons you have had a brief introduction to the capabilities of WaterCAD Feel free to continue to play with the program Use this model to explore and become familiar with all of the features If you do not know what a button does just try
190. ction Set Manager Click the ellipsis button to access the Selection Set Manager In addition to using selection sets you can also add nodes to a special zone that will J ensure that they are excluded from the contouring point set Cybernet 2 users might recall that Zone number 99 was reserved for this purpose You should create a zone named Do not contour You can then add the nodes that you do not want to be included in the contour set You can change the name of the contour exclusion zone by editing the file haestad ini and setting the variable ExcludeFromContouringTag equal to any string label The exclusion label is not case sensitive If you want to exclude some spot elevations from the contouring point set set their Description field to Do not contour or whatever value is set in the haestad ini ExcludeFromContouringTag variable e Minimum Lowest value to be included in the contour map It may be desirable to use a minimum that is above the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid creating excessive lines near a pump or other high differential portions of the system e Maximum Highest value for which contours will be generated e Increment Step by which the contours increase The contours created will be evenly divisible by the increment and are not directly related to the minimum and maximum values For example a contour set with 10 minimum 20 maximum and an increment of 3
191. culation Options Specify parameters affecting hydraulic and water quality calculations Clicking the GO button will perform the calculations The GO button the Validate toggle and the Check Data button are not available when the Scenario Editor is accessed from the Scenario Manager In order to validate the data or calculate the current scenario the Scenario Editor should be accessed by clicking the GO button on the main window Calibration is one of the most important steps in developing a hydraulic and or water quality model This program provides an easy to use calibration feature that lets you tweak the input data to help you match data observed in the field Each calculation depends upon a number of parameters that can optionally be configured using the Calculation Options dialog If the model has not been calculated or if the input data has been changed since the last calculation the word Compute displayed in Red will appear in the status pane in the lower right corner of the main editing window This is a signal that the model needs to be recalculated Scenario Editor Results Tab The Results tab contains a summary of the last calculation performed using this scenario Click the Save button to save the results to an ASCII text file Click the Print Preview button to preview the Scenario Results Summary Report 166 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives Immediately after you
192. d e DXF Unit The DXF drawing unit conversion is used when importing DXF background files and also when exporting a DXF file from the project Note that the value in this field governs the DXF file import behavior for DXF files saved in scientific decimal or fractional units but not for DXF files saved in architectural or engineering units e DXF Background Filename This field enables you to specify a DXF file to be used as the background for your project Enter the drive directory and file name or click the Browse button to select a file interactively Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 95 4 4 4 4 1 DXF file import behavior is governed by specific factors within the DXF file If a file does not import as you expect check the options used to generate it carefully For example try importing the DXF back into the original program or into another program that supports the DXF format such as AutoCAD MicroStation etc If the DXF does not import into other applications there may be an invalid or missing header invalid elements or other errors Symbol Visibility Symbol visibility allows you to customize the drawing by turning specific layers on or off Each drawing layer holds a particular type of graphical element such as labels and annotation To remove the graphical elements of a particular layer from the drawing view simply uncheck the associated box e Show Labels The label layer holds the labels
193. d e Show Legend A check mark designates that the legend will be included on the graph or pie chart Turn the check mark off if you do not wish to show the legend e Series Each series represents a different curve on the graph or a slice on the pie chart If the graph contains only one curve or the pie chart contains only one slice then it is designated as Series 1 Scroll through the list and select the desired curve or slice series number for which to customize the color and or line type Then use one of the options below to customize it Label Name for the selected curve series Line Color Color for the selected curve series Line Style for graphs only Style for the selected curve series Line Width for graphs only Width for the selected curve series Symbol for graphs only Data point symbol to use for the selected curve series Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 203 e Save as Default Place a check mark in this box to save the current legend settings as the default for subsequent graphs 11 10 Status Log Several commands generate a status log showing the results of that command for example a database connection The main window will show you status information based on your action The dialog contains the following buttons e Print Print the status log results e Save Export the status log results as an ASCII file e Copy Copy the status log res
194. d The value by which the numeric base of each consecutive element is incremented five is entered in the Increment field The minimum number of digits in the ID number two is entered in the Digits field If the number of digits in the ID number is less then this value it is padded with zeros Click the Apply button to produce the following labels P 05 Z1 P 10 Z1 P 15 Z1 and P 20 Z1 e Append This operation allows you to append a prefix suffix or both to the selected element labels Suppose that you have selected the labels 5 10 15 and 20 and you wish to signify that these elements are actually pipes in zone of your system You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and suffix such as P and Z1 by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix fields and clicking the Apply button Performing this operation would yield the labels P 5 Z1 P 10 Z1 P 15 Z1 and P 20 Z1 You can append only a prefix or suffix by leaving one of the entry fields empty However in order for the operation to be valid one of the entry fields must be filled in The selection of elements on which the relabel operation is to be performed can be selected in the Elements section of the Relabel Elements dialog To access the Relabel Elements dialog select Tools Relabel Elements from the main menu 5 6 3 Elements Selected The Elements section contains a text pane that lists the elements to be relabeled You can select the set o
195. d the set of default Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 157 values for all junctions included in the fire flow set and a record for each junction node in the fire flow set Default Flow and Pressure Constraints Each fire flow alternative has a set of default parameters that are applied to each junction in the fire flow set When a default value is modified you will be prompted to decide if the junction records that have been modified from the default should be updated to reflect the new default value The default constraints are grouped in the Flow Constraints and Pressure Constraints sections as follows o Needed Fire Flow Flow rate required at a fire flow junction to satisfy demands e Fire Flow Upper Limit Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location It will prevent the software from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains which have large diameters and high service pressures e Apply Fire Flows By There are two methods for applying fire flow demands The fire flow demand can be added to the junction s baseline demand or it can completely replace the junction s baseline demand The junction s baseline demand is defined by the Demand Alternative selected for use in the Scenario along with the fire flow alternative e Residual Pressure Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node The program determines the amount of fire flo
196. d format To export a table to an ASCII File format select File Export Data and either Tab Delimited or Comma Delimited from the Table window 148 Chapter 7 FlexTables Table Copy to Clipboard The Copy button at the top of the Table window allows you to copy tab delimited data to the Windows clipboard Tab delimited data can be pasted directly into your favorite spreadsheet program or word processor Table Print The Print button at the top of the Table window is used to output the table directly to the printer Table Print Preview Click the Print Preview button at the top of the Table window to view the report in the format that will be printed Using label abbreviations will allow some columns to be narrower permitting more data to fit on each page Use the Options button at the top of the Table window to access this option Printing with landscape orientation will also allow more columns to fit on a single page From the Print Preview window use the Options Print Setup menu item to access orientation Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 149 8 1 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives The scenario management feature allows you to easily analyze and recall an unlimited number of What If alternative calculations for your model The powerful two level design which uses Scenarios that contain Alternatives gives you precise control over changes to the model while eliminating any need
197. d to the current model Any number of Table Links may reference the same database file To Node A pipe s ending node Positive flow rates are in the direction of from towards to Negative flow rates are in the opposite direction To Pipe The pipe that connects to the downstream side of a valve or pump Total Active Volume The volume of water between minimum elevation and maximum elevation of a tank This is an input value for variable area tanks Total Needed Fire Flow If you choose to add the fire flow to the baseline demand the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow plus the baseline demand If you choose NOT to add the fire flow to the baseline demand the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow Total Storage Volume The holding capacity of a tank It is the sum of the maximum hydraulically active storage volume and the hydraulically inactive storage volume Trace Source Identification The percentage of water at any given point originated at a chosen tank reservoir or junction Valve Status A valve can have several different status conditions Closed no flow under any condition Active throttling opening or closing dependent on system pressures and flows and Inactive wide open with no regulation Velocity The field that displays the calculated value for a pipe valve or pump velocity at a given time It is found by dividing the element s flow rate by
198. d within the tolerance the pipe will not be created because it has insufficient connectivity data Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 225 Import Shapefile Link Editor The Import Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor Refer to that topic for detailed information on the following Shapefile Link parameters e Shapefile Location of the file that is being referenced by the Shapefile link This is identical to the Database File parameter of the Table Link Editor e Key Label Field Key by which the entire Shapefile model mapping is defined e Field Links Identical to the Field Links group of the Database Table Link Editor Create Shapefile Connection The Create Shapefile Connection window provides an opportunity during a Shapefile Import or Shapefile Export to specify that a persistent connection containing the Shapefile Links and Synchronization Options be created This Connection can be used at a later time to synchronize the model and the Shapefiles The Create Shapefile Connection window has the following parameters e Add Shapefile Connection Check this box if you wish to add a persistent Shapefile Connection to the Shapefile Connection Manager By default this box is checked e Label Specify an alphanumeric label for the Connection This field is only editable when the Add Shapefile Connection box is checked To access the Shapefile Import Wizard select File Import Shapefi
199. dditional elements will be automatically created in the database e Remove from destination if present in source If this is checked when synchronizing out elements that are present in the database but not in the model will be deleted from the database If this is not checked the unmapped elements will be ignored e Prompt before remove If this is checked you will get a dialog notifying you of each unmapped element in the destination and asking if you would like to remove that element If this is not checked the additional elements will be automatically removed from the database In order to be successfully created from the database Pipe Elements must have a Start J and Stop node associated with them This association can be established by mapping the Start Node and Stop Node attributes in the pipe table link or by the In Link or Out Link of a node table link Mapping both the pipe table and node table attributes may result in the reading of redundant data causing the connection to fail By default elements created from a database are located at coordinate 0 0 This behavior can be overridden by mapping the X and Y or Northing and Easting attributes of the node elements Select File Synchronize Database Connections from the main menu This will open the Database Connection Manager Click Add to create a new connection or select Edit to change an existing connection From the Database Connec
200. de The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation Reservoirs can be used to model external water sources such as lakes streams and wells Pumps A pump is an element which adds head to the system as water passes through It is typically defined by a pump curve and control elevations which turn the pump on or off It is represented as a node Valves A valve is an element that opens throttles or closes to satisfy a condition you specify It is represented as a node A water distribution model will not be considered valid for calculation if the number of pipes exceeds the licensed size To determine how many pipes you are licensed for choose the Help About WaterCAD menu item Click the Registration button to view the size that has been licensed If the total number of pipes exceeds the licensed size the project will not calculate 112 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 Element Editors The element editors allow you to edit all input data and view all output data defining a single network element Element data may also be viewed edited more efficiently through FlexTables which display all the data in customizable tabular format allowing you to perform sorting filtering global editing etc The data may also be quickly reviewed through the Quick View window To access an element editor follow
201. ded to the system This value may be computed by the program or entered manually Maximum Operating Point The highest discharge for which a pump is actually intended to run At discharges above this point the pump may behave unpredictably or its performance may decline rapidly Messages The section of an element editor that contains information generated during the calculation of the model such as warnings errors and status updates Messages Light A light that appears on the Tab of the Messages sheet The light will be red if errors occurred during the analysis yellow if there are warnings or cautions and green if there are no warnings or cautions Minimum Elevation The lowest allowable water surface elevation in a tank If the tank drains below this point it will automatically shut off from the system Minimum System Junction The junction where the calculated minimum system pressure occurs Minimum System Pressure The minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as result of fire flow withdrawal If the pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow fire flow will not be satisfied A fire flow analysis may be configured to ignore this constraint Minimum Zone Junction The junction where the calculated minimum zone pressure occurs Minimum Zone Pressure The minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within a Zone The model dete
202. demonstrate that there are poor conditions in the system It simply indicates that the spot elevations may cover a wider area than the model itself Profile A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance such as ground elevation along a section of piping As well as these side or sectional views of the ground elevation profiles can be used to show other characteristics such as hydraulic grade pressure and constituent concentration Although profiles in general are not limited to a specific alignment piping network models are usually concerned with a specific profile alignment type called a network walk Profile Setup Setting up a profile is a matter of simply selecting the walk and the attribute on which the profile is to be based The Profile Setup dialog includes e Attribute Parameter to be plottted on the vertical axis of the profile e Elements List of elements that define the walk to be profiled In addition the network walk can be manipulated by using some of the associated options e Select From Drawing Return to the drawing in a protected mode to select and deselect elements for inclusion in the walk e Reverse Reverse the order of the walk The first node in the list becomes the last and the last node becomes the first e Remove All Remove all elements from the current walk e Remove All Previous Remove all elements that appear before the selected element in the
203. direction of flow Secondary causes of energy loss are due to localized areas of increased turbulence and disruption of the streamlines These disruptions are caused by valves meters or fittings and are called minor losses These minor losses are often negligible relative to friction losses and may 276 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory B 2 2 sometimes be ignored in an analysis While the term minor is a reasonable generalization for most large scale water distribution models it may not always be the case In piping systems that contain numerous fittings relative to the total length of pipe the minor losses may have a significant impact on the energy losses Friction Losses There are many equations that model friction losses associated with the flow of a liquid through a pressure pipe The three most commonly used methods are e Hazen Williams e Darcy Weisbach Jain s e Manning The Darcy Weisbach method is applicable to a wide range of fluids while the Hazen Williams and Manning s equations are based on empirical development and are only applicable for water modeling All of these methods calculate friction losses as a function of the fluid s velocity and a measure of the pipe s resistance to flow roughness Typical pipe roughness values for all of these methods are shown in the Roughness Table at the end of this chapter Of course these values may vary depending on the manufacturer workmanship age and many other
204. ds In the local page accessed by selecting Content there are links to Haestad Methods Internet sites which are updated frequently Welcome Dialog In Stand Alone mode only Open the Welcome dialog which is also shown at program startup Tutorials Access the interactive tutorials which guide you through many of the program s features Tutorials are a great way to become familiar with new features Using WaterCAD Open a Help topic with an Introduction to WaterCAD and related elementary information How Do I Provide instructions for tasks commonly performed within the program as well as frequently asked questions About WaterCAD Open a dialog displaying product and registration information WaterCAD Toolbars The toolbar buttons are grouped based on functionality so element creation tools are all together in the tool palette results tools are all together on the tool pane and so forth In AutoCAD mode some tools are provided by AutoCAD itself such as file open and save zoom and so forth so these tools are not included on the WaterCAD toolbars 24 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 2 3 1 Tool Pane Summary The tool pane contains buttons for project management data management and results presentation File Tools Stand Alone Only Bowe New Create a new project Open Open an existing project Save Save the current project Print Preview View a print preview of the
205. e Edit Change the characteristics of the selected table link such as the referenced file or table or the mapping of the table s field links Duplicate Duplicate the selected table This command is very helpful when defining two or more table links with similar attributes Delete Delete the selected table link from the connection Select File Synchronize Database Connections from the main menu This will open the Database Connection Manager Click Add to create a new connection or select Edit to change an existing connection From the Database Connection Editor click the Database Connection tab Synchronization Options Tab The Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor provides an interface for some of the behaviors of the connection These options cannot be accessed until the Table Links are defined and are as follows e Add Objects to destination if present in source If this option is selected when performing a synchronize out for example elements that are present in the model but are not found in the database file will be created in the database If this is not checked only the elements that are present in both the model and the database will be updated e Prompt before adding object If this is checked you will get a dialog notifying you of each unmapped element in the source and asking if you would like to create a new element in the destination If this is not checked the a
206. e ellipsis button to edit the parameters for the active tank section type e Zone Specify the zone the tank belongs to You may click the ellipsis button to access the Zone Manager which allows you to edit or add zones 8 1 4 Demand Alternative The Demand Alternative allows you to model the response of the pipe network to different sets of demands such as the current demand and the year 2010 demand The demand alternative table includes the following columns e Label Identifying label of the junction element e Type Demand type Demand or Inflow Direct editing of this item is disabled if the junction has multiple demands see Demand Summary below e Demand Hydraulic load attributed to the junction for Steady State Analysis or the hydraulic load before applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for Extended Period Analysis If the junction has multiple demands this field displays a single calculated Baseline Load and direct editing of the field is disabled see Demand Summary below e Pattern Name of the Pattern that applies the time step multiplier to the Baseline Load If the junction has multiple demands direct editing is disabled and the pattern name is shown as Composite e Demand Summary A summary displaying the calculated Baseline Load the EPS Pattern applied to the Baseline Load and the calculated demand Type Demand or Inflow for the junction Clicking twice on a Demand Summar
207. e right click the bend you would like to remove and select Bend Remove Bend 11 8 1 Legend Legends are used to display the ranges of the active link and node color coding The legend tool adds a color coding legend to the drawing This legend is automatically updated as the color coding is modified Editing of the legend figure is not required In Stand Alone mode multiple legends may be placed in the drawing to assist you when printing only regions within the drawing Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 201 Nl y 11 9 11 9 1 11 9 2 11 9 3 You can double click a color coding legend in the drawing to edit the associated color coding parameters Preview Windows Plot Window The Plot window that displays when generating a profile contour map etc contains four option buttons at the top of the Plot window e Copy Outputs the plot onto the clipboard for use in other applications e Print Outputs the contents of the Plot window to the printer e Options Graph Options Customizes the Plot This feature allows you to change the graph s axes fonts titles etc e Close Closes the Plot window Print Preview Window This window provides you with a preview of what will be printed The top of the window contains the following buttons e PgUp PgDn Navigate between pages of the report e Copy Copy the page s to the Windows clipboard e Print Output th
208. e which is the upgrade for Cybernet v3 can now run inside both AutoCAD 2000 and AutoCAD R14 Microsoft Office 2000 Support Now supports Microsoft Excel 2000 and Access 2000 Chapter 1 Orientation 1 3 1 3 1 e Windows 2000 Support Now works with Windows 95 98 NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 e Network Licensing Support Now gives you the option to purchase a license for multiple concurrent users managed by a network based administrator software e User Data Extension User defined attributes can now be added to supplement WaterCAD with your own custom features This data can then be used like any other WaterCAD data in FlexTables annotating color coding Database Connections etc e Polyline to Pipe Conversion Convert existing AutoCAD drawings directly to WaterCAD models e Element Relabeling Edit selected element labels to automatically renumber replace or append a prefix suffix e Aerial View Optional separate window used to facilitate zooming panning and locating a small viewing area in the main window e Aligning Pipe Labels Automatically aligns pipe labels and annotations with the associated pipe e Cost Estimating Calculate a planning level estimate of the capital cost associated with an entire system or any portion of a system This makes it easy to compare the costs associated with the various scenarios thus helping to ensure that the most cost effective design is chosen e Co
209. e General Tab section General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the reservoir such as e Label Unique name referencing the reservoir in reports error messages and tables e X Easting The location of the reservoir may be represented by an X value or an Easting value depending on individual preferences e Y Northing The location of the reservoir may be represented by a Y value or a Northing value depending on individual preferences e Elevation Elevation of the water surface in the reservoir which is assumed to remain constant through time e Zone Specify the zone in which the reservoir belongs Click the ellipsis button to access the Zone Manager which allows you to edit or add zones Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the hydraulic data of the reservoir e Inflow Outflow Flow entering leaving the reservoir the field label changes accordingly 120 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors Pumps General Tab The General tab for pumps is organized into the following groups e General General data about the pump e Pump Type of pump curve and related data e Initial Setting Initial conditions for a pump describing the pump s behavior at the start of the analysis in EPS mode or its permanent setting in Steady State mode e Pipes Direction the pump is operating i e from upstream to downstream node The direction
210. e Haestad Wtrc Lesson directory Leave the DXF unit set to meters and click Next Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 83 Polyline to Pipe Wizard D Haestad wTRC lessons Lesson def m Z For all users 1 Now set up the options WaterCAD will use when performing the conversion Change the Tolerance to 1 m so that pipe endpoints that come within a meter of one another will be assumed to be connected Select the radio button for Convert Polylines and Lines to pipes and tell WaterCAD create a Pressure Junction if no node is found at a polyline endpoint Click Next Polyline to Pipe Wizard Pressure Junction SHER 2 Select the option to join pipes at T intersections within the specified tolerance and click Next Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Polyline to Pipe Wizard Eg C How would you like to handle polylines that form T Intersections S within the specified tolerance P la P 1b P2 Before Conversion After Conversion Cancel Help lt Back Finished Select Yes when asked if you have blocks that you would like to convert to nodes and fill in the table by matching the AutoCAD Blocks JUNCTION PRV PUMP RESERVOIR and TANK with the corresponding WaterCAD elements Pressure Junction PRV Pump Reservoir and Tank Click Next Polyline to Pipe Wizard x Q Does this drawing contain blocks that you would like to convert to nodes Yes C No
211. e Initial Status is used as the permanent status However it can be overruled by the presence of controls if the Use Controls in Steady State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog is checked The Calculation Options dialog is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor and then clicking the Options button Pipes Section This indicates the direction in which the pump is operating from upstream node to downstream node You can switch the Upstream and Downstream Pipes by clicking the Reverse button Operating Point Section The pump s operating point represents the values for pump head and discharge which are computed by the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow rates The calculated parameters are e Pump Head Head generated by the pump at the operating point e Discharge Discharge produced by the pump at the operating point e Pump Intake Grade Calculated hydraulic grade line at the intake of the pump e Pump Discharge Grade Calculated hydraulic grade line at the downstream end of the pump For a constant power pump the calculated operating point may be outside of the range for which the pump is representative of a real pump Be very cautious and check all results carefully For more information about the theory behind the pump operating point see the Pump Theory chapter
212. e Selection Set Compute Options In AutoCAD mode the process is slightly different but still very easy With the Select tool active simply click the element If you have Right Mouse Context Menu checked in the Global Options dialog you can also right click to bring up the pop up context menu Right click context menus can provide easy access to common functions and actions 5 1 8 Moving Elements You can change the location of elements easily whether you are in Stand Alone or AutoCAD mode The first step is to select the element s to be moved With grips displayed simply drag a grip and drop it at the new location When a node is moved to a new location pipe lengths are automatically updated according to the set scale lee In AutoCAD this is the equivalent of the STRETCH command not the MOVE 7 Y E command There are also several other methods of moving items within AutoCAD For more information regarding moving elements within AutoCAD please refer to your AutoDesk documentation In the same fashion you can also graphically change the location of element labels and annotation relative to the element Additionally a node element can be moved by editing its coordinates in the element s editor in FlexTables or through database connections Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 103 5 1 9 5 1 10 5 2 5 2 1 Deleting Elements Deleting elements is quite easy Simply select the element s to be de
213. e Shapefile Each item in this column is a column heading in the Shapefile being created which correlates to the item in the model being mapped By default the heading are set to an all capitals abbreviation of the attribute name with spaces and periods replaced by the underscore character The column heading can be changed but must be less than ten characters long and cannot contain periods The spatial data in the Shapefiles being created will be in the current display unit for map coordinates For example if the X and Y or Northing and Easting values in the model are displayed in meters at the time of the export then the spatial data in the Shapefiles created will also be in meters Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 227 13 2 6 The values for the exported attributes will be in the current display units for that attribute For example if a junction elevation attribute is displayed in feet at the time of the export the Shapefile will contain that value in feet Shapefile Export Example Follow these steps to export one or more Shapefiles from the model 1 From the File menu select the Export Shapefile menu item to access the Export Shapefile Wizard 2 Select the element types that you wish to export by clicking one or more of the check boxes in the list then click the Next button 3 You will be presented with an Export Shapefile Link Editor for each element type you chose to export
214. e Volume 314 Importing from EPANET 252 Inflow 314 Inheritance 297 298 314 Dynamic 298 Overriding 298 Initial Settings 314 Alternative 154 155 Initial Water Quality 314 Input 102 Data 111 Modes 92 Quick View 110 Inputting Fire Flow Data 58 Insert Elements 101 Nodes 101 Installation Problems 4 Installing Haestad Methods Products 3 Internet Address 8 Interpolate 314 Inventory 192 Invert 314 J Junctions 112 324 Index K K Coefficients 207 292 Kinematic Viscosity 208 KYPIPE 252 L Label 314 Abbreviate 146 Elements 109 261 Rebuilding AutoCAD Mode 239 Rotate 241 Sizing 261 Visibility 95 Laws Affinity 273 Conservation of Mass amp Energy 268 Layer 95 234 240 Laying Out the Network 32 Layout 29 AutoCAD 238 Network 99 Pipe Using Entity 244 Legend 22 200 201 Quick View 110 Length 314 Level Mode 92 93 Library Constituent 208 209 Editor 206 Liquid 208 Manager 206 Material 207 Minor Loss 207 Licenses 4 5 Line 200 Enclosed Area 103 Linear System Equation Solver 271 Linear Theory Method 269 Link Color Coding 189 261 Liquid 92 Library 208 Local Units 146 147 Losses Minor 279 M Mailing Address 8 Manning s Coefficient 314 Mannings Equation 278 Roughness Values 288 Typical Values 291 Mass Conservation 268 Mass Transfer Coefficient 282 Material
215. e because the Database Table or other database related fields will not have any entries in the associated drop down lists If this happens confirm that ODBC is installed and operating correctly on your computer Double check that the ODBC data source you are trying to reference actually exists and is accessible by other programs in your environment Check the HAESTAD LOG file for error messages pertaining to ODBC If none of these steps helps you correct the problem please call HMI Technical Support Given the diversity of ODBC database drivers and the difficulty of reproducing your networked computing environment we cannot guarantee that the Database Connection feature will function with all ODBC databases However we will try to determine the source of your problem and offer a fix or workaround if possible If you edit the connect string manually you will need to re enter the dependent fields such as Database Table and Field Links Sharing Database Connections between Projects When WaterCAD works with database connections it is using a file with a HDC extension which stores the information regarding database files table links and field mapping 220 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections When you open a WaterCAD project file WCD WaterCAD first looks for a file in the same directory and with the same filename but with the HDC extension If it finds this file it uses the database connectivity information contained therein
216. e contents of the Print Preview window to the printer e Options Print Setup Change printer options such as portrait or landscape page layout e Options Fit to Page The Fit to Page check box will not appear if the Preview window does not contain a drawing or if the drawing is in schematic mode not to scale When checked the drawing will be scaled to fit within a single page When not checked the drawing will be output using the drawing scale e Close Close the Print Preview window Graph Options These features allow you to customize the way a graph or pie chart used in SewerCAD looks The dialog is divided into several tabs Titles e Titles There are three sets of titles for a graph Graph title X Axis title and Y Axis title Each title set contains two levels title and subtitle A pie chart simply has a title and a subtitle e Title Font This feature allows you to select and change the text font type for specific items on the graph or pie chart Use the selection list to choose the item for which to change the font then click the ellipsis button to select the desired font type from the list of available fonts currently installed on your PC 202 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results Axis for graphs only e Automatic Scaling By default the program uses the Automatic Scaling options for setting the X and Y axis minimum maximum and increment values To customize an axis turn the check mark
217. e contours The plot can be printed or exported as a DXF file using the File button at the top of the window In AutoCAD mode you can export the contours directly to your AutoCAD drawing by clicking File Export to AutoCAD Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this view before sending the plot to the printer The Contour Plot Status Pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor Although the straight line contours generated by this program are accurate smooth contours are often more desirable for presentation purposes You can smooth the contours by clicking Options and selecting Smooth Contours Contour Smoothing The Contour Smoothing option displays the results of a contour map specification as smooth curved contours The plot can be printed or exported as a DXF file using the command buttons at the top of the window Enhanced Pressure Contours Normal contouring routines only include model nodes such as junctions tanks and reservoirs When spot elevations are added to the drawing however you can create more detailed elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours These enhanced contours include not only the model nodes but also the interpolated and calculated results for the spot elevations Enhanced pressure contours can help the modeler to understand the behavior of the system even in areas that have not been included directly in the model Spot Elevations In addition t
218. e current unit system which refers to the units used in the current project You will be prompted to confirm before this action is performed Reset to Factory Defaults You can reset any of the predefined tables to the factory defaults this option is not available for tables that you create Table Setup Dialog The Table Setup dialog allows you to customize any table through the following options e Table Type This field allows you to specify the type of network elements that will appear in the table e g only pipes will appear in a pipe table e Available Columns This list contains all the attributes that are available for your table design and will change based on the Table Type field e Selected Columns This list contains attributes that will appear in your custom designed table When you open the table the selected attributes will appear as columns in the table in the same order that they appear in the list e Allow Duplicate Columns This is an advanced feature that allows you to place two identical columns in the same table and set them to different unit systems e Column manipulation buttons These buttons allow you to select or deselect columns to be used in the table as well as to arrange the order in which the columns will appear The number next to the Selected Columns label indicates the number of columns that will appear in your table To access the Table Setup dialog from the Table Mana
219. e data for all the scenarios in a single project it can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario results Any set of results is immediately available at any time e The Scenario Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of data from existing scenarios without having to re declare any data e With inheritance you do not have to re enter data if it remains unchanged in a new alternative or scenario avoiding redundant copies of the same data Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios These advantages while obvious may not seem compelling for small projects It is as projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of true scenario inheritance become clear On a large project being able to maintain a collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore them About this Guide As implemented by Haestad Methods the depth of scenario management is probably far beyond what you have ever seen before With that in mind this guide is intended as an introduction to the philosophy and terminology upon which scenario management is based This is not intended as a step by step guide to using the software If you are a moderately experienced Windows softw
220. e editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs e General General valve information including geographical data and hydraulic results e Controls Data specifying how the valve is controlled as a function of the time or the hydraulic condition at any node in the system e Quality Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog e Cost Cost Analysis input output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations e User Data Additional data as defined by the user New fields can be added e Messages Calculation messages such as warnings or error messages and user defined notes and descriptions For more information on the data refer to the topics describing each tab Element Editors Tabs General Tab Pressure Pipes General Tab The General tab for pressure pipes is organized into the following groups e Pipe General pipe data e Initial Status Specify whether the pipe is initially open or closed 116 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors e User Defined Length Specify whether the pipe length is calculated automatically or user defined e Nodes Define a positive direction for the flow in the pipe This is used for check valves or flow results A reported negative flow indicates that the water is flowing from the To Node to the From Node e Hydraulic Results Calculated hydrauli
221. e field presents the hydraulic grade for the element at the current time period as calculated based on the system flow rates and head changes Hydraulic Grade Setting The constraint to which a valve regulates expressed in units of head Length Depending on the type of valve it may refer to either the upstream or downstream hydraulic grade or the headloss across the valve Inactive Volume The volume of water below the minimum elevation of the tank This volume of water is always present even when the tank reaches its minimum elevation and closes itself off from the system Therefore it is hydraulically inactive It is primarily used for water quality calculations Inflow and Outflow An inflow is a flow into a node from the system while an outflow is a flow from the node into the system A negative outflow is the same as a positive inflow and a negative inflow is the same as a positive outflow Inheritance The parent child relationship used by scenarios and alternatives Just as in the natural world inheritance is used to refer to the situation where an entity receives something from its parent For example we speak of a child inheriting blue eyes from a parent Unlike in the natural world inheritance in scenarios and alternatives is dynamic If the parent s attribute changes the child s attribute automatically changes at the same time unless the value is explicitly changed in a child Initial Settings The status
222. e files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension and be located in the same directory Listed below are the files you will be importing Only the main files are listed however corresponding SHX and DBF are present as well e PresJunc shp e PresPipe shp e PRV shp e Pump shp e Reservoi shp e Tank shp If you have a program such as ArcView that allows you to view Shapefiles begin by setting up a View with all of the Shapefiles Themes listed above turned on If you completed Lesson 6 you should recognize the layout from that lesson You can look at the data table for each of the Themes to see what we will be importing When you have finished reviewing the Shapefiles close the application Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 67 ArcView GIS Version 3 1 i xi ile Edit Table Field Window Help 1 of 100 selected PolyLine 2 i e ES H H H o U AS Double click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand Alone If the Welcome to WaterCAD dialog appears select the Close button Open the Global Options tab accessed from the Tools Options pull down menu Since we will be working in metric units click the Unit System selection box and select System International Click OK In the pull down menus select File New Click No when asked if you want to save the current project In the Create Project File As dialog double click the Lesson folder enter the file name gispro
223. e flow at the same pressure up until its maximum speed when its discharge head will decrease with any increase in discharge Alternatively to model the effect of a variable speed pump you can model a pump with artificially high design shutoff and max operating heads Then let a PRV downstream of the pump regulate the head down to the setting of the variable speed pump Another method is to regulate the discharge head of the pump by varying the pumps relative speed factors by using pump controls in concordance with the Affinity laws A 3 Display Tips The following display tips will be discussed in this section e Changing Units in a Column e Controlling Element and Label Sizing e Color Coding Elements e Reusing Deleted Element Labels A 3 1 Changing Units in a Column In a Table you may change the units of all the data within any column To change the units 3 Select Use Local Units from the Options menu in the Tabular Report dialog 4 Right click the column heading or any data item within a column 5 Select the Properties option from the pop up menu Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 261 A 3 2 A 3 3 A 3 4 A 4 6 Change the units and select OK All data items in that column will change to the selected units The change of units affects only the data in the Table It DOES NOT change the units within your network design Controlling Element and Label Sizing To change the size of element sym
224. e of 400 gpm Also if a junction has an inflow of 100 gpm or a demand of 100 gpm and the calibration operation is Set Demand to 200 gpm then the inflow at that junction will be 200 gpm equivalent to a demand of 200 gpm e Roughness Use this calibration field to temporarily adjust the roughness of all pipes in the distribution network e Apply Click the Apply button to permanently adjust the demands or roughness Generally you will use this button after experimenting with the calibration factors on successive calculations and comparing the calculation results to observed field data The calibration data is located on the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor which can be accessed from the Analysis Scenarios menu item 9 4 Check Data Validate This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors hard to detect topology problems and modeling problems When the Validate box is checked the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations It can also be run at any time by clicking the Check Data button The process will produce either a dialog stating No Problems Found or a status log with a list of messages The validation process will generate two types of messages A warning message means that a particular part of the model i e a pipe s roughness does not conform to the expected value or is not within the expected range of values This type of warning is useful but not fatal There
225. e selected table e Close Exit the Table Manager dialog without opening a table e Table Management New Create a new table using the Create New Table and Table Setup dialogs e Table Management Edit Modify the layout of the selected table using the Table Setup dialog e Table Management Rename Rename the selected table e Table Management Duplicate Duplicate the selected table for additional customizing This is a very useful feature when you need to change a predefined table e Table Management Delete Delete the selected table e Table Management Reset Reset a table s units to the current unit system or reset a predefined table to factory defaults 140 Chapter 7 FlexTables 3 You cannot rename or delete the predefined Tables that come with this software When you choose to print a table the table name will be used as the title for the printed report You can change the report title by renaming the table To access the Table Manager click the Tabular Reports button E on the main toolbar or choose Report Tables from the main menu 7 2 1 Creating New Tables To create a new table open the Table Manager by clicking the Tabular Reports button ml on the main toolbar or by choosing Report Tables from the main menu In the Table Manager dialog click the Table Management button and select New 1 Specify the Table Type to indicate the type of network elements you want to display in your
226. eading data from the Shapefiles 9 Click Finished and Yes when prompted if you want to proceed Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 71 Shapefile Connection Wizard 10 A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data is read into the model When the import is complete you should get a yellow light in this window indicating that the synchronization was successful but that there are warnings If there were no warnings you would get a green light and if there were errors a red light In this case the warnings are due to the fact that we instructed WaterCAD to generate our network connectivity from the GIS spatial data The log indicates where connectivity is being established which is fine Close the Status Log and click OK to return to the drawing pane Status Log es Jee ees eee Updating Updating Updating Updating Updating Updating Updating Updating Updating Reviewing drawing for potential problems No problems were found Synchronization Results Summary 183 element s added 0 element s DELETED 183 element s updated 0 element s disregarded due to blank record key 100 element s missing one or both end node s 200 element s found for missing end node s 0 element s created for missing end node s Elapsed 0 hour s 0 minute s 10 second s 11 Now examine the network that you imported Notice that it looks like the network from Lesson 6 and many of t
227. ecifically entered for a given junction the values will be based on the default fire flow data as entered in the Fire Flow Alternative Editor accessed by selecting the Analysis Alternatives menu item and clicking the Edit button on the Fire Flow tab e Fire Flow Input Minimum required fire flow at this junction and minimum pressures to be maintained Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 129 Fire Flow Calculation Results After performing a fire flow analysis results are available for the junction node assuming it is part of the fire flow selection set Edit the following things exclusively in the Fire Flow Alternative Editor whether a fire flow analysis is to be performed at a node whether the needed fire flow is to replace or be added to current demands whether a minimum pressure is required for the entire system and default fire flow input values Results of fire flow calculations which are obtained from calculations performed separately for an automatic batch run are only reported in the Fire Flow tab and in the Fire Flow Tabular Report accessed from Report Tables Fire Flow Report or the FlexTable icon Results reported in the other Element Editor tabs do not take into account any fire flow unless you explicitly entered this fire flow as a demand at a specific junction Fire Flow Input The fire flow input data for a junction are as follows Needed Fire Flow The flow rate required at t
228. ection Manager dialog and click the Reset button By default the standard database connections include a table link for each element type and field links for all the attributes related to that element type with some minor exceptions The default units for the specified unit system SI or US are used for unitized attributes The Key Label field is designated as the key field for each of the table links and it is created as an index for the table during database creation No duplicates are allowed As noted above the field links external field names can be edited directly within the table link editor It is valid to have more than one internal attribute mapped to a single external field name Although this is not the case for the standard connections in their factory default state you can create this condition Under this condition the following behaviors will be observed e Import Synchronize In All of the attributes will be populated with the value of the database field if it is a valid value for the specified attributes e Export Synchronize Out The database field will be populated with the last non nil attribute value If an existing filename is chosen during export the existing database file will be overwritten Therefore any custom tables queries forms etc present in that database will be lost Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 215 13 1 3 Model data that are typically a collecti
229. ed by a single design point Hd Qd From this point the curve s interception with the head and discharge axes is computed as Ho 1 33eHd and Qo 2 00 Qd This type of pump is useful for preliminary designs but should not be used for final analysis e Standard Three Point This pump curve is defined by three points the shutoff head pump head at zero discharge the design point as with the single point pump and the maximum operating point the highest discharge at which the pump performs predictably e Standard Extended This is the same as the standard three point pump but with an extended point at the zero pump head point This is automatically calculated by the program e Custom Extended The custom extended pump is similar to the standard extended pump but allows you to enter the discharge at zero pump head e Multiple Point This option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a pump The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various heads Since the general pump equation shown below is used to simulate the pump during the network computations the user defined pump curve points are used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation Y A BxQ Where Y Head m ft Q Discharge m s cfs A B C Pump curve coefficients The Levenberg Marquardt Method is used to solve for A B and C based on the given multiple point rating curve e Constant Power These
230. ed in the cost analysis If there is no cost data associated with one or more of these sections then those sections will not be listed Just above the right side of the center pane listing the available scenarios is a row of three buttons each of which is described below e Properties This button opens the Cost Scenario Editor for the currently selected scenario In this dialog the system cost adjustments applied to the total cost computed for the elements in the system can be edited The cost calculation for the selected scenario can also be run from this dialog e Graph This button opens a pie chart of the items comprising the total cost of the scenario e Report This buttons opens a printed tabular report on any item selected in the pane below these buttons If the scenario label is selected then a tabular report of all the items comprising Chapter 10 Cost Estimating 181 10 1 1 10 1 2 the scenario are included in the report If one of the components listed under the scenario is selected then only the information for this one item will be included in the report The third section on this dialog is the pane on the right side This pane is used to display an expanded view of the contents of the item selected in the center pane The table listed in this pane will appear in the printed report that is opened when the report button described above is clicked To open the Cost Manager window select Analysis Compute C
231. ed when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Function Manager e Local Unit Unit of the attribute that controls the unit cost This unit is used for defining the formula coefficients Valid Cost Data Range This section specifies the range of values for which the function is valid for the attribute used to define the unit cost function Clicking the Initialize Range button will initialize these two values based on the range of values present in your current network Coefficients In this section you can enter the coefficients defining the unit cost function The x parameter which represents the value of the attribute on which the unit cost function is based is expressed through the unit specified in the Local Unit field in this tab Unit Cost Function Notes Optional notes that you can enter related to the unit cost function 10 1 3 Cost Scenario Editor The Cost Scenario Editor dialog is the control center for each cost analysis It is the place where you access or change all the information for performing a single calculation alternatives system cost adjustments results and notes It is organized into the following tabs e Alternatives Edit or view all cost alternatives e Cost Calculation Edit or view the cost adjustments for the total system cost and run a cost calculation for a single scenario e Results If a cost calculation has been performed for a scenario this log will contain summary information for
232. ed with another district or a private developer to limit the maximum demand to a value that will not adversely affect the provider s system Pressure Reducing Valves PRV s Pressure reducing valves are often used for separate pressure zones in water distribution networks These valves prevent the pressure downstream from exceeding a specified level in order to avoid pressures that could have damaging effects on the system Pressure Sustaining Valves PSV s Pressure sustaining valves maintain a specified pressure upstream from the valve Similar to the other regulating valves these are often used to ensure that pressures in the system upstream in this case will not drop to unacceptable levels Pressure Breaker Valves PBV s Pressure breaker valves create a specified headloss across the valve and are often used for model components that cannot be easily modeled using standard minor loss elements Throttle Control Valves TCV s Throttle control valves simulate minor loss elements whose headloss characteristics change over time Friction and Minor Losses Friction Method Theory Energy Losses in Pipes The energy loss hy in a piping system may be due to a combination of several factors The primary cause of energy loss is due to friction between the fluid and the conduit wall Since this friction is present throughout the length of any given pipe the energy grade line and hydraulic grade line drop continuously in the
233. een seen before WaterCAD v4 is right there on the leading edge With WaterCAD v4 s new database connectivity your hydraulic model can easily be linked to virtually any major database spreadsheet or GIS product currently in use today Shapefile wizards and flexible database linking tools make the process simple and straightforward without anchoring you to a specific database layout or units system Control Valves Cybernet v2 provided you with three types of controlling valves Pressure Reducing Valves PRV s Pressure Sustaining Valves PSV s and Flow Control Valves FCV s WaterCAD v4 expands the options to include two additional types Pressure Breaker Valves PBV s that create a constant headloss across the valve and Throttle Control Valves TCV s that allow you to adjust minor loss coefficients based on system pressures HGL s or time Cybernet v2 also allowed a valve setting of Maintain Always for PRV s and FCV s These settings were primarily used to simulate a pump for preliminary design work Through numerous support calls and dozens of inaccurate models however we found that this feature was often misused resulting in frustration These Maintain Always settings are no longer supported in WaterCAD v4 Instead we offer a wider variety of pump options to encourage modelers to make better educated guesses and better preliminary design decisions Pumps and Pump Curves Cybernet v2 pumps can be categorized as one of t
234. efer to either the upstream or downstream pressure or the pressure drop Pull Down Menu A menu of available commands or actions you can perform A pull down menu is usually selected from the menu bar at the top of the main program window Pump Status A pump can have two different status conditions On which is normal operation or Off which is no flow under any condition RDBMS See DBMS Glossary 317 Relative Speed Factor The characteristics of a pump relative to the speed for which the pump curve was entered in accordance with the affinity laws A speed factor of 1 00 would indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump curve Residual Pressure The minimum residual pressure to occur at a junction node The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at a junction node does not fall below this target pressure Reynold s Number Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces A high Reynold s number indicates turbulent flow while a low number indicates laminar flow Roughness A measure of a pipe s resistance to flow Pipes of different ages construction material and workmanship may have different roughness values Roughness Coefficient A value used to represent the resistance of a conveyance element to flow In the Manning s equation this value is inversely proportional to flow The smaller the roughness coefficient the greater
235. eir actual values are displayed To 136 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors include a piece of text that contains a character that maps to the date or time information use single quotation marks around the text Notes Tab This tab contains a text pane for entering notes about the current data extension The text entered here is not displayed anywhere in the model but allows you to keep records for a particular data extension Existing Fields to Share With Dialog This dialog allows you to choose which of the attributes already defined for other types of elements you want to share with the current type of element corresponding to the User Data Extension tab currently opened Available Items Lists attributes defined for other element types that are not already shared In order to add attributes to the current element type highlight them and click the Add button to transfer them to the Selected Items list Selected Items The attributes in the Selected Items list will be added to the current element after you click the OK button All the characteristics such as data type format unit and display precision for a particular user data extension are the same for all the elements that share it This is useful when the attribute you are adding needs to be the same for all the element types for which it is defined For instance if you have a date installed field for every element sharing guarantees that the date format
236. elational and non relational database management systems DBMSs On Off Status The status of a pump can be either on or off On means that flow will occur in the downstream direction and the pump will add head to the system according to its characteristic curve Off means that no flow will occur and no head will be added Open Closed Status The status of a pipe can be either open or closed Open means that flow can occur in either direction Closed means that no flow will occur through the pipe Outflow See inflow and outflow Percent Full The ratio of the current storage volume to the total storage volume multiplied by 100 Pipe Status Indicates whether the pipe is open or closed As input this determines how the pipe begins the simulation As output it shows the calculated status of the pipe at the given time Polyline A composite element that consists of a series of line segments Each line segment begins and ends at a vertex A vertex may be another element such as a junction tank or pump Power The water horsepower of a pump that is transferred from the pump into the water Depending on the pump s efficiency the actual power consumed brake horsepower may vary Pressure The field that displays the pressure for the current time period Pressure Setting The constraint to which a valve regulates expressed in units of pressure Force per Length Depending on the type of valve it may r
237. els weirs orifices and inlets FlowMaster s Hydraulics Toolbox can solve or create rating tables curves for any variables using the Manning s Hazen Williams Kutter s Darcy Weisbach and Colebrook White formulas FlowMaster s new inlet computations strictly comply with the latest FHWA Hydraulic Circular Number 22 replacing Circular 12 and AASHTO inlet computation guidelines FlowMaster offers you the same powerful tools that can be found in WaterCAD SewerCAD and StormCAD such as FlexUnits FlexTables and automatic generation of professional quality reports and graphs Notes References 309 References Benedict R P Fundamentals of Pipe Flow John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1980 Brater Ernest F and Horace W King Handbook of Hydraulics McGraw Hill Book Company New York 1976 Cesario A Lee Modeling Analysis and Design of Water Distribution Systems AWWA 1995 Clark R M W M Grayman R M Males and A F Hess Modeling Contaminant propagation in Drinking Water Distribution Systems Journal of Environmental Engineering ASCE New York 1993 Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering Third Edition Haestad Press Connecticut 1999 CulvertMaster User s Guide Connecticut Haestad Methods 1999 Essential Hydraulics and Hydrology Connecticut Haestad Press 1998 FlowMaster PE Version 6 0 User s Guide Connecticut Haestad Methods 1998 Males R M W M Grayman and R M Clar
238. em Topping a a 5 Apple Pie He copping esse ce Cream Dessert 3 Chocolate Cake Whipped Cream e Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1 except for the topping Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts so it can be created as a root or base alternative It does not inherit its attribute data from any other alternative Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent a child scenario can inherit which alternatives it references from its parent This is essentially still the phrase just like x except for y but on a larger scale Carrying through on our meal example consider a situation where you go out to dinner with three friends The first friend places his order and the second friend orders the same thing except for the dessert The third friend orders something totally different and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows inherited values are shown as gray text local values are shown as black text Meal Scenario Salad _ Entree _ Dessert _ Hierarchy Alternative Alternative Alternative Salad 1 Entree 2 Dessert 3 Dessert 1 Salad 3 Entree 3 Dessert 2 Salad 2 e Meal 2 is just like Meal 1 except for the dessert The salad and entr e alternatives are inherited from Meal 1 e Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2 A totally new base or ro
239. emands As well as having an unlimited number of demand alternatives there is also no limit to the number of different demand types you can have Cybernet v2 was limited to five demand types 1 2 3 4 and Fixed but WaterCAD v4 allows as many different types necessary Also demands can have alpha numeric labels such as Residential Commercial and Industry XYZ This enables you to model service connections with much more detail because you can specify diurnal demand patterns for any number of special individual customers In addition to demands WaterCAD v4 also provides inflow or flows that are introduced into the system Perhaps the best improvement for demands however is the ability to attribute more than one type of demand to a given junction node An unlimited number of different customer types can all contribute to the total demand at a single junction so there is no need to estimate an equivalent demand type or add another demand type to a fake junction immediately adjacent to another node Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 251 Links to Graphical Information Systems GIS and Databases One of the most exciting developments of the software industry in the 1990 s has been the push for data reuse Constantly improving database capabilities published file formats such as the Shapefile format and even tools as simple as the Windows clipboard are all contributing to a level of data sharing that has never b
240. ements 9 Allocation The nodal mass is assigned to the first volume element of all outgoing links These steps are graphically summarized below Eulerian DVEM Original Concentrations Reacted Concentrations J Transport into Nodes e g ZA Tororo tes i So Engineer s Reference This chapter provides you with tables of commonly used roughness values and fitting loss coefficients Roughness Values e Roughness Values Manning s Equation e Roughness Values Darcy Weisbach Colebrook White Equation e Roughness Values Hazen Williams Equation 288 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory e Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes Coefficients e Fitting Loss Coefficient B 4 1 Roughness Values Manning s Equation Commonly used roughness values for different materials are Manning s Coefficients n for Closed Metal Conduits Flowing Partly Full Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum a Brass smooth 0 009 0 010 0 013 b Steel 1 Lockbar and welded 0 010 0 012 0 014 2 Riveted and spiral 0 013 0 016 0 017 c Cast iron 1 Coated 0 010 0 013 0 014 2 Uncoated 0 011 0 014 0 016 d Wrought iron 1 Black 0 012 0 014 0 015 2 Galvanized 0 013 0 016 0 017 e Corrugated metal 1 Subdrain 0 017 0 019 0 021 2 Storm drain 0 021 0 024 0 030 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 289 B 4 2 Roughness Values Darcy Weisbach Equation Colebrook White Commonly used ro
241. enter the total storage volume for the tank Operating Range Section This section allows you to set the absolute limits for the water levels in the tank Elevations are relative to the same datum as the rest of your system while levels refer to heights of water above the tank s base elevation The operating range fields prompt you for the following values Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 125 6 2 4 e Elevations Levels Select whether you want to enter the data in terms of absolute elevation typically based on the sea level or in terms of levels relative to an arbitrary base elevation of the tank you specify e Maximum Highest allowable water surface elevation or level If the tank fills above this point it will automatically shut off from the system e Initial Value used as the water surface elevation or level when performing steady state calculations or as the beginning condition when performing an extended period simulation e Minimum Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level If the tank drains below this point it will automatically shut off from the system e Base Elevation Elevation of the storage tank base used as a reference when entering water surface elevations in the tank in terms of levels Cross Section Section There are two basic types of storage tanks as described below Constant Area Section The cross sectional geometry of the tank is constant between the minimum and maxi
242. equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting valve meter or other localized component is yV 2 hm K 2g Where haw Loss due to the minor loss element m ft V Velocity m s ft s g Gravitational acceleration constant m s ft s K Loss coefficient for the specific fitting Typical values for the fitting loss coefficient are included in the Fittings Table at the end of this chapter Generally speaking more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller headlosses For example the figure below shows the effects of a radius on typical pipe entrance flow lines 280 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory Flow Lines at Entrance Nima aaa i LE Eg ES NN B 3 Water Quality Analysis In the past water distribution systems were designed and operated with little consideration of water quality due in part to the difficulty and expense of analyzing a dynamic system The cost of extensive sampling and the complex interaction between fluids and constituents encourages the use of numerical modeling for predicting water quality Water Quality Solution Algorithm This software implements the Eulerian Discrete Volume Element method DVEM to solve the numerical constituent transport problem for the system being analyzed The method requires as basic input the complete solution for the distribution of flows magnitude and direction for the network links and nodes at each discrete time step that occur
243. er a hydropneumatic tank that operates between 50 psig and 60 psig The tank s storage volume is approximately 50 cubic feet The tank base elevation is chosen to be equal to the ground elevation and the pressures are converted into feet of water 1 psi 2 31 feet It is apparent that the tank operates between levels of 115 5 feet and 138 6 feet The difference between the levels is 23 1 feet which brings us to a needed cross section of 2 16 square feet Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well A groundwater well is modeled using a combination of a reservoir and a pump Set the hydraulic grade line of the reservoir at the static groundwater elevation The hydraulic grade line can be entered on the reservoir tab of the reservoir editor dialog box or under the Reservoir Surface Elevation column heading in the Reservoir Report Pump curve data can be entered on the Pump tab of the Pump editor The following example will demonstrate how to adjust the manufacturer s pump curve to account for drawdown at higher pumping rates Drawdown occurs when the well is not able to recharge quickly enough to maintain the static groundwater elevation at high pumping rates Pump Curve Accounting for Drawdown Head Pumped Discharge Example The pump manufacturer provides the following data in a pump catalog Head ft Discharge gpm 1260 0 1180 8300 1030 12400 Based on field conditions and test results the followin
244. er after each element is created to yield the number for the next element e Prefix Enter the letters or numbers that will appear in front of the ID number for the elements in your network e Digits Enter the total number of digits the ID number will have e Suffix Enter the letters or numbers that will appear after the ID number for the elements in your network e Preview An example of what the label will look like based on the information you have entered in the previous fields Changes to the element labeling specifications will only affect the numbering of new elements Existing elements will not be affected In order to adjust the numbering of existing elements utilize the Relabel Elements option accessible from the Tools menu Pipe labeling can be aligned with the pipes or be displayed horizontally depending on the Pipe Text setting specified in the Drawing Options dialog You can control the angle at which the text flips from one side of the pipe to the other reading in the opposite direction to maintain readability when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical By default the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1 5 degrees measured counter clockwise from the vertical You may modify this value by inserting a TextFlipAngle variable in the Haestad ini file located in your Haestad directory under the WTRC section and specifying the angle at which the text should flip That angle is me
245. er as follows k SD d Where ke Mass transfer coefficient m s ft s D Molecular diffusivity of substance in fluid m s ft s Sn Sherwood number unitless d Pipe diameter m ft For Rg 2 2300 turbulent flow Sp 0 023R 85 9 3 For Re lt 2300 laminar flow S 3 65 0 0668 d L R S 1 0 04 d L R S Where Re Reynolds number unitless Sc Schmidt number v d unitless L Pipe length m ft q Flowrate m s cfs A Cross section flow area of the pipe m ft Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 283 B 3 4 v Kinematic viscosity of fluid m s ft s The molecular diffusivity and the kinematic viscosity are supplied by the user Sources Edwards D K et al Transfer Processes McGraw Hill New Your NY 1976 Rossman Lewis A EPANET Users Manual Version 1 1 Drinking Water Research Division Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory USEPA Cincinnati Ohio Jan 1994 Accuracy Issues in Water Quality Simulation with this Software The accuracy of the Discrete Volume Element method DVEM is primarily driven by the size of the water quality time step t Unless the modeler provides a user override of this calculation parameter this software will automatically compute the time step based upon the minimum pipe travel time in the system Note that transport across pumps and valves is assumed to be instantaneous During each quality step there should be no dispersio
246. eral project files that all reference common Connection information let your project files automatically default to the WTRC HSC file Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be automatically reflected when you open any other project If there are several people working on different projects on different computers but they still wish to have common connectivity information the appropriate HSC file can be copied and renamed if necessary to the individual local drives Preventing Shapefile Connectivity Sharing between Projects There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful such as when there are many projects each with different database connectivity At these times it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project rather than with all projects To do this simply copy the WTRC HSC file from the installed WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file and rename it to the same name as your WCD file 228 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections For example if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1 WCD rename WTRC HSC to PROJECT1 HSC The connections in PROJECT1 WCD can then be modified without the effects being reflected in any other projects 13 2 7 Shapefile Format An ESRI Shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the spatial and non spatial attributes of a map feature The three required files are as
247. ere Pressure N m lb ft p y Specific weight N m lb ft z Elevation m ft V Velocity m s ft s g Gravitational acceleration constant m s7 ft s These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two locations using the energy equation Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 267 B 1 3 The Energy Equation In addition to pressure head elevation head and velocity head there may also be head added to the system by a pump for instance and head removed from the system due to friction These changes in head are referred to as head gains and head losses respectively Balancing the energy across two points in the system we then obtain the energy equation 2 2 V P1 pz4 1 thy pep Z h 29 Where Pressure N m lb ft Pp y Specific weight of the fluid N m 1b ft z Elevation at the centroid m ft V Fluid velocity m s ft s g Gravitational acceleration m s ft s h Head gain from a pump m ft h Combined headloss m ft The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quantities which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade Hydraulic and Energy Grades Hydraulic Grade The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head p y and elevation head z The hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezometer The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile i
248. ertion point The label of a selected item or the number of selected items will be displayed in the status bar Q Selecting Elements AutoCAD Mode Within AutoCAD the Select tool does not need to be active when making a selection In fact no tools need to be active Many of the standard Windows selection techniques can be used in AutoCAD similar to the selection method in Stand Alone mode AutoCAD also offers a variety of other selection methods which are outlined in AutoDesk s documentation 102 Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools When an element is selected in AutoCAD it may be displayed in a dashed linetype and the grips may become visible as shown below The exact display depends on how the element was selected and the value of the AutoCAD variable GRIPS Mae 5 1 7 Editing Elements Not all network elements have the same input data There are several methods for editing network elements data including Database Connections FlexTables and the Alternative Manager Perhaps the most common method of changing element data however is from an individual element s editor To edit a single element use the Selection tool in Stand Alone mode or in AutoCAD mode In Stand Alone mode editing a single element is very easy Simply double click the element and the editor dialog will open Alternatively you can right click the element and select Edit from the pop up context menu Delete Creat
249. es at polyline endpoints A pipe can only be created if there is a node at both endpoints If a node cannot be found at a polyline endpoint a node must be added Otherwise the pipe cannot be converted This option allows you to specify whether or not a node is created and if so the default type of element to create In general you will want to create a default node at polyline endpoints However if your network already contains nodes at polyline endpoints or if your drawing contains blocks at polyline endpoints that are to be converted to nodes you may wish to specify that the polyline not be converted Polylines that can not be converted because one or both end nodes are missing will be flagged for review at the end of the conversion process If the conversion does not yield the desired results you can repeat the conversion process using different settings Be sure to save your project before performing the conversion Polyline to Pipe Wizard Step 3 This step allows you to specify how T intersections pipe split candidates should be handled Nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of a pipe are referred to as pipe split candidates There are two ways to handle these e Join the pipes at the intersection The pipe split candidate will be used to split the intersecting pipe e Do not join the intersecting pipes Pipe split candidates will be flagged for later review using the Drawing Review window
250. es do not necessarily need to be included when backing up your important files However if you are unsure simply copy all files present in your project directory It is recommended to use a separate directory for every WaterCAD project on your computer to facilitate project management and backup Import Command The Import command allows you to import data from KYpipe v1 v2 or v3 EPANet v1 or v2 and Cybernet v1 or v2 You will then be able to save this project as a WaterCAD v4 project The data is imported into an empty project therefore before the data is imported you will be prompted to save your current project if it contains WaterCAD elements The current project remains in schematic mode when importing data We ve made every effort to prevent the loss of data during these imports However all imported data should be checked for accuracy WaterCAD v3 projects should simply be opened in WaterCAD v4 as any WaterCAD v4 project without using the Import command However once you save the project in WaterCAD V4 the project files cannot be opened in WaterCAD v3 any longer To access the Import dialog select Import Network from the File pull down menu Multiple Sessions WaterCAD does not support multiple sessions WaterCAD uses a single document model and support for multiple views has not been implemented Therefore do not try to open more than one session of WaterCAD at the same time or data loss and
251. es is also inherited from the root and cannot be altered in the child alternatives 8 1 11 Cost Alternative The Cost Alternative contains the data allowing you to perform cost estimating of the whole network or parts of it This dialog contains the following tabs e Pressure Pipe e Nodal Elements Pressure Junction Pump Valve Reservoir and Tank Pressure Pipe Cost Alternative The Pressure Pipe tab in the Cost Alternative editor contain the data associated with pipe cost estimating as described below e Include Element in Cost Calculation Toggle allowing you to estimate the cost of only part of the network e Total Fixed Cost Cost of this pipe resulting from any fixed cost as defined in the Fixed Cost Table accessed by double clicking in the Fixed Cost Description field e Fixed Cost Description Button accessing the Fixed Cost Table The button is labeled as Simple or Composite when there are more than one fixed cost item for this pipe e Unit Cost Function Allow you to associate a unit cost function selected from the scroll down list You may click the ellipsis button to access the Unit Cost Functions Manager which allows you to edit or add unit cost functions in a tabular or formula format based on a pipe attribute such as pipe diameter e Additional Unit Cost You may also define or add a unit cost specific to this pipe Nodal Element Cost Alternative The Pressure Junction Pump Valve Reservoi
252. esired changes to the existing name and press Enter Delete Delete the scenario that is currently highlighted Report Generate a summary report for the scenario that is highlighted including alternatives calculation options notes and results Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 161 e Alternative Open the Alternative Manager for creating editing and managing alternatives e Batch Run Open the Batch Run dialog for selecting from among the available scenarios and initiating calculations e Scenario Comparison Open the Annotation Comparison Wizard which allows you to create drawings displaying the differences in input and output variables between two scenarios 3 The pane in the center of the dialog e Scenarios Pane Available scenarios in a hierarchical tree showing the parent child relationships You can right click any scenario to perform scenario management functions on it You can double click parent scenarios to expand or collapse the child scenarios beneath them 4 The pane on the right side of the dialog which displays a variety of information depending on which of the following tabs is selected e Alternatives Alternatives referenced by the highlighted scenario showing the type and name for each alternative An icon distinguishes whether the alternative belongs to the scenario Ep or is inherited from its parent scenario Z open the Alternatives editor Double click any
253. ess can help to avoid fluctuation that may occur in cases where the tanks are modeled individually This fluctuation is caused by small differences in flow rates to or from the adjacent tanks which offset the water surface elevations enough over time to become a significant fluctuation This results in inaccurate hydraulic grades Modeling Fire Hydrants Fire Hydrant flow can be modeled by using a short small diameter pipe with a large minor loss in accordance with the hydrant s manufacturer Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main If you are unable to model an existing system back to the source but would still like to model a connection to this system a reservoir and a pump with a three point pump curve may be used instead This is shown below Approximating a Connection to a Water Main with a Pump and a Reservoir R 1 p 2 PMP 1 P 3 J 1 The reservoir simulates the supply of water from the system The elevation of the reservoir should be equal to the elevation at the connection point The pump and the pump curve will simulate the pressure drops and the available flow from the existing water system The points for the pump curve are generated using a mathematical formula Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 257 given below and data from a fire flow test The pipe should be smooth short and wide For example a roughness of 140 length of 1 foot and diameter of 48 inches are appropriate numbers Please note
254. ession or if proxy elements have been deleted the application will force the drawing to be consistent with the native database by restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities 240 Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version e After network topology has been synchronized the application will compare other model and drawing states such as location labels and flow directions Again it will list any differences between the drawing client and server data and a message box will pop up giving you an opportunity to indicate which state drawing or model server should be adopted during the second stage of synchronization You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the command WITRCSYNCSERVER 15 2 2 Saving the Drawing as Drawing dwg AutoCAD uses Drawing dwg as its default drawing name Saving your drawing as the default AutoCAD drawing name for instance Drawing dwg should be avoided as it makes overwriting model data very likely When you first start AutoCAD the new empty drawing is titled Drawing dwg regardless of whether or not one exists in the default directory Since Haestad Methods modeling products create model databases associated with the AutoCAD drawing the use of Drawing dwg as the saved name puts you at risk of getting the AutoCAD drawing and Haestad Methods modeling files out of sync Oe If this situation is forced to occur save on quit for example simply resta
255. f 0 for all nodes The water from the reservoir will be an infinite supply of new water so the age of water elsewhere in the system will be a reflection of time from the start of the run and how long ago the water left the reservoir The analysis will be run for a 2 week period 336 hours in order to determine the equilibrium point of the system l Start by adding a new Alternative for the age analysis Select Analysis Alternatives from the pull down menus and click the Age tab to access the Age Alternatives Click the Add button to add a new Alternative and name it Initial Age 0 Since you are assuming an initial age of 0 everywhere in the system you do not need to enter any initial ages Close out of the table and the Alternative Manager Next set up a new Scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating the new Alternative Select Analysis Scenarios from the pull down menus You will see that there is one Scenario already set up called Existing Avg Day Highlight this Scenario and click Scenario Management Add Child Scenario Type in Age Analysis as the new Scenario name and click OK Under the Alternatives tab click to check the box labeled Age and select the Alternative you just created Initial Age 0 from the list box Click the Calculation tab to view the calculation settings for this Scenario Extended Period Analysis should already be selected Enter a Start Time of 0 Duration of 336 hour
256. f elements that appears in this text pane by clicking the Select button This accesses the Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 109 5 7 Selection Set dialog where you can pick a set of elements from all the elements currently in the project For the Append and Replace operations the order that the elements appear in the text pane does not affect the results of the operation However for the Renumber operation the order in which the elements appear in the text pane determines the order in which they will be renumbered The default order in which the elements appear in the text pane is in the alphanumeric order of the element labels called ascending order If you wish to change this order you can click the Sort button and select Network Order to put the elements in the order they appear in the network Descending Order to put them in reverse alphanumeric order or Ascending Order to put them back in alphanumeric order Element Labeling The Element Labeling dialog is used to specify the automatic numbering format of new elements as they are added to the network e Element A non editable field indicating the type of element the label applies to e Next Enter the integer you want to use as the starting value for the ID number portion of the label The program will generate labels beginning with this number and will choose the first available unique label e Increment Enter the integer that will be added to the ID numb
257. fault limits too restrictive These allowable minimums and maximums are only available for certain parameters Flex Unit Table The flexUnits table which can be accessed by selecting Tools FlexUnits allows you to set the parameters for all the units used The dialog consists of the following five columns e Attribute Type Attribute measured by the unit e Unit Type of measurement displayed To change the unit of an attribute type click the drop down menu and click the unit you want This option also allows you to use both US customary and SI units in the same worksheet e System Set the system of units Click the system column for the desired unit and a button should appear Click the button and set the unit system to the US or SI system e Display Precision Rounding of numbers and number of digits displayed after the decimal point Enter a negative number for rounding to the nearest power of 10 1 rounds to 10 2 rounds to 100 3 rounds to 1000 and so on Enter a number from 0 to 8 to indicate the number of digits after the decimal point This feature works the same whether scientific notation is on or off e Scientific Notation Display numbers in scientific notation Click the field to turn scientific notation on or off If it is turned on a checkmark appears in the box Use Defaults Clicking this button resets all the units to default US customary or metric units based on the project global
258. file synchronization process The Shapefile Synchronization Options are available for editing in the Import Shapefile Wizard and editing a Shapefile Connection The first group of options is only available when editing a Shapefile Connection These options are exactly the same as their counterparts in Database Synchronization Options and are as follows e Prompt before add e Prompt before remove Unlike the Database Synchronization Options the Shapefile Synchronization Options do not allow for optionally adding or removing elements When synchronized Shapefiles and the model will contain exactly the same number of records for the specified element type For example suppose a Shapefile contains a record for the junction labeled J 1 When this Shapefile is synchronized into the model the model will automatically add a junction labeled J 1 if none currently exists Likewise if J 1 is removed from the model and then synchronized out to the Shapefile the record for J 1 will automatically be removed from the Shapefile You have no control over this The rest of the options are available during the Shapefile Import Wizard and from the Shapefile Connection Editor Shapefile Unit Choose a unit from the available list This is the unit of the spatial data in the Shapefile For example if the X and Y coordinates of the Shapefile represent feet choose feet from the choice list If they represent meters choose meters Thi
259. fore no corrective action is required to proceed with a calculation Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or data entry error and should be corrected An error message on the other hand is a fatal error and the calculation cannot proceed before it is corrected Typically error messages are related to problems in the network topology such as a pump or valve not being connected on both its intake and discharge sides The check data algorithm performs the following validations e Network topology Checks that the network contains at least one boundary node one pipe and one junction These are the minimum network requirements It also checks for fully connected pumps and valves and that every node is reachable from a boundary node through open links e Element validation Checks that every element in the network is valid for the calculation For example this validation ensures that all pipes have a non zero length a non zero diameter a roughness value that is within the expected range etc Each type of element has its own checklist This same validation is performed when you edit an element in a dialog The dialog will not close until each item on the checklist is satisfied Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities was problematic but was not checked for in the network topology validation The situation could be created by morphing a node element such as a junction tank or reservoir into a pump or
260. from the Units list box Click OK to return to the updated table Click Close to exit the table when you are finished Click GO to open the run dialog and click GO to compute the network for 5 yr old D I P and then click Close 3 4 3 Part 3 Create a Plan and Profile 1 To create a plan view of the distribution system click the Report pull down menu and select Plan View Full View The Full View option will create a plan of the entire system regardless of what the screen shows while the Current View option will create a plan of exactly what is displayed in the window at that moment The Plan View will be put into a separate window which can then be printed or copied to the clipboard If you click the Copy button you can then paste the plan view into a word processor Click Close You can also create a plan view in the Stand Alone version for export to AutoCAD or other compatible software Simply click on the File menu and select Export DXF File This action will create a DXF file of your network that you can then import into AutoCAD In AutoCAD use plan views as a quick way to develop simple scaled views of your primary network Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 53 3 4 4 4 To create a profile view select the Profiling option from the Tools pull down menu or click the Profile button in the toolbar The Profile Setup opens From the dialog choose the attribute you wish to profile from the Attribute list box
261. g connectivity data from spatial data and then click Next again Click the ellipses button next to the Shapefile field Browse and select the file PresJunc shp from the Wtrc Lesson directory then click Open Set the Key Label Field to LABEL This item designates the field that WaterCAD matches with its own element labels so that data will be assigned to the correct place Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 69 5 Using the Field Links table you must now match the data types available in WaterCAD to the data types you will be bringing in from the Shapefile In row 1 select Elevation from the WaterCAD column and ELEV from the Database column Set the Unit to m to let WaterCAD know that the coordinate it is reading from the Shapefile is in meters If the units in your Shapefile were different than the units set up in WaterCAD the program would automatically make the necessary conversions Shapefile Connection Wizard x r Import Pressure Junction Shapefile Shapefile d haestad witrce lessons presjunc shp X Key Label Field LABEL x Field Links vaco oase JE fees ev a a Insert Duplicate Delete Select Cancel Help lt Back Next gt Finished cancel Heb ey 6 Fill in the next row so that your entries correspond to the table below Click Next when you are finished Pressure Junction Shapefile Connection WaterCAD Database Unit Ele
262. g drawdown data is known Drawdown ft 40 72 Discharge gpm 8300 12400 To account for the drawdown the pump curves should be offset by the difference between the static and pumped groundwater elevations Subtract the drawdown amount from the pump head and use these new values for your pump curve head data The following adjusted pump curve data is based on the drawdown and the manufacturers pump data Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 255 A 2 3 A 2 4 Head ft Discharge gpm 1260 0 1140 8300 958 12400 Modeling Parallel Pipes With some water distribution models parallel pipes are not allowed This forces you to create an equivalent pipe with the same characteristics With this program however you can create parallel pipes simply by drawing the pipes with the same end nodes To avoid having pipes drawn exactly on top of one another it is recommended that the pipes have at least one vertex or bend inserted into them Pipe Bends sero Bends Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series Parallel pumps can be modeled by inserting a pump on different pipes that have the same From and To Nodes Pumps in series one pump discharges directly into another pump s intake can be modeled by having the pumps located on the same pipe The following figure illustrates this concept Pumps in Parallel and Series a gt o Parallel Pumps Series Pumps If the pu
263. g in the AutoCAD version from the Wtrc Lesson directory If you did complete Lesson 1 then you can use the MyLesson1 file you created After you have opened the file select File Save As from the pull down menu Type the filename MyLesson2 and click Save Select File Project Summary and change the Project Title to Lesson 2 Extended Period Simulation Click OK Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 39 3 2 1 Part 1 Creating Demand Patterns Water demand in a distribution system fluctuates over time For example residential water use on a typical weekday is higher than average in the morning before people go to work and is usually highest in the evening when residents are preparing dinner washing clothes etc This variation in demand over time can be modeled using demand patterns Demand patterns are simply multipliers that vary with time and are applied to a given base demand most typically the average daily demand In this lesson you will be dividing the single Fixed demands for each junction node in Lesson 1 into two individual demands with different demand patterns One demand pattern will be created for residential use and another for commercial use You will enter demand patterns at the junction nodes through the junction editor dialogs 1 Open the editor for Junction J 1 and select the Demand tab By default the demand pattern is set to Fixed In the Demands table leave the first row set
264. ge of total flow quantity arriving at any node in the network from a specified contributing source node In this analysis the concentration value is set to the percent of flow from the node in question and the reaction rate is set to zero Water age gives a general indication of the overall water quality at any given point in the system Age is typically measured from the time the water enters the system from a reservoir until it reaches a junction The water age is computed as zj Aj A ji u J Where A Age of water at j th node s x Distance from node j 1 to node j m ft uj Velocity from node j 1 to node j m s ft s If there are several paths for water to travel to the j th node the water age is computed as a weighted average as shown i designates the pipes with an incoming flow to node j Where Q Flow rate in pipe i m s ft s gt Ii Age of water at the start node of pipe i s trace modeling In systems that receive water from more than one source trace studies can be used to determine the origin percentage breakdown of flow at each point These studies can be very useful for determining the area influenced by an individual source observing the degree of mixing of water from several sources and viewing changes in origin over time Identifying the origin of flow at a point in the system is referred to as flow tracking or Source Rossman Lewis A EPANET Users Ma
265. ger dialog highlight the table you wish to edit and select Edit from the Table Management menu button Table Type The Table Type field allows you to specify the types of elements that will appear in the table e g only pipe elements will appear as rows in a pipe table The table type also provides a filter for the attributes that appear in the Available Columns list When you choose a table type the available list will only contain attributes that can be used for that table type e g only pipe attributes will be available for a pipe table Available Table Columns The Available Columns list is located on the left hand side of the Table Setup dialog This list contains all of the attributes that are available for the type of table you are creating The attributes displayed in yellow represent non editable columns while those displayed in white represent editable columns 142 Chapter 7 FlexTables 7 3 3 Selected Table Columns The Selected Columns list is located on the right hand side of the Table Setup dialog The attributes in this list will appear as columns in the table when it is opened The columns will appear in the same order as the attributes in the selected list To add columns to the Selected Columns list 1 Select one or more attributes in the Available Columns list 2 Click the Add button gt or drag the highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list 7 3 4 Table Manipulation Buttons The Add and
266. h links limited by this parameter will occur at a faster rate than in reality resulting in some loss of accuracy This software will generate a Water Quality Status Log that will provide a table of Quality Time Steps and Maximum Number of Pipe Segments to give you some guidance in interpreting the simulation results You should remember that because of their approximate nature computer simulations are inherently inaccurate in some respects Consequently a significant aspect of system modeling is in determining just how much modeling inaccuracy is acceptable within the context of the problem being studied This is frequently governed by calibration input data availability accuracy and reliability over such issues as inherent limitations in models or methodologies Ultimately the resolution of accuracy concerns resides solely with the modeler 284 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory B 3 5 Age and Source Trace Analyses This software uses the built in Water Quality Constituent transport solver to model the changes in the age of water and to track source fractions reaching any node over time To accomplish this the model makes the following assumptions e Age The program sets the concentration value Ci in the basic transport equation to the age of water and sets the reaction term R Ci to zero Any new water entering the system at any source is assigned an age of zero e Source Trace The program tracks the percenta
267. hapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 87 4 1 Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project This chapter describes how to start a new project as well as the files that WaterCAD creates to save your project s data At the beginning of a project you need to set some global settings In the Global Options and Project Options dialogs you can specify the unit system the friction formula s used and whether you want to use Auto Prompting In the Drawing Options you can specify settings such as the drawing scale and the size of the symbols and annotations These options can also be viewed or edited by selecting the Options menu item from the Tools pull down menu You can also access the FlexUnit dialog in order to globally specify the units and number of decimals to be displayed for each type of data File Management WaterCAD uses the WCD extension to store all model input data including element inputs alternatives and scenarios etc both for Stand Alone and AutoCAD modes When WaterCAD runs within AutoCAD two important files are used The WCD file is still used to hold all model data and a DWG file contains all of the AutoCAD entities This means that even a complete AutoCAD drawing corruption or loss will not endanger your hydraulic model data in fact you can even regenerate the AutoCAD modeling elements from the WCD file WaterCAD Backup Files When a WCD file is overwritten by a save action a backup file
268. he mask to v u the resulting annotation is 150 mm You can choose to omit the u parameter altogether and instead substitute a common symbol like inches or feet e Preview This column displays a preview of how the annotation will look when it is added to the drawing Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 189 11 2 11 2 1 Annotation Wizard Summary The last step of annotating your drawing allows you to review the choices you have made If you would like to make changes at this time simply click the Back button to step back through the wizard When you are satisfied click the Finished button to add the annotations to the drawing You can turn annotation visibility on or off by editing the Drawing Options Your annotation settings will be retained If the Drawing Options indicate that element annotations should not be displayed clicking the Finished button will automatically turn annotations on You can double click an annotation element in the drawing to edit the associated mask The Annotation Text Height can be adjusted from the Drawing Tab of the Options Dialog accessed by selecting Tools Options from the pull down menus Color Coding Color coding allows you to assign colors to elements in the drawing based on a variety of input and output attributes For any attribute you can supply a color scheme or have the application generate one for you For example you can supply a color scheme
269. he Print Preview button to preview the printed version of the contents of the pane in the Results tab Immediately after you run the calculations the Results tab is automatically displayed giving you a quick indication of whether the calculation was successful Cost Scenario Batch Run Performing a batch run allows you to set up and run cost calculations for multiple scenarios at once This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations or simply manage a group of smaller calculations as a set The list of selected scenarios for the batch run will remain with your project until you change it Using the dialog is simple First check the scenarios you want to run and click the Batch button Each scenario will be calculated You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation When the batch is completed the scenario that was current will remain current even if it was not one of the scenarios that was calculated Select a calculated scenario from the center pane of the Cost Manager dialog to view the results for that scenario You can also open the Cost Scenario Editor and select the Results tab to view a summary of the results and any errors that were generated during the calculation Notes Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 187 11 1 11 1 1 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results This chapter covers the various methods that are provided for viewing annotating graphing and repo
270. he Set Field Options dialog where you can change the display properties of the column Local vs Synchronized Units Use the Options button at the top of the Table window to access the Use Local Units menu item Click the menu item to toggle between Local Units and Synchronized Units A check mark will appear next to the Use Local Units menu item to indicate that Local Units mode is active Otherwise Synchronized Units mode is active Chapter 7 FlexTables 147 7 4 4 e Synchronized Units This is the default mode that allows the table to stay synchronized with the active project If you have one project in US Customary and one project in SI units the Table will match the units in the project that is currently open e Local Units Local Units mode allows the table to maintain its own local set of column properties units precision etc This is a powerful feature that gives you the ability to build tables that are always in a fixed unit system no matter what unit system the active project is currently using This is a useful feature for printing reports for the same project in different unit systems When the Table window is open the current unit synchronization mode is displayed in the status pane at the bottom of the window Local Units or Synchronized Units Mixing Units in a Tabular Report This software allows for duplicate columns in a table thus giving you the ability to display an attribute in two diffe
271. he junction table from the list and click Edit again 17 In Row 5 of the Field Links table link WaterCAD s Pressure to the Database s Pressure The Unit should be set to kPa Click OK and OK again to get back to the Database Connection Manager Click the Synchronize Out button to send the information back to the spreadsheet Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 81 3 7 3 Table Link x Database T yelExel50 O Database File d haestad wtrc lessons lesson7 xls E Database Table Junction tsti lt ts siYS Table T ype Pressue Junction i Key Label Field flat o m Field Links ve f a ak Km Po eh rm i Blea feam pe Denard in Epee fpe ETS ey 7 Insert Duplicate Delete danu Select cmo eo 18 Finally if you reopen the Lesson7 xls file in Excel you will see that the pressure values have now been added Part 3 Converting CAD Drawing Entities The Polyline to Pipe tool enables you to take existing CAD entities and use them to quickly construct a water distribution network Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe Line and Block entities can be converted as well Polylines and Lines can be converted to pipes Blocks can be converted to any available node type Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error prone process Difficulties can arise due to the fact that a drawing may appear to be
272. he junction to meet fire flow demands This value will be added to or replace the junction s baseline demand depending on the default setting for applying fire flows as specified in the Fire Flow Alternative dialog Fire Flow Upper Limit Similar to the Target fire flow described above this defines the maximum allowable fire flow that a junction can provide and the maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at any single withdrawal location This is a user specified practical limit that will prevent this program from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains which have a large diameter and high service pressures Remember that a system s ability to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of the hydrant opening and service line as well as the number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a specific location Residual Pressure Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure Minimum Zone Pressure Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within the Zone you are testing The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure Each junction has a zone associated with it which can be located in the junction s input data If you do not want a junction n
273. he loop and path methods fail in these situations e The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a working system of equations Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm Given a network defined by N unknown head nodes P links of unknown flow and B boundary or fixed head nodes the network topology can be expressed in two incidence matrices ee T Aja A P x N Unknown head nodes incidence matrix and A10 Agi ari 10 01 P x B Fixed head nodes incidence matrix The following convention is used to assign matrix values A12 i j 1 0 or 1 if flow of pipe i enters is not connected or leaves node j respectively Assigned nodal demands are given by a q 41 92 4n 1 x N nodal demand vector 270 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory Assigned boundary nodal heads are given by Tr nh Sl Abe 1 x B fixed nodal head vector The headloss or gain transform is expressed in the matrix Fl Q fy fo fp 1 x P non linear laws expressing headlosses in links These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to compute the final steady state network represented by the matrix quantities for unknown flow and unknown nodal head Unknown link flow quantities are defined by QT Q Qo Qp 1 x P unknown link flow rate vector
274. he pipes have bends and curves in them Since you have topographic 72 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 7 2 information stored in the Shapefile these bends can be imported Because we created a scaled drawing the pipe lengths will be read from the layout 12 Notice also that the default Scenario Base is currently displayed as the current Scenario Whenever data is brought in through a database or Shapefile connection it is automatically written into the Alternatives referenced by the current Scenario Similarly whenever data is exported the data associated with the current Scenario will be used 13 To run the model click the GO button in the toolbar and then click GO in the dialog Now that you have calculated data you could export the new data to your GIS database by going into the database and creating a new label for it In Part 2 of this lesson we will use an almost identical procedure to export pressures using database connections 14 When you are finished close the Scenario Editor Proceed to Part 2 of this lesson or save your file as MyLesson7 and exit WaterCAD Part 2 Importing Data from a Database This portion of the lesson will take you through the steps to set up a connection to a database in order to create a new water distribution network from existing data The necessary data has been included as a Microsoft Excel 5 0 spreadsheet If you do not have software that can read this file type you will s
275. he topics describing each tab Tank Editor Tanks are a type of storage node The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation Tanks can have either a circular or non circular cross section WaterCAD allows you to define tanks with either fixed or variable sections For steady state simulations a tank is considered to have a constant water surface elevation similar to a reservoir The tank editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs e General General tank information including geographical data and hydraulic results e Section Data defining the geometric characteristics of the tank and its operating level range e Quality Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog e Cost Cost Analysis input output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations e User Data Additional data as defined by the user New fields can be added such as the tank installation date or the tank condition e Messages Calculation messages such as warnings or error messages and user defined notes and descriptions For more information on the data refer to the topics describing each tab Reservoir Editor A reservoir is a type of storage node The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an e
276. hese ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations such as the label coordinates and elevation The fields in the text file are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 253 A 1 7 A 2 A 2 1 Importing Database and Shapefile data created with WaterCAD v3 As a result of overwhelming user feedback as well as through a review of common technical support questions Haestad Methods has decided to make a fundamental change in the way pump valve connectivity is modeled These elements are now handled as nodes whereas they were previously represented as links in database and GIS connections prior to the release of WaterCAD v4 Unfortunately this change will impact existing users who have built database connections using WaterCAD Version 3 5 and earlier However a survey of our customers has shown that nodes are the natural and preferred way to represent a pump or valve in a database The change is driven by the desire to improve and enhance the mapping of these elements onto GIS and enterprise data Haestad Methods has invested significant effort to separate the model representation of pumps and valves from the user view of these elements Specific changes are as follows e Pumps and valves were formerly to be represented in the model as links with To and From Node attributes Now pumps and valves are represented as nodes with To and Fr
277. hree types constant horsepower three point and multi point up to eleven points In WaterCAD v4 three point pump curves are still fully supported as are multi point pump curves In fact there is no limit to the number of points you can enter to approximate the pump s exponential curve Although we continue to discourage the use of constant horsepower pumps for many of the same reasons we discouraged the use of Maintain Always setting for valves this type of pump is still available in WaterCAD v4 However do not use one unless you have actually looked at a constant horsepower curve It only resembles the shape of a typical pump curve over a very short range near the best efficiency point and diverges from this curve rapidly as the curve becomes asymptotic to both the head and discharge axes If you are performing a preliminary design or if you have another purpose that requires you to estimate pump characteristics based on insufficient data consider using a one point pump curve This allows you to enter the design point and approximate a curve based on a typical pump curve Of course nothing beats having actual pump test data so you can generate a truly accurate representation of your pump and subsequently an accurate representation of the remainder of your system Conclusion WaterCAD v4 has many more features and enhancements found in every dialog and button The following are a two very important points that we would like to e
278. hree types of water quality analyses Age Determine how long the water has been in the system Constituent Determine the concentration of a constituent at all nodes and links in the system Trace Determine the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the system The source is designated as a specific node e Fire Flow Analysis This check box configures WaterCAD to analyze the system for available fire flow Water quality calculations are time variable in nature and therefore are only available when the calculation is configured for extended period analysis Be sure that the Extended Period Analysis radio button in the Hydraulic Analysis portion of the Calculation dialog is selected Fire Flow calculations are based on a steady state calculation Therefore if the calculation is configured to perform an Extended Period Analysis the Fire Flow Analysis check box is disabled Be sure that the Steady State Analysis radio button in the Hydraulic Analysis portion of the dialog is selected Use the Scenario Manager to set up and manage multiple water quality data sets Use the Alternative Manager to set up and maintain multiple Fire Flow data sets These optional analyses are specified in the Analysis section in the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor which can be accessed from the Analysis Scenarios menu item Calibration Calibration is an important part of the develo
279. icate and click the Duplicate button e To delete an existing control Select the description of the control you wish to delete and click the Delete button 126 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors Pipes with check valves cannot have controls Control Dialog Several types of information are required to define a control for a pressure pipe pump or valve This data is grouped into the following sections e Preview Textual description of the control being edited e Control Specify the type of control either Status or Setting e Control Condition Specify whether the control is based on a time condition or a nodal condition and then specify the control setting Control Preview The control preview provides a textual description of the control being edited The control preview is continuously updated while you edit a control providing constant feedback as to the state of your control Control This software supports two types of controls e Status Controls the Open Closed pipes inactive closed valves or On Off pumps status e Setting Controls the relative speed factor of a pump and the parameters for a valve Only status controls are available for pipes Setting controls are not appropriate When pumps are turned on by a control their relative speed factor is set to 1 00 To activate a closed or inactive valve use a setting control Similarly to turn a pump on
280. ick the Next button 5 Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent link between the Shapefile s you are importing and the model If you choose to create a Shapefile Connection enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connection Click the Finished button to import the Shapefiles 226 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 13 2 5 Export Shapefile Wizard This program has the capability of exporting network elements in the ESRI Shapefile Format The ESRI Shapefile is actually three files that together define the spatial and non spatial attributes of a map feature In the case of Haestad Methods hydraulic models map features are network elements e g pipes junctions Exporting Shapefiles creates brand new files If you are exporting a Shapefile to a directory that already contains a Shapefile of the same name the existing Shapefile will be completely overwritten If you wish to update the Shapefile rather than overwriting it use the Shapefile Connection feature The major components of the Wizard are as follows e Select Element Types Choose the type of network elements you wish to export Each type of network element will have its own Shapefile associated with it This component is identical to the Import Wizard s Select Element Types component e Export Shapefile Link Editor Enter a name for each Shapefile you wish to create Each Shapefile name must be no more than eight characters
281. ield is for selecting the attribute of which your unit costs are a function For example the unit cost of a pipe might be based upon its diameter or its material Remember that attributes that are not numeric can only be selected if the unit cost function type is tabular Tabular Unit Cost Function For Unit Cost Functions defined with tabular data this tab contains the data for this unit cost function grouped as follows e General General information identifying the unit cost function e Attribute Value Range Display the range of the selected attribute in the current scenario This information can be useful to make sure you specify cost data for the entire range of values in your model e Unit Cost Data Specify the tabular data relating unit cost to the value of the selected attribute In order to help you enter and visualize the function use one of the buttons at the bottom of the dialog e Plot Plot the tabular data relating cost to the value of the selected attribute e Initialize Range Initialize the minimum and maximum values in the Attribute Value Range section based on all the elements present in your project for the current scenario Chapter 10 Cost Estimating 183 range for some elements in your network the unit cost used will be the cost of the minimum or maximum value of the attribute you defined in the table 3 If the attribute you have selected to define the cost unit function for is out
282. ient in the Darcy Weisbach Friction Method Input Modes WaterCAD supports several input modes to adjust data entry to your style or the needs of a particular project e Coordinates Coordinates can be displayed either in X and Y format or as Northing and Easting Whichever coordinate input mode is chosen will be active everywhere within the program element editors FlexTables etc Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 93 4 3 3 e Settings This drop down list allows you to set whether values on control conditions will be input in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure Note that regardless of the mode you choose the program will always display values in both hydraulic grade and pressure e Tank Levels This drop down list allows you to set whether tank operating ranges will be input in terms of elevations height above a datum elevation of 0 or levels height above the wet well s base elevation Pipe Length Rounding Pipe length rounding is used to determine the level of precision desired for scaled pipe lengths Pipe lengths will automatically be rounded according to the pipe length rounding value For example consider a pipe with an actual scaled length of 35 8 meters If the pipe length rounding value is 1 0 meters the program will assume the pipe length to be 36 0 meters This only affects the value as it appears in elemental editors FlexTables and so on The actual length of the pipe f
283. iew contours oY Relabel Elements Open the Relabel Elements dialog which enables you to renumber some or all of your project elements Toolbar Button Toolbar Button Element Labeling Set the format for the labels applied to elements as they are added to the drawing Prototypes Specify the default values for new network elements Engineering Libraries Declare the paths to and edit the libraries used in this project User Data Extension Open the User Data Extension dialog where you can add and define custom data fields For instance you can add new fields such as the pipe installation date FlexUnits Open the FlexUnits dialog where you can control units and display precision for any parameter Note that you can also change the unit and display precision of variables from several other areas within the program 22 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 2 2 6 2 2 7 e Layout Select Activate the selection tool used to highlight elements Once elements are selected they may be moved or edited Toolbar Button ih e Layout Element Type Activate the corresponding element tool to place elements in the graphical editor Tool Palette BS Q Xi e Layout Spot Elevation Activate the spot elevation tool used to add spot elevations 10 0 Toolbar Button e Layout Graphic Annotation Stand Alone mode only Activate various annotation tools which enable you to add lines borders
284. ifferent EPS pattern The multipliers defined in the pattern will be applied against the baseline load The Demand dialog has the following command buttons e Insert Insert a row in the table e Duplicate Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected row e Delete Delete the selected row of the table The selected demand or inflow is removed from the list e Graph Generate a graph of the total demand over time at this junction 6 2 3 Section Tab Tank section data includes the information necessary to describe the storage characteristics of the tank They have been factored into the following logical groups e Section The type of cross section and the basic storage parameters e Operating Range The minimum initial and maximum operating elevations e Cross Section Parameters describing the cross sectional geometry Tank Section The general information for tank section consists of the following e Section Choose the type of cross section for this storage tank There are two types of cross sections to choose from Constant Area and Variable Area e Inactive Volume Enter the inactive volume for this storage tank This data is used when performing water quality analysis e Total Active Volume If this storage tank is a Constant Area Tank the total active volume will be computed from the other tank data and this field will not be editable If this is a Variable Area Tank then
285. igure in the drawing pane is not physically adjusted to force the pipe to a rounded length A change to the pipe rounding length is not retroactive Therefore it will not affect existing pipes unless the user defined length is toggled on and then off again Drawing Options The Drawing Options dialog allows you to specify information regarding the graphical display of elements in the drawing pane including e Drawing Scale e Annotation Multipliers e Pipe Text e Background Drawing e Symbol Visibility To access the Drawing Options tab select Tools Options from the pull down menus Drawing Scale You can set the scale that you want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan view output Drawing scale is determined based upon engineering judgement and the destination sheet sizes to be used in the final presentations You may choose either Schematic mode or Scaled mode to define the horizontal and vertical distance scales e Schematic Pipe lengths are not automatically initialized from their lengths in the drawing pane but must be manually entered for each pipe e Scaled Pipe lengths are determined from the lengths of the pipe elements in the drawing pane HOR Horizontal scale controls the scale of the plan view VER Vertical scale controls the default elevation scale for use in profiles for example 94 Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project Scaled and schematic mode can be set o
286. ike x except for y Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition we can simply create a child from x and change y appropriately Now we have both conditions with no duplicated effort We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows inherited values are shown as gray text local values are shown as black text Salad Alternative Attribute Attribute Hierarchy Vegetables Dressing Salad 1 Lettuce amp Carrots No Dressing F Salad 2 Thousand Island Salad 3 Blue Cheese e Salad 2 is just like Salad 1 except for the dressing e Salad 3 is just like Salad 1 except for the dressing Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2 if we prefer Salad 3 is just like Salad 2 except for the dressing Entree Alternative Attribute Attribute Attribute Hierarchy Meat Starch Vegetable Entree 1 Beef Baked Potato Green Beans L Entree 2 Chicken Rice L Entree 3 Fish e Entr e 2 is just like Entr e 1 except for the meat and the starch e Entr e 3 is just like Entr e 2 except for the meat be updated and the other entr es will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of If the vegetable of the day changes say from green beans to peas only Entr e 1 needs to Peas instead of Green Beans 300 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide C 12 C 13 Dessert Alternative Attribute Attribute Hierarchy Bakery It
287. ile Data In this part of the lesson you will import ESRI Shapefiles to construct the distribution network in WaterCAD from existing GIS data If you have ArcView ArcInfo or other application that can open a Shapefile then you can if you choose view the files externally prior to importing them However you will still be able to perform the workshop problem even if you don t have one of these applications This lesson uses the network from Lesson 6 66 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Q ArcView GIS Version 3 1 i x Eile Edit Yiew Theme Graphics Window Help 4 ALK IIR HH se WER v Tank shp k v Reservoishp Ld ii Pump shp e i Prv shp v Prespipe shp A Presjunc shp The ESRI Shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the spatial and non spatial attributes of a map feature The three required files are as follows e Main File The main file is a binary file with an extension of SHP It contains the spatial attributes associated with the map features For example a polyline record contains a series of points and a point record contains x and y coordinates e Index File The index file is a binary file with an extension of SHX It contains the byte position of each record in the main file e Database File The database file is a dBase III file with an extension of DBF It contains the non spatial data associated with the map features All thre
288. ill pop up with a list of available element types 3 Select an element type from the context menu J The cursor appearance will change to reflect the type of node to be inserted 5 1 4 Morphing Elements Occasionally you may find that you need to replace a node with a different type of node You can change the element s type without deleting it through a process called morphing Morphing enables you to change the type of an existing network node without having to delete and re create the node and all of its connecting links Information that is common between the existing and new element will be copied into the new element To morph an existing element into a different type of element 1 From the Tool Palette select the new element type Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 101 2 Inthe drawing pane place the cursor over the old element and click 3 You will be prompted to verify that you want to morph the old element simply as a security measure to ensure that an element is not accidentally morphed In the event that you do accidentally morph an element this action can be undone Splitting Pipes You may encounter a situation where you need to add a new node in the middle of an existing pipe For example you may need to insert a new inlet to capture excessive surface flow in StormCAD or a new manhole in SewerCAD You can split existing pipes simply by inserting a node along the pipe 1 From the Tool Palette
289. ime when you edit the properties later You can configure the element prototypes at the beginning of a new project during the Project Setup Wizard You can also select Tools Prototypes to edit the prototypes for the project at any time Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 133 6 4 B 6 4 1 User Data Extension The User Data Extension feature allows you to add your own data fields to the project For instance you could add a field for keeping track of the date of installation for an element or the type of area serviced by a particular element User Data Extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the data used in and produced by the model calculations This means that User Data Extensions can be imported or exported through database and Shapefile connections viewed edited in FlexTables included in tabular reports or element detailed reports annotated in the drawing color coded reported in the detailed element reports and accessed on the User Data tab of each Element Editor dialog None of the user data affects the hydraulic model calculations However their behavior concerning capabilities like editing annotating sorting and database connections is identical to any of the other standard attributes User Data Extension Dialog The User Data Extension dialog holds a summary of the user data extensions currently defined in the project In this dialog there is a tab for each type of elemen
290. imply archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model You must also preserve the associated WCD file Since the WCD file can be run and modified separately from the DWG file using Stand Alone mode it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync Should you ever modify the model in Stand Alone mode and then later load the AutoCAD DWG file the WaterCAD program will compare file dates and automatically invoke its built in AutoCAD Synchronization routine Drawing Synchronization Whenever you open a WaterCAD based drawing file in AutoCAD the WaterCAD model server will start The first thing that the application will do is load the associated WaterCAD database WCD file If the time stamps of the drawing and database file are different WaterCAD will automatically invoke its synchronization check This protects against corruption that might otherwise occur from separately editing the WaterCAD database file in Stand Alone mode or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the WaterCAD application is not loaded The synchronization check will occur in two stages e First WaterCAD will iterate across all the drawing model elements and compare their state with that held in the server model Any differences it discovers will be listed WaterCAD enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing state If model elements have been deleted or added in the WCD file during a stand alone s
291. imum and Maximum Allowable Values 96 Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 44 2 44 3 4 4 4 B Some attributes do not have theoretical minimum or maximum values and others may have an acceptable range governed by calculation restrictions or physical impossibilities For these attributes minimum and maximum allowable values may not be applicable You can see the results of your changes in the preview at the top of the dialog Units Units are the method of measurement displayed for the attribute To change units click the drop down list then click the desired unit The list is not limited to SI or US customary units allowing you to mix unit system within the same project Note that FlexUnits are intelligent the units actually have meaning When you change units the displayed value is converted to the new unit so the underlying magnitude of the attribute remains the same For example a length of 100 0 feet is not converted to a length of 100 0 m or 100 0 in It is correctly converted to 30 49 m or 1200 0 Display Precision The precision setting can be used to control the number of digits displayed after the decimal point or the rounding of numbers Number of Digits Displayed After Decimal Point Enter 0 or a positive number to specify the number of digits after the decimal point For example if the display precision is set to 3 then a value of 123 456789 would display as 123 457 This works the same
292. in Window 21 2 2 5 Toolbars Analysis Toolbar Toggle the display of the Analysis toolbar which includes the scenario selection list and buttons to access the Scenario Manager and Cost Manager Status Pane Toggle the display of information at the bottom of the window regarding your current project Background Toggle the visibility of the project s DXF background Note that if there is no DXF background specified for the current project this menu item will be disabled In AutoCAD mode refer to the AutoCAD on line help Tools Menu The Tools menu provides general tools for placing or modifying graphical elements annotating color coding contouring changing the projects options etc Selection Sets Access the Selection Set dialog which allows you to create selection sets of elements based on element labels element types filters and other means Color Coding Open the Color Coding dialog which allows you to control the display of elements based on value ranges such as pipe diameter hydraulic grade and so forth Toolbar Button Element Annotation Access the Element Annotation dialog which allows you to display element attribute labeling such as pipe diameter and pipe flow Toolbar Button Profiling Open the Profile Setup dialog which allows you to generate a profile of your piping system along a specified path SS Contouring Access the Contour Map Manager to create and v
293. increase the graphical display size of your symbols e Text Height The text height multiplier increases or decreases the default size of the labeling text associated with element labeling by the factor indicated The program automatically selects a default text height that displays at approximately 2 5 mm 0 1 in high at the user defined drawing scale A scale of 1 0 mm 0 5 m for example would result in a text height of approximately 1 25 m Likewise a in 40 ft scale equates to a text height of around 4 0 ft e Annotation Height The annotation height multiplier increases or decreases the default size of the element annotation by the factor indicated The program automatically selects a default text height that displays at approximately 2 5 mm 0 1 in high at the user defined drawing scale A scale of 1 0 mm 0 5 m for example would result in a text height to scale of approximately 1 25 m Likewise a 1 in 40 ft scale equates to a text height of around 4 0 ft Pipe Text The Align Text with Pipes toggle lets you specify whether you want the pipe labeling and annotations to be parallel to the pipe or horizontal Background Drawing In Stand Alone mode a DXF file may be used as a background image for the drawing pane e Show Background If the background DXF file is turned off it will not be read from a disk or displayed in the drawing pane If the background is not turned off it will be read from a disk and displaye
294. indow This allows you to display the differences in the values calculated for each scenario on the model map as annotations 11 7 1 Annotation Comparison Wizard The Annotation Comparison Wizard is used to create a drawing that contains text elements displaying the differences between specific attributes of two scenarios The Annotation Comparison Wizard is identical to the Annotation Wizard except it has one additional step This step involves selecting the two scenarios you wish to compare e Scenario 1 Choose the baseline scenario Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 199 11 7 2 e Scenario 2 Choose the scenario you wish to compare to Scenario 1 The value in Scenario 1 is substracted from the value of Scenario 2 and the difference is displayed Therefore if any specified attribute s value is greater in Scenario 2 than it is in Scenario 1 the difference is displayed as a positive number If the value is smaller in Scenario 2 than in Scenario 1 it is displayed as a negative number For example suppose your model contains two scenarios One is named 2002 Conditions and the other is named 2010 Conditions To create a drawing that displays the difference in velocity in a pipe between the 2002 scenario and the 2010 scenario you would use the Annotation Comparison Wizard You could choose the 2002 scenario as Scenario 1 and the 2010 scenario as Scenario 2 You would then complete the rest of the steps in the wizard The
295. ing and pressures and flow rates changing throughout the system in response to varying demand conditions and automatic control strategies formulated by the modeler While a steady state model may tell whether or not the system has the capability to meet a certain average demand an extended period simulation indicates whether or not the system has the ability to provide acceptable levels of service over a period of minutes hours or days Extended period simulations can also be used for energy consumption and cost studies as well as water quality modeling Data requirements for extended period simulations are greater than for steady state runs In addition to the information required by a steady state model you also need to determine water usage patterns more detailed tank information and operational rules for pumps and valves The following additional information is required only when performing Extended Period Simulation and therefore is not enabled when Steady State Analysis has been specified e Start Time The start time format is military time so 0 00 hr is midnight and 24 00 hr is midnight of the following day This very powerful feature allows you to run an extended period analysis for any period of the day without redefining any time dependent input data such as patterns e Duration The duration can be any positive real number e Hydraulic Time Step Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this calcula
296. ing Capabilities An individual Junction can support multiple hydraulic demands Furthermore each demand can be assigned any hydraulic demand pattern This powerful functionality makes it easy to combine two or more types of demand patterns such as residential and institutional at a single junction Use the Report button to view or print a graph or detailed report of your pattern To access the Pattern editor click the Add or Edit button on the Pattern Manager dialog Chapter 10 Cost Estimating 179 Chapter 10 Cost Estimating This feature allows you to calculate a planning level estimate of the capital cost associated with an entire system or any portion of a system This makes it easy to compare the costs associated with the various scenarios thus helping to ensure that the most cost effective design is chosen The costs associated with a particular element are broken down into two categories fixed costs and unit costs The total cost for each element is calculated as the unit cost times the number of units plus the total of the itemized fixed costs associated with the element For pipes the unit costss are specified in terms of a cost per unit of length and for nodal elements the unit cost is specified in terms of a cost per element The total cost for the elements in the system is then simply the sum of the total cost for each element selected to be included in the cost analysis The unit costs for an eleme
297. ing Range Section 124 Operational Alternative 155 Options 26 Calculation 174 Drawing 93 Global 90 Graph 201 202 203 Project 88 92 Organize Data 149 Outflow 314 Output 187 QuickView 110 111 Tables 139 P Parallel Pipes 255 Parallel Pumps 255 Paste Special 18 Pattern 176 Demand Multipliers 177 Pattern 177 178 Extended Period Analysis 168 177 Manager 176 Pattern Editor 177 Pattern Graph 193 Time Steps 177 Percent Full 316 Performing a Steady State Analysis 37 Performing a Trace Analysis 64 Phone Number 8 Physical Properties 152 Pipe 112 Adding Vertices 262 Align Text with Pipe 94 Fittings 207 Length Rounding 92 93 Parallel 255 Splitting 101 Text 94 Tool 22 100 Pipe Layout Using Entity 244 Pipe Status 316 Plan View Reports 192 Plot Window 201 Polygon Enclosed Area 103 Polyline 316 Conversion Problem 234 Enclosed Area 103 Polyline to Pipe Conversion 231 Wizard 232 PondPack 306 Power 120 316 Precision Display 96 97 Predefined Reports 190 Preferences 90 Pressure 316 Head 267 Mode 92 Pressure Breaker Valve 275 Pressure Setting 316 Pressure Sustaining Valve 275 Pressurized Tank 254 Preview 201 Print 15 17 26 Preview 26 Preview Window 201 Setup 15 Table 148 326 Index Print Preview 17 Problem Solving 247 Problems with Setup or Uninstall 4 Profile 22 1
298. ing the results corresponding to the highlighted scenario in the scenario tree view It can also be accessed for the currently active scenario by clicking on the GO button which opens the Scenario Editor Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 193 11 3 10 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 4 4 11 4 5 Contour Plan View A preview of the Contour Plan View Report showing all countours as displayed in the Contour Plot window can be obtained by clicking on the Print Preview button in the Contour Plot window Graphs Pump Curve To generate a pump curve open the Pump Editor for the pump of interest click the Report button and choose the Pump Curve menu item Tank Storage Curve To generate a plot of the tank storage volume versus the elevation open the Tank Editor for the tank of interest click the Report button and choose the Tank Curve menu item Junction Demand Graph To generate a graph of the total demand at a junction over time open the Junction Editor for the junction of interest select the Demand tab and click the Graph button Pattern Graph and Report You can generate a graph or a full report of a pattern representing the multiplier variable of the pattern over time To do so open the Hydraulic or Constituent Pattern Manager dialog to access the pattern for which you would like to generate output From the Pattern Editor dialog click the Report button and select Graph or Detailed Report Plotti
299. inherits from the selected alternative This allows you to automatically share the majority of the records from a parent alternative while modifying only selected records in the child alternative Edit Open the tabular record editor for the selected alternative This tabular record contains all the values that are used by the selected alternative Merge Move all records from the selected child alternative into its parent alternative and then remove the selected alternative The records in the selected alternative will replace the corresponding records in the parent This is helpful when you have been experimenting with changes in a child alternative and you want to permanently apply those changes to the parent alternative All other alternatives that inherit data from that parent alternative will reflect these changes Rename Rename an existing alternative This invokes an in place editor in the tree view of the available alternatives Make the desired changes to the existing name and press the Enter key Duplicate Create a new alternative filled with records copied from the selected alternative Use this if you wish to copy the data from an alternative but not create a child The two alternatives will be independent Delete Remove the selected alternative and its records Deleting an alternative will also delete all of the input data associated with that alternative Report Generate a Print Preview of a summary report
300. int Point at which the pump will have zero discharge It is typically the maximum head point on a pump curve e Design Point Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate It is typically the best efficiency point BEP of the pump At discharges above or below this point the pump is not operating under optimum conditions e Maximum Operating Point Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to run At discharges above this point the pump may behave unpredictably or its performance may decline rapidly e Maximum Extended Point Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate adding zero head to the system This value may be computed by the program or entered as a custom extended point Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 121 All defined pump curve points have an associated head and discharge Initial Setting Section The initial conditions for a pump describe the pump s behavior at the start of the analysis These conditions include e Status One of two available status conditions On normal operation Off no flow under any condition e Relative Speed Factor Characteristics of the pump relative to the speed for which the pump curve was entered in accordance with the affinity laws A speed factor of 1 00 would indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump curve In Steady State Analysis mode in WaterCAD th
301. ints is false 3 Check the Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure If it is lower than the Minimum Zone Pressure Constraint the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied Therefore Needed Fire Flow Constraints is false If you are not concerned about the pressure of a node that is NOT meeting the Minimum Zone Pressure constraint move this node to another zone Now the node will not be analyzed as part of the same zone 4 If you checked the box for Minimum System Pressure Constraint in the Fire Flow Alternative dialog check to see if the Calculated Minimum System Pressure is lower than the set constraint If it is Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints will be False Water Quality Analysis Age Analysis An age analysis determines how long the water has been in the system and is more of a general water quality indicator than a measurement of any specific quality To configure for an age analysis 1 Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button 2 Activate the Extended Period radio button 3 Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis 4 Select the Age radio button 5 Assuming you have not already set up an Age alternative for this scenario including defining the trace node go to the Alternatives tab click the ellipsis or New button next to the Age scroll down list and add or edit an Age alternative Back in the Alternatives tab choose the desired alternative from the Age Alternative choice list
302. io Manager and return to the drawing pane To open a tabular report select the Tables option from the Report pull down menu or click the Tabular Report E button on the toolbar Select the Pipe Report from the list and click OK Wi WaterCAD Table Pipe Report iof x re Ba co Pe vont Tea Q He Time 000 E Increment 7 00 hr Scenatia 5 yr old D I P Jal Label BE Hazen Check Minor Control Discharge Upstream Structure Dow a vane Valve Loss Status l min Br Grade Coefficient f s oee rao o Ductile Iron 120 0 0 00 150 Ductile Iron 120 0 P 4 150 PVC 150 0 Fs E aiue Ps 150 Ductile Iron 120 0 0 00 o E af aouen raoa om es 113 50 200 Ductile lon 120 0 0 00 P10 57 50 150 Ductielon 120 0 0 00 v 4 2 10 of 10 elements displayed Synchronized Units Click the Scenario list box and select the new Scenario from the list Right click on the Material column and choose Filter Quick Filter from the pop up menu You want to display only ductile iron pipes in the table To do so set the Column field to Material set the Operator to and set the Value field to Ductile Iron Click OK Now you will use the Global Edit tool to modify all of the roughness values in the table Right click on the Hazen Williams C column and select Global Edit Select Set from the Operation list and enter 120 into the Global Edit box Click OK All of the v
303. ion such as pipe data pump data loading and infiltration Conveyance element choices include circular pipes pipe arches boxes and more SewerCAD s flexible load model allows you to analyze dry and wet weather loads separately Unit dry loads and peaking factor methods are entirely customizable The gravity network is solved using the built in numerical model which utilizes both the direct step and standard step gradually varied flow methods Flow calculations are valid for both pressure and varied flow situations and will solve for hydraulic jumps backwater and drawdown curves SewerCAD s flexible reporting feature allows you to customize and print the model results in any type of report including plan and profile views for analysis construction documents or agency review D 3 StormCAD StormCAD allows you to efficiently design and analyze storm sewer systems Layout tools allow you to construct a graphical representation of a pipe network containing all of your information including pipe data inlet characteristics watershed areas and rainfall data StormCAD provides a choice of conveyance elements including circular pipes pipe arches boxes and more Inlets are designed and computed using the new FHWA HEC 22 methodology Junction hydraulic losses may be calculated automatically using the AASHTO or HEC 22 methodology based on the geometry of the junction Rainfall information is defined using Intensity Duration Frequency IDF in
304. ions Patterns allow you to apply automatic time variable changes within the system The most common application of patterns is for residential or industrial demands Diurnal curves are patterns which relate to the changes in demand over the course of the day reflecting times when people are using more or less water than average Most patterns are based on a multiplication factor versus time relationship whereby a multiplication factor of one represents the base value which is often the average value Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below we see that there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare breakfast another slight 176 Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities peak around noon and a third peak in the evening as people arrive home from work and prepare dinner Throughout the night the pattern reflects the relative inactivity of the system with very low flows compared to the average Typical Diurnal Curve AN Continuous 2 0 MULTIPLICATION FACTOR 6 12 18 24 TIME OF DAY HOURS This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as representative of any particular network There are two basic forms for representing a pattern stepwise and continuous A stepwise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over time then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next jump A continuous pattern is one
305. ipe diameter e Unit Cost Display the Unit Cost for this pipe calculated by using the selected Unit Cost Function assuming you selected one e Additional Unit Cost Define or add a unit cost specific to this pipe Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 131 6 2 8 Pressure Pipe Total Costs Section This section reports the calculated costs associated with this pipe as follows e Total Fixed Cost Cost of this pipe resulting from any fixed cost as defined in the Fixed Cost section of this tab e Extended Cost Cost of this pipe resulting from the unit cost function as defined in the Unit Cost section of this tab e Additional Cost Cost of this pipe resulting from any additional unit cost as defined in the Unit Cost section of this tab e Total Cost Sum of the Extended Cost Additional Cost and Total Fixed Cost described above Nodal Element Cost Tab This tab allows you to specify the costs associated with a nodal structure expressed as fixed costs It is divided into the following sections e Fixed Cost Specify the fixed costs of the element e Total Fixed Cost Displays the calculated total cost of the element You can specify if the total cost of the node is to be included in the Total System Cost Tabular Report by checking the Include Element in Cost Calculation Nodal Element Fixed Cost Table This table allows you to define any cost associated with a nodal structure junction
306. is change Global Edit is available only for editable columns Global Edit is not available in two row tables in SewerCAD or StormCAD You can use Global Edit in conjunction with Filtering to globally edit a subset of elements Sorting Filtering Tables Sorting Tables Tables can be sorted based on a single column multiple columns or network order Custom Sort You can sort elements in the table based on one or more columns in ascending or descending order For example the following table is given Slope ft ft Depth ft Discharge cfs 0 001 1 4 11 0 002 1 5 81 0 003 1 7 12 0 001 2 13 43 0 002 2 19 00 0 003 2 23 27 Chapter 7 FlexTables 145 7 4 3 A custom sort is set up to sort first by Slope then by Depth in ascending order The resulting table would appear in the following order Slope ft ft Depth ft Discharge cfs 0 001 1 4 11 0 001 2 13 43 0 002 1 5 81 0 002 2 19 00 0 003 1 7 12 0 003 2 23 27 Filtering Tables To access the filtering operations use the Options button at the top of the Table window in the case of a FlexTable or right click the column header by which you wish to filter Filters allow you to change the table so that only rows that match the specified criteria will appear e Quick Filter Quickly set up a simple filter by right clicking the column by which you wish to filter e Custom Filter Set up a custo
307. isappear e Change Widths Use this command to change pipe widths After choosing this command select a pipe or group of pipes and enter the desired width Note that the width entered is equivalent to the AutoCAD polyline width 242 Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 15 5 Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands 15 5 1 WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities The primary AutoCAD based WaterCAD element entities pipes tanks reservoirs pumps and valves are all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects Thus they are vested with a specialized model awareness that ensures that any editing actions you perform will result in an appropriate update of the model database This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands as you normally would and the model database will be updated automatically to reflect these changes It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state Therefore if you delete a nodal element such as a junction its connecting pipes will also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes Using ObjectARX enables the implementation of highly specialized editing actions that are not available with standard AutoCAD entities Two examples of this specialized behavior are element morphs and pipe splits Again these modifications will trigger an automatic update of the model network topology and associated element properties
308. ish e Base Select a scenario on which to base the new scenario e Calculation Choose the type of calculation Steady State or Extended Period that you would like to perform as well as other calculation options e Alternatives Specify the alternative types with which you would like to work e New Existing Create and or Select alternatives for your new scenario e Preview Preview the scenario and create it when satisfied To access the Scenario Wizard open the Scenario Manager and click the Scenario Wizard button Scenario Wizard Step 1 Here you can enter a unique name and an optional note for the new scenario that you are creating The name field allows you to input a distinguishing name for this scenario A default name is provided but we recommend that you change it to something more descriptive If the new scenario will be based on another scenario you may want a name that indicates what will be different about the new scenario For example Post Development The next field is optional and allows you to input free form text that will be associated with the new scenario Use it to make detailed notes about the conditions the scenario will model Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 163 Scenario Wizard Step 2 Click the existing scenario on which you would like to base your new scenario Your new child scenario wi
309. ison button in the Scenario Manager and then completing the Annotation Comparison Wizard 11 8 Graphic Annotation In Stand Alone mode several Graphic Annotation tools are provided for enhancing the appearance of your drawing Graphic annotations can be manipulated like any other element in the Graphical Editor You can add move and delete them just as you would network elements To add graphic annotation to your drawing use the Tools Layout Graphic Annotation and Tools Layout Legend menu item or use the tool palette located along the left side of the main window The available tools are e Line Tool Add polylines or polygons for things like drawing roads or outlining catchments e Border Tool Add rectangles to your drawing for creating borders e Text Tool Add text to your drawing for adding things like explanatory notes or a title to the drawing e Legend Tool Add a link or node color coding legend to your drawing ae The program will calculate the area of a closed polyline Right click the polyline of Y which you wish to determine the area and select Enclosed Area next to the menu item to indicate that the polyline is closed To open or close a polyline right click the polyline and select Close A check will appear To add bends or vertices to a polyline right click the polyline at the location you would like to add a bend and select Bend Add Bend To remove bends or vertices from a polyline select the polylin
310. it Lesson 5 Automated Fire Flow Analysis One of the primary goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate capacity to fight fires WaterCAD s automated fire flow analysis can be used to determine if the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining minimum pressure constraints Fire flows can be computed for all nodes in the system or you can create a selection set consisting of specific nodes where you wish to test available flow Fire flows are computed by iteratively assigning demands and computing system pressures The model assigns the fire flow demand to a node and checks the model checking to see if all pressure constraints are met at that demand It will assign a new demand and automatically re check the system pressures if a constraint is violated Iterations continue until the constraints are met or until the maximum number of iterations is reached The purpose of this example is to walk you through the steps to create calculate and analyze a fire flow scenario This lesson again uses the distribution system from the previous lessons 58 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 5 1 Part 1 Inputting Fire Flow Data 1 10 11 Start WaterCAD and open the file Lesson5 found in the Haestad Wtrc Lesson folder Or if you have previously completed Lesson 3 or 4 you can use your MyLesson3 or MyLesson4 file Select Project Summary from the File menu and change the title
311. it easy to account automatically for contingencies and adjustments that need to be made to the total cost of the physical system aly You do not need to have a hydraulically valid network to perform a cost analysis You can quickly calculate the cost associated with a system at any time through the Cost Manager 180 Chapter 10 Cost Estimating 10 1 Cost Manager The Cost Manager allows you to quickly compute and compare the costs associated with your different scenarios This dialog provides you with a convenient place to view edit and calculate project level cost data This dialog can be divided into three sections that are described below The first section is the series of four buttons on the left side of the window e Unit Cost Functions This button opens the Unit Cost Function manager which is the place to add new functions describing the relationship between a model attribute and the unit cost for the element For pipes this might be a table of data relating the pipe material to the cost per unit length e Cost Alternatives This button opens the Capital Cost Alternatives manager where you can quickly create different cost alternatives For example you may wish to compare the cost associated with different cost functions or different portions of the system e Compute This button opens the Cost Scenario Editor for the scenario that is selected in the pane to the right of this column of buttons The Cost S
312. it this string in any way as you could introduce an error that would prevent the ODBC driver from accessing the data source you have selected If you are unable to successfully synchronize to the data source using the default form of ODBC string it is possible that you may need to add some parameters to the string that are specific to your environment See your database vendor s ODBC documentation for details Synchronizing Via ODBC Once you have successfully created and entered the data for a database connection that uses ODBC the Synchronize In and Synchronize Out operations perform as they do for any other database format However note that ODBC databases are accessed with slightly different internal mechanisms and thus may generate different error conditions If a synchronization fails to complete see the status log for error messages Note the project or database object the program was processing when the error occurred Refer to your database vendor s documentation for detailed information on any errors reported Using ODBC to access SQL Server databases will result in an error 3197 if the synchronization attempts to delete a database record The only known workaround currently is to uncheck Remove Objects on the Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor ODBC Database Tables and Fields There are many complexities in successfully accessing ODBC databases You will know if there are problems on your machin
313. ith different units The tabular reports can save you an enormous amount of time and effort Tabular reports are dynamic tables of input values and calculated results White columns are editable input values and yellow columns are calculated values not editable These tables can be printed or copied into a spreadsheet program Two very powerful features in these tables are Global Edit and Filtering Suppose we decide to evaluate how our network might operate in five years Assume that the C factor for 5 year old ductile iron pipe reduces from 130 to 120 It would be repetitive to go through and edit the pipe roughness through the individual pipe dialogs particularly when dealing with a large system Instead you will use the filter tool in this example to filter out the PVC pipes and then use global edit tool to change the pipe roughness on the ductile iron pipes only Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 51 Begin by setting up a new Alternative and Scenario to capture the changes to the C values Select Analysis Scenarios from the drop down menus Highlight the Scenario P 8 and P 9 Set to 200 mm and click the Scenario Management button Add a Child for this Scenario called 5 yr old D LP Because we want to create a new Physical Alternative check the box labeled Physical and click the New button Name the new Alternative 5 yr old D I P and click OK Click Close to exit the Alternative editor and again to exit the Scenar
314. ith the flow Conservation of Energy Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 269 The same basic principle can be applied to any path between two points As shown in the figure above the combined headloss around a loop must equal zero in order to achieve the same hydraulic grade as at the beginning The Gradient Algorithm The gradient algorithm for the solution of pipe networks is formulated upon the full set of system equations that model both heads and flows Since both continuity and energy are balanced and solved with each iteration the method is theoretically guaranteed to deliver the same level of accuracy observed and expected in other well known algorithms such as the Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method Fowler and the Linear Theory Method Wood In addition there are a number of other advantages that this method has over other algorithms for the solution of pipe network systems e The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks This gives it a computational advantage over some loop based algorithms such as Simultaneous Path which require the reformulation of the network into equivalent looped networks or pseudo loops e Using the method avoids the post computation step of loop and path definition which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation e The method is not numerically unstable when the system becomes disconnected by check valves pressure regulating valves or modeler s error T
315. its cross sectional area Vertex An element in a topological network Wall Reaction Coefficient The rate at which a substance reacts with the wall of a pipe and is expressed in units of length time Water Quality The field that displays the water quality for the current time period Water Quality Analysis An analysis that can be one of three types Age Trace or Constituent Index 319 A Abbreviated Labels 146 Accuracy 175 Active Scenario 25 Active Volume Total 318 Aerial View 106 Affinity Laws 273 Age 311 Alternative 156 Analysis 173 Analysis Theory 284 Alternatives 42 149 150 164 296 297 Child 150 Editor 151 152 160 Inheritance 298 299 Analysis Constituent 173 174 Fire Flow 172 Hydraulic 167 168 266 275 Options 168 Toolbar 25 Trace 174 Water Age 173 Water Quality 173 174 Analysis Results Report 22 191 Analyzing Constituent Concentrations 62 Annotation 48 187 188 Comparison Wizard 198 199 Multipliers 94 Size 261 Annotation Wizard 188 Area Enclosed by Polyline 103 Attribute Annotation 187 188 Inheritance 299 Auto Prompting 91 AutoCAD 237 238 Command Line 14 15 Commands 242 Drawing Synchronization 239 DXF 235 237 Index Element Scale 241 Entities 242 244 Exporting DXF File 235 Import WaterCAD 245 Importing DXF Files 235 Importing WaterCAD DXF Files 235 Main Window 12 Mu
316. its in your database were different than the units set up in WaterCAD the program would automatically make the necessary conversions Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 75 6 Fill in the remaining rows so that your entries correspond to the table below Click OK when you are finished Junction Database Connection WaterCAD Database Unit X Y Elevation Demand Table Link Ed Database T welExe50 wf Database File d haestad wtrc lessons lesson7 xls a Database T able Junctions O Table T ype Pressure Junction H Key labelField label 7 y Field Links J vaco Database Ura og E Insert Duplicate xin e z S pers foerman BT Delete ill tiell Select 7 You should now be back in the Database Connection dialog Click the Add button and set up your database connection for pipe data Use the same spreadsheet file you used for the junction data but set the Database Table and Table Type to Pipe and Pressure Pipe respectively Your Key Label Field is again Label Then set up the following Pipe Database connection 76 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Database Connection Editor x Database Connection Synchronization Options r Database Connection Connection Label Lesson 7 Part 2 m Table Links Database File Database Table Table Type lesson Junctions Pressure Junction Edit Duplicate Delete cot tb
317. k Modeling Water Quality in Distribution System Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management ASCE New York 1988 Practical Guide to Hydraulics and Hydrology Connecticut Haestad Press 1997 Roberson John A John J Cassidy and Hanif M Chaudhry Hydraulic Engineering Houghton Mifflin Company Massachusetts 1988 Roberson John A and Clayton T Crowe Engineering Fluid Mechanics 4 Edition Houghton Mifflin Company Massachusetts 1990 Rossman Lewis A EPANet User s Manual AWWA Workshop Edition Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory Office of Research and Development USEPA Ohio 1993 Rossman Lewis A et al Numerical Methods for Modeling Water Quality in Distribution Systems A Comparison Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management ASCE New York 1996 Rossman Lewis A R M Clark and W M Grayman Modeling Chlorine Residuals in Drinking water Distribution Systems Journal of Environmental Engineering ASCE New York 1994 Sanks Robert L Pumping Station Design Butterworth Heinemann Inc Massachusetts 1989 Streeter Victor L and Wylie E Benjamin Fluid Mechanics McGraw Hill Book Company New York 1985 Todini E and S Pilati A Gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks Computer Applications in Water Supply Volume 1 Systems Analysis and Simulation ed By Bryan Coulbeck and Chun Hou Orr Research Studies Press LTD Letchworth Hertfordshire England 31
318. le Connection box is checked or return to the Shapefile Connection Manager Notes Chapter 14 Exchanging Data with CAD Software 231 Chapter 14 Exchanging Data with CAD Software 14 1 14 1 1 AutoCAD Polyline to Pipe Conversion Polyline to Pipe Conversion Overview This feature allows you to quickly construct a network based on the entities contained in an AutoCAD drawing Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe Line and Block entities can be converted as well Polylines and Lines can be converted to pipes and Blocks can be converted to any available node type Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error prone process This is due to the fact that a drawing can appear to be correct visually but may contain problems that are not readily apparent For example what appears to be a single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments or it could be made up of 2 lines one directly on top of another To help alleviate some of the problems that you may encounter during the import process a comprehensive drawing review is also performed During the conversion process the network is analyzed and potential problems are flagged for review After performing the conversion the Drawing Review window will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that are encountered The Polyline to Pipe conversion cannot be undone Be sure to save your project before you begin You c
319. le from the pull down menu Shapefile Import Example Follow these steps to import one or more Shapefiles into a new or existing model 1 From the File menu select Import Shapefile to access the Import Shapefile Wizard 2 Choose the element types that you wish to import by clicking one or more of the check boxes in the list then click the Next button 3 Configure the options for this import First select the unit for the spatial data of the Shapefile Then if appropriate for your situation click the Establish by Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group and enter a value in the Tolerance field For more information regarding these options refer to the section on Shapefile Synchronization Options Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile Link Editors 4 You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor for each element type you chose to import Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor Enter the name of the Shapefile you wish to import for the specified element type Click the ellipsis button to interactively browse for and select your Shapefile Choose the Key Label Field to define the column in the Shapefile that maps to the element labels in the model Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and the associated Shapefile column and unit if appropriate Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient Cl
320. lements tool 2 from the toolbar Then move the cursor onto the drawing pane and right click to select Reservoir from the pop up menu Left click once on the approximate location of reservoir R 1 see the preceding Water Distribution Network diagram 32 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 2 Next move the cursor to the location of pump P 1 Right click and select Pump from the pop up menu Left click once to place it Place junction J 1 by right clicking selecting Junction from the pop up menu and left clicking on the appropriate location 3 Proceed with laying out the network by placing junctions J 2 J 3 and J 4 Close the loop by selecting junction J 1 Right click and select Done from the pop up menu Ee To construct a pipe with bends in the Stand Alone version hold down the Ctrl key and Y left click on the location of the bend Then release the Ctrl key to enter the next element In the AutoCAD version right click and select Bend from the pop up menu then insert the bend You can insert bends after a pipe is constructed by right clicking the pipe in Stand Alone mode and selecting Bend Add Bend Then drag the new vertex to the appropriate location In AutoCAD mode select Edit Modify Pipes Insert Bend click the pipe and click to place the new vertex 4 Select the Layout Elements tool again and left click on junction J 3 Move the cursor to the location of J 5 and left click to insert the element Right click
321. leted and press the Delete key on the keyboard Note that the integrity of the network is automatically maintained when deletions are performed This means that when a node is deleted any connecting pipes are also deleted to prevent dangling pipes that would otherwise cause the network to be invalid There are also several other methods of deleting elements including selecting Edit Delete from the pull down menu or typing ERASE at AutoCAD s command line Other Tools Although this product is primarily a modeling application some additional drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annotation AutoCAD of course provides a tremendous number of drafting tools In Stand Alone mode drafting and annotation tools allow you to add polylines multi segmented lines rectangles and text to the drawing pane Line Enclosed Area In the Stand Alone drawing pane you can calculate the enclosed area of any closed polyline This feature can be especially helpful for determining catchment areas or residential areas Simply right click the closed polyline and select Enclosed Area from the pop up context menu The Area dialog will open displaying the calculated area of the polyline enclosure This tool is only available for closed polylines To close an open ended polyline right click it and select Close from the context menu Although this feature is not provided in AutoCAD mode you can determine the area
322. lightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes Since there are no commonalities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives this can be created as a base root alternative These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies Preliminary Pipes 8 inches 6 inches 6 inches 6 inches L Larger P 1 18 inches Larger All Pipes 12 inches 12 inches 12 inches 12 inches Scenario Hierarchy Demand Alternative Physical Alternative Avg Day Average Day Preliminary Pipes Max Day Maximum Day Peak Peak Hour Peak Big P 1 Larger P 1 Peak All Big Pipes Larger All Pipes This time the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were changed The two new scenarios Peak Big P 1 Peak All Big Pipes can be batch run to provide results for these proposed improvements Next features like Scenario Comparison Annotation from the Scenario Manager and comparison Graphs for extended period simulations from the element editor dialogs can be used to directly determine which proposal results in the most improved pressures Finalizing the Project It is decided that enlarging P 1 is the optimum solution so new scenarios are created to check the results for average day and maximum day demands Notice that this step does not require 304 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide C 20 handling any new data All of the information we want to model is present in the alter
323. ll inherit data from this parent scenario and will be initialized with the same calculation settings and options The Scenario Wizard designed to introduce the user to scenarios does not allow you to create new base scenarios Existing scenarios in your project are displayed in a tree structure giving you a graphic depiction of the parent child relationships Press the Next button to proceed to the next step Scenario Wizard Step 3 This step of the Scenario Wizard allows you to specify the type of calculation to be associated with the scenario you are creating If you select to be in Steady State mode you are also given the option to perform an automated fire flow analysis If you select to be in Extended Period mode you are also given the option to perform one of the Water Quality Analysis Age Constituent or Trace analysis Scenario Wizard Step 4 Check the boxes next to the types of alternatives you want to include in the new scenario The alternatives for boxes you do not check will be inherited from the specified parent scenario You will be free to add or remove alternatives to the scenario after you create it Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario Scenario Wizard Step 5 Here you are asked to specify the source for each alternative you have requested in the previous tab Create New Alternative If you choose to create a new alternative it will inherit from the sa
324. lldown menus and then click the Drawing tab Set all three Annotation Multipliers to 25 and click OK Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 79 12 13 14 15 Wh WaterCAD by Haestad Methods database connection WCD Of x File Edit Analysis View Tools Report Help Delala meala col zsa S S 2 r Aahe AP LIA AeA AE A NA CE raTa Now examine the network that you imported Notice that it is different in appearance from the same network imported using a shapefile in Part 1 of this lesson The difference stems from the fact that in a database connection a pipe s layout is defined only by the location of its end nodes Therefore pipes appear without bends making a straight line connection between nodes Hydraulically your model will not be affected since the pipe lengths are user defined not scaled from the layout Notice also that the default Scenario Base is currently displayed as the current Scenario Whenever data is brought in through a database or Shapefile connection it is automatically written into the Alternatives referenced by the current Scenario Similarly whenever data is exported the data associated with the current Scenario will be used Click the GO button and then click GO again to run the model Now that you have calculated data we can export it back to our database For this example we will only export pressures at the junction nodes Go ahead and close the Scenario Editor
325. location of line breaks When the label is used as a field label in a dialog the forward slashes will be converted to spaces In the FlexTables there is an option to use abbreviated labels for the column headings If you want an alternative label to be displayed you can specify an abbreviated label after the original label and separate them by the bar symbol l When the option to display abbreviated labels is enabled in the FlexTables this is the text that will be used as the column heading For instance if you specified the label Date Installed Date Inst it would be displayed in one of the following three ways depending on the location and options selected Column Column heading with the short Meld Lape Heading label option selected Installed Inst Date Installed Date Date Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 135 You can select from five different types of data for your user data extension from the drop down list in the field labeled Type An explanation of each is presented in the list below e Date Time Use this data type when you want the values you are entering to be in a standard date and time format This format can be more useful than storing date information in a simple text field because it will allow the dates to be sorted correctly when they appear in a FlexTable e Memo If a user data extension is defined to be a memo it will appear as a scrolling text pane in the User Memos section
326. lternatives are groups of actual model data Both scenarios and alternatives are based on a parent child relationship where a child scenario or alternative inherits data from the parent scenario or alternative In Lessons 1 and 2 you constructed the water distribution network defined the characteristics of the various elements entered demands and demand patterns and performed steady state and extended period simulations In this lesson you will set up the scenarios needed to test four what if situations for our water distribution system These what if situations will involve changing demands and pipe sizes At the end of the lesson you will compare all of the results using the Scenario Comparison tool If at any time during this lesson the program asks Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N A click NO Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 43 3 3 1 This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 2 If you completed Lesson 2 open the project you created previously MyLesson2 in the Wtre Lesson directory Otherwise open the file called lesson3 wcd lesson3 dwg in the AutoCAD version After you have opened the file select File Save As from the pull down menu Type the filename MyLesson3 and click Save Select File Project Summary and change the Project Title to Lesson 3 Scenario Management Click OK Part 1 Creating a New Alternative First you need to set up the required dat
327. ltiple Sessions 88 Proxies 245 Rebuild Figure Labels 239 Right Click Context Menu Option 91 Undo Redo 243 244 AutoCAD Mode 11 12 237 238 Graphical Layout 238 Project Files 239 Toolbars 238 Autodesk 237 Available Fire Flow 311 B Background Drawing 234 Background DXF AutoCAD 234 Base Elevation and Level 311 Base Scenarios 159 160 Batch Run 159 161 Bends Adding to a Pipe 262 in AutoCAD 241 Bernoulli Equation 267 Bibliography 309 Blocks AutoCAD Mode 231 235 Borders 200 Boundary Node 311 Bulk Reaction 208 Bulk Reaction Coefficient 311 C C Coefficient 276 Calculate and Compare 45 Calculated Minimum System Pressure See Minimum System Pressure Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure See Minimum Zone Pressure 320 Index Calculated Residual Pressure 311 Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis 59 Calculation 165 174 175 Options 174 Problem Summary Report 192 Results Status 27 Results Table 192 Calculation Unready 311 Calibration 165 169 170 C Coefficent 311 Check Data 170 Check Valve 275 Check Valve 311 Chemical Analysis 173 Chezy s Equation 278 279 Child 299 Alternative 150 Scenario 159 298 300 Clipboard Copy Table 148 Copy to 26 Closed Inactive Status See Valve Status Coefficient Bulk Reaction 311 Manning s 314 Mass Transfer 282 Roughness 317 Wall Reaction 318 Coefficients
328. m a Database 19 20 21 22 Table of Contents iii 3 7 3 Part 3 Converting CAD Drawing Entities Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 File Management 4 1 1 Import Command 4 1 2 Multiple Sessions Project Management 4 2 1 Project Setup Wizard 4 2 2 Creating a New Project 4 2 3 Opening an Existing Project 4 2 4 Saving a Project 4 2 5 Project Summary Options 4 3 1 Global Options 4 3 2 Project Options 4 3 3 Drawing Options FlexUnits 44 1 Set Field Options 4 4 2 Units 4 4 3 Display Precision 4 4 4 Scientific Notation 4 4 5 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value 4 4 6 Flex Unit Table Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 Graphical Editor 5 1 1 Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor 5 1 2 Creating New Elements 5 1 3 Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node 5 1 4 Morphing Elements 5 1 5 Splitting Pipes 5 1 6 Selecting Elements 5 1 7 Editing Elements 5 1 8 Moving Elements 5 1 9 Deleting Elements 5 1 10 Other Tools Selection Sets 5 2 1 Selection Set Manager Find Element Zooming 5 4 1 Zoom Center 5 4 2 Aerial View Drawing Review 5 5 1 Selection Tolerance Relabel Elements 5 6 1 Relabel Elements Dialog 5 6 2 Relabel Operations 5 6 3 Elements Selected Element Labeling Quick View 108 109 110 iv Table of Contents Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Edit
329. m filter based on one or more criterion e Reset Turn off the active filter causing all available rows in the table to be displayed Another way to select which elements are displayed in the table consists of first selecting elements graphically or by using the Selection Set tool then right clicking any of the selected elements and choosing Edit Group from the pop up menu that appears This will display the Table Manager dialog Only the selected elements will appear in any of the tables you open at this point When you perform a Quick Filter or a Custom Filter the Filter dialog will open allowing you to specify your filtering criterion Each filter criterion is made up of three items e Column The attribute to filter e Operator The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data in the specific column operators include gt gt lt lt lt gt e Value The comparison value Any number of criterion elements can be added to a filter Multiple filter criterion are implicitly joined with a logical AND statement When multiple filter criterion are defined only rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed A filter will remain active for the associated table until the filter is reset or the Table Window is closed The status pane at the bottom of the Table Window always shows the number of rows displayed and the total number of rows available e g 10 of 20 elemen
330. me type of alternative in the specified or parent scenario meaning it will initially use all the same input data values Enter a unique and descriptive name for the new alternative Use Existing Alternative If you choose to use an existing alternative you will be shown the tree of existing alternatives from which to choose In this case you will not be creating a new alternative for use in the scenario and instead may actually be sharing an alternative with another scenario Click the Next button to proceed to the next step Scenario Wizard Step 6 The last step of the Scenario Wizard displays a summary of the scenario you have defined and are about to create In the left pane is a preview of the scenario as it relates to its parent and other scenarios In the right pane is a list of the alternatives it references showing their labels and types An icon indicates whether a given alternative is local to the new child scenario or if it is inherited from the specified or parent scenario If you are satisfied click the Finished button to create the new scenario 164 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 8 2 5 Scenario Editor The Scenario Editor dialog is the control center for each analysis It is the place where you access or change all the information for performing a single calculation alternatives calculation type calculation options results and notes It is organized in the following tabs e Alternatives
331. ment Method DVEM Algorithm Engineer s Reference B4 1 Roughness Values Manning s Equation B 4 2 Roughness Values Darcy Weisbach Equation Colebrook White B 4 3 Roughness Values Hazen Williams Formula B 4 4 Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes B 4 5 Fitting Loss Coefficients Appendix C Scenario Management Guide C 1 C 2 C3 C 4 C5 C 6 C 7 C8 C 9 C 10 C 11 C 12 C 13 C 14 C 15 C 16 C 17 C 18 C 19 C 20 About this Guide Before Haestad Methods Manual Scenarios With Haestad Methods Self Contained Scenarios The Scenario Cycle Scenario Anatomy Attributes and Alternatives A Familiar Parallel Scenario Behavior Inheritance Overriding Inheritance Dynamic Inheritance When are values local and when are they inherited Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance A Water Distribution Example Building the Model Average Day Conditions Analyzing Different Demands Maximum Day Conditions Another Set of Demands Peak Hour Conditions Correcting an Error Analyzing Improvement Suggestions Finalizing the Project Conclusion Appendix D Haestad Methods Software D 1 D 2 D 3 D4 WaterCAD SewerCAD StormCAD PondPack 276 279 280 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 293 294 295 295 296 296 297 298 298 298 299 300 300 301 301 302 302 303 303 304 305 305 305 306 306 Table
332. ment Results Report The Element Results dialog allows you to print or preview a single report containing the results for any number of elements in the system From the Element Results dialog you can select elements to be printed by holding down the Shift key or the Control key when clicking with the mouse Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection behavior and holding down the Control key will provide single element selection behavior Alternately use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog This provides more powerful selection functions When you are satisfied click the Preview button to view the selected reports or click the Print button to print the selected reports You can graphically select elements that you would like to print before opening the Element Result Reports dialog The selected elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print This is done by holding down the Shift key and selecting elements or by dragging a window around the area of interest When working with large systems the preview option can require a great deal of system resources You can reduce resource requirements by selecting a small subset of elements with which to work or by printing a subset of the time step results as described above The print option has lower system resource requirements than the preview option To access the Element Results dialog select Report Element Results from the menu
333. mix and match groups of data that have been previously created Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data the referenced alternatives do C 6 A Familiar Parallel Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first anyone who has eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily A meal scenario is comprised of several courses alternatives which might include a salad an entr e and a dessert Each course has its own attributes For example the entr e may have a meat a vegetable and a starch Examining the choices we could present a menu as in the following figure Appendix C Scenario Management Guide 297 A Restaurant Meal Scenario Salad 1 Lettuce amp Carrots No Dressing Salad 1 Salad 2 Lettuce amp Carrots Thousand Island Entree 1 Salad 3 Meal XYZ Entree 1 Entree 2 Dessert 2 Entree 3 Dessert 1 Apple Pie No Topping Dessert 2 Apple Pie Ice Cream Dessert 3 C 7 Beef Chicken Fish Baked Potato Rice Rice Green Beans Green Beans Green Beans Chocolate Cake Whipped Cream Lettuce amp Carrots Blue Cheese The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal combination of courses that could be ordered They can just assemble any meal based on what the customer orders for each alternative course Salad 1 Entr e 1 and Dessert 2 might then be combined to define a complete meal Generalizing this
334. more projects You can do this by copying a standard library or creating a new library and setting the path in the engineering library manager for the project to the path for the custom library When you change the properties for an object in an engineering library those changes will affect all projects that use that library At the time a project is loaded all of its engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library Objects are synchronized based on their label If the label is the same then the object s values will be made the same If any library referenced in a library manager path cannot be located then the standard library in the program directory will be used Once a project is created it is not necessary to have access to the engineering library in order for that project to be edited or analyzed Engineering Library Manager The Engineering Library Manager dialog consists of a table of five columns Library Current Path Browse Edit and New There is one row for each kind of engineering library used in your project You cannot create library types different from the set of standard libraries shipped with the product The columns in the table are as follows e Library This column lists the kind of object stored in the referenced library 206 Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries e Current Path This column lists the path to the library to be used for objects of a certain kind within the current project
335. mphasize as you prepare to use WaterCAD V4 for the first time 252 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions e Tutorials are available in the Stand Alone editor for a deeper introduction to nearly every topic and there is context sensitive on line Help available from anywhere in the program by pressing the F1 key or by clicking a Help button e Dont be afraid to explore Some of the best features can be easy to overlook Remember whenever you see an ellipsis button it means that a special feature is available Play with the model and most importantly start to enjoy modeling again A 1 3 Importing EPANET Files From the pull down menu select File Import Network and choose EPANet inp Then from the File Open dialog select the file you would like to import During the import procedure you will be prompted for a map scale factor You may also be asked to specify the Unit of Concentration In EPANET pumps and valves are modeled as links In this program they are 3 graphically modeled as node elements Hence during an import each EPANET valve and pump link is replaced by two pipes and one pump or valve element This will not affect the behavior of these elements in your system In EPANEFT tanks can have an optional inactive volume parameter If this parameter is omitted from the input file or a zero is entered for this parameter the EPANET numerical engine will compute an inactive volume based on the tank s diamete
336. mps are identical the system may also be modeled as a single composite pump that has a characteristic curve equivalent to the two individual pumps For pumps in parallel the discharge is multiplied by the number of pumps and used against the same head value Two pumps in series result in an effective pump with twice the head at the same discharge For example two pumps that can individually operate at 150 gpm at a head of 80 feet connected in parallel will have a combined discharge of 2 150 300 gpm at 80 feet The same two pumps in series would pump 150 gpm at 2 80 160 feet of head This is illustrated as follows 256 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions A 2 5 A 2 6 A 2 7 Pump Curves of Pumps in Series and Parallel 250 gt 200 e Series an Single p 2 Parallel 100 ab I 50 0 100 200 300 400 500 Discharge gpm With pumps in series it is actually more desirable to use a composite pump than to use multiple pumps in the network When pumps shut off it is easier to control one pump Several pumps in series can even cause disconnections by checking if upstream grades are greater than the downstream grade plus the pump heads Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks If tanks are hydraulically close as in the case of several tanks adjacent to each other it is better to model these tanks as one composite tank with the equivalent total surface area of the individual tanks This proc
337. much of your data input and review It has many features to assist you with data entry data formatting report customization and output generation To access the Table window select a table from the Table Manager and click OK to open it Here are some of the topics that will be covered in this section e Table Navigation Chapter 7 FlexTables 143 74 1 e Table Customization Options e Table Sorting e Table Filtering e Changing Column Headings e Globally Editing Data e Local vs Synchronized Units e Mixing Units in a Tabular Report e Abbreviated Labels e Changing Column Display Properties Output e File Export Table to ASCII File e Table Copy to Clipboard e Table Print e Table Print Preview Columns See the Glossary for information regarding the definitions of the columns in the Table window Use the Scenario control located at the top of the Table Window to quickly view the data for different scenarios To access the Table window open the Table Manager dialog select the table you wish to open and click OK Editing Tables Editable Table Columns Editable table columns correspond to input data that you can change The values in these columns can be modified either directly or through the Global Edit option These columns are displayed with a white background Non editable table columns correspond to model results calculated by the program You cannot modify the values in these columns The
338. multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run switch between scenarios and compare scenario results all with a few mouse clicks There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create There are two types of scenarios e Base scenarios Contain all of your working data When you start a new project you will begin with a default Base scenario As you enter data and calculate your model you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it references e Child scenarios Inherit data from a base scenario or even other child scenarios Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your system Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their parent This is a very powerful concept giving you the ability to make changes in a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios while also giving you the ability to override values for some or all elements in child scenarios The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios but are duplicated when the scenario is first created The alternatives and data records however are inherited there is a permanent dynamic link from a child back to its parent Scenario Selection Scenario Base ed You can change the current scenario by simply using the Scenario drop down list located on the Analysis Toolbar on the main application window When you select a different sce
339. mum operating elevations Two parameters are needed to fully describe a constant area tank section e Cross Section Choose whether the cross section is circular or non circular e Average Area Diameter Enter the average area of the non circular cross section or the diameter of the circular cross section Variable Area Section The cross sectional geometry varies between the minimum and maximum operating elevations Depth Volume Ratio Table Enter a series of points describing the storage characteristics of the tank For example at 0 1 the total depth depth ratio 0 1 the tank stores 0 028 the total active volume volume ratio 0 028 At 0 2 the total depth that tank stores 0 104 the total active volume 0 2 0 104 etc The storage characteristics of the tank can be plotted Choose Tank Curve from the Report Button at the bottom of the Tank Dialog Controls Tab Controls allow you to configure the hydraulic model to change the status or settings of a pump valve or pipe at a specific time or when specific junction pressures or tank water levels occur in the network e To add a control Click the Add button This will open the Control dialog where the specifics of the control can be edited e To edit an existing control Select the description of the control you wish to edit and click the Edit button e To duplicate an existing control Select the description of the control you wish to dupl
340. n This will update the Shapefiles from the model Shapefile Connection Editor The Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection Editor It offers the tabs for Shapefile Connection and Synchronization Options Shapefile Connection The Shapefile Connection tab of the Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor It contains the following e Connection Label A unique alphanumeric identification for the connection This is the label that appears in the list on the Shapefile Connection Manager dialog e Table Links This list is similar to all of the program s managers It provides basic information about each Shapefile link such as the referenced Shapefile the feature type of the Shapefile and the type of element which is referenced As with the other managers a Shapefile link can be highlighted from the list at which point the following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog Add Define a new Shapefile link If there are no table links currently defined for this connection this will be the only button available Clicking this button invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard Edit Change the characteristics of the selected Shapefile link such as the referenced file or the mapping of the Shapefile s field links Clicking this button also invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard Duplicate Create an ide
341. n because the contents of the volume elements are maintained as separate and discrete However there may be a blending between hydraulic time steps should the system re segment to a lower number of volume elements This will occur when the system demands are peaking and link velocities are increasing This artificial dispersion is expected and is a consequence of the methodology This program provides several water quality parameter options that the modeler may use to control the segmentation scheme in response to extreme cases in the system Key situations are described below e Short high velocity pipes in system The presence of these link elements might cause the model to assume a very small value for t which could lead to excessively long computation times in large systems This effect can be controlled via the Minimum Pipe Travel Time calculation option Pipes with hydraulic times shorter than this will experience an artificial delay in constituent mass transport resulting in some accuracy loss e Long slow velocity pipes in system The presence of these elements can result in a large number of volume elements to be generated during the segmentation phase of the algorithm This can increase calculation times and place severe demands on the computer system memory This situation can be controlled by setting an upper limit on the number of volume elements that are generated using the Maximum Pipe Segments option Mass transport throug
342. n a pipe by pipe basis This is useful when scaled mode is preferred but an exaggerated scale is needed for layout of detailed piping arrangements Whether the drawing is set in scaled or schematic mode automatically reflects the setting of the pipe prototype While in schematic mode Gravity Pipe Prototypes and Pressure Pipe Prototypes can be assigned a default length When the drawing mode is scaled pipe lengths do not need to be initialized from the prototype Note that switching between scaled and schematic in either the Project Options or Pipe Prototype dialogs has no effect on existing pipes Annotation Multipliers Annotation multipliers allow you to change the size of symbols labels and annotation text relative to the drawing scale There is not a single annotation size that is going to work well with all projects and scales so these values should be adjusted based on your judgment and the desired look of the finished drawings e Symbol Size The number entered in this field will either increase or decrease the size of your symbols by the factor indicated For example a multiplier of 2 would result in the symbols being doubled in size The program selects a default symbol height that corresponds to 4 0 ft approximately 1 2 m in actual world units regardless of scale Unlike text this symbol height will not automatically change as you modify the drawing scale So if you are generating drawings in smaller dimensions you may want to
343. n elements e The Annotation tools can be used to add legends to your drawing In Stand Alone mode you can also add polylines borders and text to your drawing Click a tool to select it as the active tool In Stand Alone mode when a tool is selected it will be highlighted and the cursor appearance will change to reflect the active tool In Stand Alone mode right click the tool palette to access the Prototype Manager for setting the default data for each type of network element Analysis Toolbar The analysis toolbar displays the active scenario and provides a means for changing the current scenario and accessing the scenario manager All input and output information displayed in the tables profiles element dialogs and annotation will be related to the active scenario shown in the analysis toolbar Time I ET 0 00 hr aa PA Increment 1 00 hr Y Scenario Base J ol al You can change the current scenario from the list box You can access the Scenario Manager by clicking the Scenario Manager button ol and the Cost Manager by clicking the Cost Manager button Ei f Other Toolbar Buttons Some of the following toolbar buttons appear on secondary windows such as the Print Preview window and the Profile window available throughout the program e Print Preview Command e Page Up Down e File 26 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 2 4 Copy to Clipboard Print Options Close Help Print
344. n external file and a field in the model For example a field link may be used to map the GRND_FT field of an external database file to the Ground Elevation attribute of the model In summary a Connection defines a link between the model and external files Table or Shapefile Links and Field Links are used to specify files tables and fields to be linked Once a Connection is created it can be synchronized in or out The synchronization action will update models in direction or the external files out direction The rest of this chapter provides details on the dialogs and windows used to interact with the GIS Database Connection system Although Database Connections and Shapefile Connections are similar in concept there are differences in the interfaces and options Therefore they will be discussed in separate sections Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 213 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 Database Connections Database Connection Manager This manager accessed from the File pull down menu helps you track and work with database connections On the left hand side of this dialog is a list of the current database connections There are several options available from the manager including Add Create a new database connection using the Database Connection Editor Edit Change the configuration of the currently selected connection This will open the Database Connection Editor where you can rename the connection
345. n program Supplied by Haestad Methods 2 The Data Source Administrator Program Embedded in Microsoft Windows 3 The low level drivers for accessing specific databases Supplied by your database vendor Although most computers with Windows will have ODBC present the exact databases you can interface via ODBC will depend on the databases and drivers installed on your computer ODBC is powerful because it is very generic and can access many database systems including mainframe GIS and legacy systems However because ODBC must be very general it is slower more complex and more difficult to use than working directly with a database When you have the option to work directly with a database you will usually find it is faster and easier than going through ODBC For specific information about ODBC in your environment see your database vendor s documentation For general information on ODBC see the online Help for the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program To find the Administrator Program go to the Control Panel for your computer and double click the ODBC icon Choose the Help button on the dialog that appears then go to the Help Contents ODBC Database Type The first field of the database connection Table Link editor is for the Database Type The list box displays the external databases and versions supported by the Database Connection feature One of the Database Types you can select is ODBC This does not refer to a specific
346. n the file contains For example files you create in AutoCAD have the extension DWG Fire Flow Upper Limit The maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location This is a user specified practical limit that will prevent this program from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains which have large diameters and high service pressures Remember that a system s ability to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of the hydrant opening and service line as well as the number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a specific location Flow The calculated value of the pipe valve or pump discharge at the given time From Node The pipe s starting node Positive flow rates are in the direction of from towards to Negative flow rates are in the opposite direction From Pipe The pipe that connects to the upstream side of a valve or pump Headloss The energy lost due to friction and minor losses The headloss field displays the pipe valve or pump s total headloss at the given time 314 Glossary Headloss Gradient The headloss in the pipe as a slope or gradient This allows you to more accurately compare headlosses for pipes of different lengths Hydraulic Grade Elevation to which water would rise under zero pressure For open surfaces such as reservoirs and tanks this is equal to the water surface elevation The hydraulic grad
347. nalysis for any set of elements and zones in the network Water Quality Analysis Track the growth or decay of substances such as chlorine as they travel through the distribution network Determine the age of water anywhere in the network Identify source trends throughout the system Steady State Extended Period Simulation WaterCAD gives the choice between performing a steady state analysis of the system or performing an extended period simulation over any time period Steady State Simulation Steady state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific point in time or under steady state conditions flow rates and hydraulic grades remain constant over time This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and flow rates under minimum average peak or short term effects on the system due to fire flows 168 Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities For this type of analysis the network equations are determined and solved with tanks being treated as fixed grade boundaries The results that are obtained from this type of analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the values of the system a few hours or even a few minutes later in time Extended Period Simulation When the effects on the system over time are important an extended period simulation is appropriate This type of analysis allows you to model tanks filling and draining regulating valves opening and clos
348. nalyze complex pressurized piping systems WaterCAD s powerful graphical interface both in Stand Alone and AutoCAD mode makes it easy to quickly lay out a complex network of pipes tanks pumps and more You can use WaterCAD to Perform steady state analyses of water distribution systems with pumps tanks and control valves Perform extended period simulations to analyze the piping system s response to varying supply and demand schedules Perform water quality simulations to determine the water source and age or track the growth or decay of a chemical constituent throughout the network Perform Fire Flow Analyses on your system to determine how your system will behave under extreme conditions Use the powerful Scenario Management features to mix and match a variety of What If alternatives on your system Create multiple sets of hydraulic physical property operational initial setting fire flow cost and water quality alternatives Create and run any number of scenarios by mixing and matching alternatives then view and compare the results quickly and easily with WaterCAD s flexible scenario management feature The best introduction to WaterCAD is the One Minute Tutorial Explore WaterCAD freely and remember that there is a lot of valuable information in on line help What is New in WaterCAD v4 WaterCAD v4 includes a variety of new and enhanced features including AutoCAD 2000 Support WaterCAD in AutoCAD mod
349. nario your current input data calculation options and calculated results if available will reflect the selected scenario and the alternatives it references 160 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 8 2 2 Editing Scenarios Once scenarios and alternatives are created you do not need to take any special steps to input data into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario This happens automatically as you make changes to your data Changes to your data are always applied to the alternatives in your active scenario For example consider that a pipe has a 6 diameter in the alternative storing data for the Base scenario Then you switch to Scenario 2 which references another alternative and change the pipe diameter to 8 The new value will automatically be associated with the alternative in Scenario 2 If you switch back to the Base scenario the pipe diameter will revert to 6 You can also enter data directly into an alternative using the Alternatives Editor This editor allows you to see all of the changes that you have made in a single alternative If you make an unintended change to the active child scenario and you wish to remove it go to the tabular editor for the type of input data you changed and uncheck the leading check box on the record s for the elements you wish to restore Scenarios currently only track modifications to the input data associated with existing network elements They do not allow you to track m
350. natives we already have Scenario Hierarchy Demand Alternative Physical Alternative Avg Day Average Day Preliminary Pipes Max Day Maximum Day L Max Day Big P 1 Larger P 1 Peak Peak Hour Peak Big P 1 Larger P 1 Peak All Big Pipes Larger All Pipes Avg Day Big P 1 Larger P 1 Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg Day Big P 1 scenario from Avg Day changing the physical alternative or to inherit from Peak Big P 1 changing the demand alternative Likewise Max Day Big P 1 could inherit from either Max Day or Peak Big P 1 Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run the last set of scenarios so they remain as they were Average Day Maximum Day Peak Hour Preliminary Pipes 8 inches 6 inches 6 inches 6 inches L Larger P 1 18 inches Larger All Pipes 12 inches 12 inches 12 inches 12 inches Conclusion These are the fundamental concepts behind the architecture of Haestad Methods scenario management To learn more about actually using scenario management in Haestad Methods software start by running the scenario management tutorial from the Help menu or from within the scenario manager itself Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the scenarios defined there For context sensitive help press F1 or the Help button any time there is a screen or field that puzzles you Haestad Methods scenario management feature
351. nction bd Available Columns 35 Selected Columns 11 Cancel Available Fire Flow fl min Label Elevation m Zone Help Add Type Baseline Load l min Pattern gt Constituent Baseline Load mg l gt gt Constituent Pattern Constituent Source Remove Demand Summary lt Description Easting m Z Fixed Cost Description strategic Elevation m T Allow duplicate columns Note Entries shown in White are editable in the tabular view entries shown in Yellow are not editable in the tabular view The revised table appears with two Elevation columns both in meters Drag and drop the new column heading to relocate it next to the original Elevation column To apply separate units to the two columns click the Options button and select Use Local Units This option allows the tabular report to have units independent of the project and local to the table In other words without this option switched on changing the units from meters to feet in the table would change the unit for pressure throughout the project The Use Local Units option is ideal for displaying the same variable with multiple units within the same tabular report Click Yes in the warning box that appears indicating that you wish to switch to local units To assign units of feet to one of the columns right click on the column heading and select Elevation Properties from the pop up menu In the Set Field Options dialog select ft
352. nd Alternatives 165 time variable hydraulic conditions are tank characteristics and controls associated with Pipes Pumps and Valves This dialog allows you to specify the following data and calculation modes Steady State Extended Period Simulation If you have selected Extended Period calculation a set of extended period options become available for editing Start Time Duration and Hydraulic Time Step Analysis Modes In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis you are given the option to perform a Water Quality Analysis in Steady State mode or a Fire Flow Analysis in Extended Period Simulation mode Calibration Feature used to tweak the two most commonly used parameters during model calibration junction demands and pipe roughness without permanently changing the value of the input data It allows you to experiment with different calibration factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data Check Data Validate This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors hard to detect topology problems and modeling problems When the Validate box is checked the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations It can also be run at any time by clicking the Check Data button The process will produce either a dialog stating No Problems Found or a status log with a list of messages Cal
353. ndard Print dialog which allows you to select the printer and set up properties to be used Shortcut Key Ctrl P Print Preview Open the Print Preview dialog for the current view of the project drawing This feature allows you to see the drawing as it will be printed before sending it to the printer Toolbar Button al Printer Setup Select the default printer for WaterCAD to use You can also use this command to change options related to the printer driver such as resolution portrait or landscape orientation and other printer details 1 2 etc The most recently opened project files appear at the bottom of the File menu Using this file list you can quickly select and open a recently used file without locating its drive and directory Exit Close the current project and exit WaterCAD If you made any changes to the current project you will be asked if you want to save the project before you exit WaterCAD Shortcut Key Alt F4 Edit Menu The Edit menu provides access to basic commands for controlling WaterCAD elements including element navigation selection deletion and undo and redo In Stand Alone mode Undo Last Action Performed Reverse the last reversible action performed Reversible actions include things such as element creation deletion editing and moves The Undo command cannot reverse the effects of some model actions such as calculation database synchronization scenario creation and t
354. ne of the standard database import connections e Import Shapefile Build network elements from ESRI shapefiles This command will start the Shapefile Wizard which will help you bring the GIS elements and their associated data into your project e Import Polyline to Pipe Stand Alone mode only Build network elements from a DXF file This command will start the Polyline to Pipe Wizard which will help you convert polyline data representing geographical data into your project as pipes and nodes A similar command called Change Entities to Pipes is available in the AutoCAD version under the Edit menu e Import Network Import data from KYpipe v1 v2 or v3 EPANet v1 and v2 or Cybernet v1 and v2 file WaterCAD v3 projects should simply be opened in WaterCAD v4 as any WaterCAD v4 project without using the Import command However once you save the project in WaterCAD v4 the project files cannot be opened in WaterCAD v3 any longer e Import Spot Elevations Bring spot elevation data from a space or comma delimited ASCII file in a variety of formats e Import DXF Background Stand Alone mode only Bring a DXF drawing file into your project as a background map This command will open a dialog that prompts you to select the name and location of the desired DXF file e Import WaterCAD AutoCAD mode only Import a Stand Alone WaterCAD file wed into WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode e
355. network systems You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of functions including steady state analyses of water distribution systems with pumps tanks and control valves WaterCAD is also capable of completing extended period simulations to analyze a piping system s response to varying supply and demand schedules including automated fire flow analyses Water quality elements such as water source age and chemical constituent growth and decay can be tested utilizing WaterCAD s water quality simulation and analysis functions Complex networks of pipes tanks pumps and more can be laid out quickly and easily whether you are using the Stand Alone Windows graphical interface or running WaterCAD for AutoCAD The Scenario Manager allows you to create multiple sets of alternatives and run any number of scenarios then view and compare the results SewerCAD SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool that allows you to lay out a sanitary collection system develop and compute sanitary loads and simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system including gravity collection piping and pressure force mains The program can be run within AutoCAD giving you all the power of AutoCAD s capabilities or in Stand Alone mode utilizing Haestad Methods own Windows graphical interface 306 Appendix D Haestad Methods Software SewerCAD allows you to construct a graphical representation of a pipe network containing all your informat
356. ng s roughness unitless A Flowarea m ft R Hydraulic radius m ft S Friction slope m m ft ft Chezy s equation is reviewed later in this section Manning s roughness coefficients are the same as the roughness coefficients used in Kutter s equation Colebrook White Equation The Colebrook White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy Weisbach friction factor Free Surface 2log k P 2al 14 8R Ro vf 1 75 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 279 Full Flow Closed Conduit 1 k 2 51 2log Ji 12 0R Revft Where Re Reynolds Number k Darcy Weisbach roughness height m ft f Friction factor unitless R Hydraulic radius m ft Chezy s Equation Chezy s equation is rarely used directly but it is the basis for several other methods including Manning s equation and Kutter s equation Chezy s equation is Q C A VR S Where Q Discharge in the section m s cfs C Chezy s roughness coefficient m s ft s A Flowarea m ft R Hydraulic radius m ft S Friction slope m m ft ft B 2 3 Minor Losses Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system The magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting which directly affects the flow lines in the pipe The
357. ng duplicating and synchronizing Connections To exchange data between the model and external files a Connection must be created and then synchronized The two synchronization operations that can be performed on a Connection are Sync In and Syne Out Sync In synchronizes the model to the data contained in external files In this case the model acts as a consumer of the data and external files act as the data provider Syne Out synchronizes external files to the data contained in the model Thus for Syne Out the model is the data provider and external files are the consumers Exactly what data is exchanged during synchronization depends on how the Connection is defined Intuitively a Connection must specify which files are to be connected to the model and what data in each file is to be exchanged The second tier is the Table or Shapefile Link A Database Connection uses these links to gather and store information Each Connection can contain one or more Table or Shapefile Links Each of these links specifies the type of external file with which to exchange data implied with Shapefile links the name of the file and if the file contains multiple tables which table within the file is of interest The third tier of the system is the Field Link Each Table or Shapefile Link uses one or more Field Links to specify exactly what data in the external file is going to be exchanged A Field Link defines the fundamental mapping between a field in a
358. ng a Variable vs Time Graph Setup The Graph Setup dialog allows you to graph calculated results for any element in the system e Independent Variable The Independent Variable Time will be plotted on the x axis e Dependent Variable The selected dependant variable will be plotted on the y axis e Available Scenarios Select and compare various scenario computations The Graph Setup option is only available for Extended Period Analysis When the Plot window is open click the Options button to graph other dependent variables The Graph Setup dialog can be accessed for any element in the system For the element you would like to graph open its Element Editor by double clicking the element in the main window then click the Report button and select the Graph menu item 194 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results Available Scenarios This feature allows you to select which scenario s you wish to view and compare on the current graph Place a check mark by the scenario s you wish to display By default the base scenario is named Base 11 5 Contours 11 5 1 Contour Map Manager The Contour Map Manager contains the information required to generate contours for a calculated network organized as follows e Contour Choice list used to select the attribute that is to be contoured e Selection Set Contours can be generated using all elements in the network or a subset of elements defined in the Sele
359. ng it to the center of the drawing pane This element search is based on the element label and is not case sensitive Review Drawing Open the Drawing Review window which is used to isolate elements that need to be scrutinized for potential problems orphaned nodes elements with messages superimposed nodes etc Analysis Menu The Analysis menu contains items useful for managing calculations These include the scenario and alternative managers and the calculation commands Scenarios Access the Scenario Manager allowing you to analyze and recall an unlimited number of What If alternative calculations for your model Alternatives Access the Alternative Manager allowing you to organize your data into building blocks to be combined to form scenarios Patterns Access the Hydraulic and Constituent load managers allowing you to define automatic time variable changes within the system Zones Define zones in which to place network elements Cost Computing Open the Cost Manager in order to view edit or perform Cost Estimating calculations Toolbar Button Bl 20 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 2 2 4 e Calculation Open the Calculation dialog which gives you access to items such as calculation options and referenced alternatives Toolbar Button Go View Menu In both AutoCAD and Stand Alone mode the View menu provides access to tools dealing with the drawing pane toolbar visibility and so f
360. nges in Phase I that change is inherited through the hierarchy such that all of the children Phase II Phase III etc reflect the new data There is a scenario tutorial for the stand alone editor and there is a scenario Wizard to help you through your first few scenario creations Once you have seen what alternatives and inheritance can do for your model you will be glad that you spent a few minutes getting familiar with them Using the Scenario Manager Scenario functionality is extended even further by the presence of comparative tools such as graphing Scenario results can be directly compared graphically plotting all of the scenarios on the same axes This means that determining the effects of things such as system expansion future demand increases and pipe deterioration can all be seen within seconds of running the models Combined with batch runs which is running several scenarios in sequence scenario management has reached a level that most modelers have only dreamed of until now Demand Alternatives With the new scenario management demand loading also has all new flexibility Rather than being limited to Avg Day Max Day Peak Hr User 1 and User 2 there are an unlimited number of demand alternatives available in WaterCAD v4 You can still have global demand and global roughness factors for your WaterCAD v4 model so you can make minor adjustments during calibration without having to generate new alternatives Composite D
361. nical D3 D4 0 80 D3 D4 0 50 DxD 0 20 Typical Fitting K Coefficients wo v 0 03 0 05 0 12 0 25 0 50 0 80 0 18 0 37 0 49 0 05 0 07 0 08 0 16 0 57 0 92 0 03 0 08 0 13 90 Smooth Bend Bend radius D 4 Bend radius D 2 Bend radius D 1 Mitered Bend 6 15 6 30 6 45 60 90 Tee Line Flow Branch Flow Cross Line Flow Branch Flow 45 Vive Line Flow Branch Flow 0 16 0 18 0 19 0 25 0 35 0 40 0 05 0 10 0 20 0 35 0 80 0 30 0 40 0 75 1 80 0 50 0 75 0 30 0 50 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide 293 C 1 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide Haestad Methods scenario management feature can dramatically increase your productivity in the What If areas of modeling including calibration operations analysis and planning By investing a little time now to understand scenario management you can avoid unnecessary editing and data duplication Take advantage of scenario management to get a lot more out of your model with much less work and expense In contrast to the old manual methods of scenario management editing or copying data automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages e A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of What If conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and separate results e Because the software maintains th
362. nnection Manager WI RC HDC Ea Project Export US Project Import SI Project Import US Edit Duplicate Delete Synchronize In Synchronize Out ANd z Reset 2 Enter the Connection Label Lesson 7 Part 2 for this connection and click the Add button Database Connection Editor x Database Connection Synchronization Options r Database Connection Connection Label Lesson 7 Part 2 m Table Links Database File Database Table Edit Duplicate Delete Cancel Hep Set the Database Type to Excel 5 0 Click the ellipses button next to the Database File field and browse to select the Lesson7 xls file from the Haestad Wtrc Lesson directory Click the Database Table list box Notice that the items in the list correspond to the different worksheet tabs in your spreadsheet file Select Junction from the list and Pressure Junction for the Table Type Set the Key Label field to Label This item designates the field that WaterCAD matches with its own element labels so that data will be assigned to the correct place Using the Field Links table you must now match the data types available in WaterCAD to the data types you will be bringing in from the spreadsheet In row 1 select X from the WaterCAD column and X m from the Database column Set the Unit to m to let WaterCAD know that the coordinate it is reading from the spreadsheet is in meters If the un
363. ns tab accessed from the Tools Options pull down menu Since we will be working in metric units click the Unit System selection box and select System International Click OK Choose New on the File pull down menu and select No when prompted to save the existing drawing If the Create New Drawing dialog opens move to step 3 otherwise do the following Click the Esc key Then type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter Type the value 1 and press Enter Then choose New on the File pull down menu again and don t save changes to the existing drawing Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialogs or simply at the command prompt When the Create New Drawing dialog appears make sure that Metric is selected and click OK Answer Yes when asked if you want to set up the project In the Project Setup Wizard title the project Lesson 7 Part 2 Importing Data from a Database and click Next Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second screen In this dialog set up the drawing as Schematic and change the three Annotation Multipliers Symbol Size Text Height and Annotation Height to 25 Click Next leave the Prototypes set to their default values and click Finished The remaining commands are for both Stand Alone and AutoCAD modes 1 Select File Synchronize Database Connections from the pull down menus Click Add 74 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Database Co
364. nt are specified in terms of a unit cost function A unit cost function describes the relationship between an attribute of the element and the unit cost For example you may wish to specify the unit cost of a pipe as a function of the diameter where the unit cost of the pipe increases as the diameter increases In addition to a unit cost every element can have an itemized list of fixed costs Fixed costs are specified by the user and provide flexibility in specifying the cost of elements for which the unit cost might not accurately capture the actual cost of installing that element For instance if an easement is needed for a particular pipe this cost will probably not be reflected in the unit cost for that pipe A unit cost can not be associated with some elements such as pumps and tanks whose cost cannot be easily correlated to an attribute of the element However you can include the costs associated with these elements in the cost analysis by assigning fixed costs to these elements This provides the user with the flexibility to distinguish between the different costs associated with these types of elements For instance if you are costing a pump you may want to differentiate between the cost of the pump itself and the cost of the pump housing In addition to specifying the costs for each element in the system you can also make adjustments on a system wide basis to the total cost of all the elements included in the cost analysis This makes
365. nt status However it can be overruled by the presence of controls if the Use Controls in Steady State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog is checked The Calculation Options dialog is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor and then clicking the Options button User Defined Length Section If the User Defined Length box is checked you can enter a pipe length Otherwise the program will compute a pipe length from node center to node center accounting for bends if there are any Creating user defined lengths is useful for drawing quick schematics to accelerate your design process Nodes Section This section allows you to identify the calculated flow direction A reported positive flow value indicates that the flow is in the direction of the From Node to the To Node It is also useful for check valves which allow flow only in the From Node to To Node direction The Reverse button allows you to change the direction of a pipe switching the From Node and the To Node Hydraulic Results Section This section reports the following hydraulic results e Discharge Calculated total flow in the pipe e Velocity Calculated velocity in the pipe e Headloss Gradient Headloss in the pipe represented as a slope or gradient e Pressure Pipe Headloss Loss of energy in the pipe due to friction and minor losses e Control Status Open or Clo
366. ntical Shapefile link to the selected one This is very helpful when defining two or more Shapefile links with similar attributes Delete Remove the selected Shapefile link from the connection To use the Shapefile Connection Editor do the following Select Synchronize Shapefile Connections from the File menu e If you do not currently have any Shapefile connections defined you will be prompted to indicate if you wish to create one now If you answer Yes you will be automatically taken to the Shapefile Connection Wizard e If there are connections already defined or if you answer No to the prompt to create one now you will be taken to the Shapefile Connection Manager Select Add to open the Shapefile Connection Wizard Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 223 13 2 3 13 2 4 Shapefile Link Wizard The Shapefile Link Wizard is used when adding new Shapefile Links to a Shapefile Connection or when editing the existing links of a Shapefile Connection The first step of the wizard is bypassed when editing an existing link The basic steps of the wizard are as follows e Select Element Type Similar to the Select Element Types window for importing Shapefiles except that radio buttons are used rather than check boxes This is because a Shapefile Connection represents a single element type e Import Shapefile Choose the Shapefile to which you would like to connect and choose the Key Label Field to specify the
367. ntouring by Selection Set Generate contours for any subset of elements e Drawing Review Quickly review your network data for potential problems resulting from data entry errors or data discrepancies in the source database Shapefile or CAD drawing from which a model was imported Installation Upgrades and Updates Minimum System Requirements Below are the minimum and recommended system requirements for running WaterCAD without significant delays Note that some of the requirements for AutoCAD Mode such as RAM are fairly high due to the demands of AutoCAD and operating system demands not WaterCAD itself Stand Alone Mode Processor Pentium 166 RAM 32 Megabytes Hard Disk 25 Megabytes of free storage space with additional room for data files Operating System Windows 95 or later or Windows NT 4 0 Display 800 x 600 resolution 256 colors AutoCAD Mode Processor Pentium 166 RAM 64 Megabytes Hard Disk 25 Megabytes of free storage space with additional room for data files Display 800 x 600 resolution 256 colors Chapter 1 Orientation 1 3 2 1 3 3 Recommended While Haestad Methods software will perform adequately given the minimum system requirements performance will only improve with a faster system Our products are designed to perform at optimal levels with a fast CPU and ample amounts of RAM and free disk space We highly recommend running our software on the best system possible to ma
368. ntration or source trace at the current location depending on which type of water quality analysis is currently selected in the Scenario Editor dialog This does not apply to pipes When performing Constituent analysis reaction coefficients are needed as defined below e Bulk Reaction Coefficient Coefficient defining how rapidly a constituent grows or decays over time This applies to Tank and Pipes only e Wall Reaction Coefficient Coefficient defining the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall of a pipe 128 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors for computations Therefore these reaction coefficient fields are greyed out or not displayed For constituent analyses however the bulk and pipe reaction coefficients are needed to define the reactions that occur within the pipes in the water and between the water and pipe wall and in the tanks 3 For age and trace analyses pipe velocity and flow rate are the only related data needed J The bulk and wall reaction coefficient fields are initialized with the values defined in the constituent library but may also be edited individually In order to select the constituent being modeled and its corresponding parameters or revert to default values use the Constituent Alternative Editor Constituent Source Section Any node element i e tank reservoir or junction can serve as a source for a chemical constituent To turn a node into
369. nts Making the Cholesky factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps y Eb x L 1 y The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is preferred since performance gains are considerable The algorithm utilized in this software solves the system of equations using a variant of Cholesky s method which has been optimized to reduce fill in of the factorization matrix thus minimizing storage and reducing overall computational effort B 1 9 Pump Theory Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems Pumps add energy or head gains to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differentials within the system A pump is defined by its characteristic curve which relates the pump head or the head added to the system to the flow rate This curve is indicative of the ability of the pump to add head at different flow rates To model behavior of the pump system additional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be operating The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the system curve representing the static lift headlosses due to friction and minor losses When these curves are superimposed the operating point can easily be found This is shown in the figure below Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 273 System Operating Point
370. nts in the plan view Color coding is useful in performing quick diagnostics on the network If at any time during this lesson the program asks Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N A click NO For this lesson you will use the system from Lesson 3 saved as MyLesson3 in the Wtrc Lesson directory If you did not complete Lesson 3 you may use the file lesson4 wcd lesson4 dwg in AutoCAD After you have opened the file select File Save As from the pull down menu Type the filename MyLesson4 and click Save Select File Project Summary and change the Project Title to Lesson 4 Reporting Results Part 1 Reports 1 Select the 2000 l min 3 hour fire flow at J 6 EPS Scenario from the Scenario toolbar Click the GO button to open the run dialog and click GO to analyze this Scenario 2 When the Results dialog appears notice that the Results report can be saved to a file or printed using the buttons in the top left corner This report displays key system characteristics on a formatted page In an EPS analysis such as this one these characteristics are displayed Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 49 for each time increment If there were any warnings or problems they would also appear here Click Close Note that the results for the current Scenario the Scenario appearing in the list box in the toolbar can be accessed at any time by clicking the GO button in the toolbar and then cli
371. nual Version 1 1 Drinking Water Research Division Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory USEPA Cincinnati Ohio Jan 1994 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 285 B 3 6 Constituent Transport Equations Assuming constant flow and velocity over a time step the concentration within link i at any point x in the positive flow direction and time t is given by the mass conservation differential equation Cit dC x t at 2 RIC x t 0 Where Ci x t Concentration of substance in liquid at the distance x from the start node of the link i mg I x Distance in the link measure from the start node of the link positive in the flow direction m ft ui Mean flow velocity of the water m s ft s R C x D Reaction rate function 1 s J The reaction rate function is typically a first order rate function To obtain a general solution of the basic transport equation it is necessary to introduce an analytical time step t which serves as the interval of analysis over which substance ujT concentrations are advected within link i This advection distance is expressed as This time step is referred to as the water quality time step At nodes the concentrations are determined by mass conservation assuming complete nodal mixing The concentration at node k for each outgoing link i with j representing each incoming link at node k is given by Y Q C L t QC Lo J C 0 t Cy t Where C t
372. o the Print Preview window for more information To access the Predefined Reports select Report from the menu bar and select the report of your choice 11 3 2 Element Details Report The Detailed Reports dialog allows you to print detailed reports for all elements or any subset of elements in the system Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results 191 11 3 3 11 3 4 From the Detailed Reports dialog select elements to be printed by holding down the Shift key or the Control key while clicking with the mouse Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection behavior Holding down the Control key will provide single element selection behavior Alternately use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog This provides more powerful selection functions When you are satisfied click the Print button to output the selected reports You can graphically select elements that you would like to print before opening the Detailed Reports dialog The selected elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print This is done by holding down the Shift key and selecting elements or by dragging a window around the area of interest You can print a detailed report for a single element without using the Detailed Reports dialog Simply open the element editor for the desired element and click the Report button To access the Detailed Reports dialog select Report Element Details from the menu bar Ele
373. o the drawing pane and right click to select Reservoir from the pop up menu Left click once on the approximate location of reservoir R 1 see diagram above You will be prompted to set up the project Click Yes to open the Project Setup Wizard The remaining commands are for both Stand Alone and AutoCAD modes You would proceed with these instructions after completing the instructions above for either the AutoCAD specific instructions or the Stand Alone specific instructions 1 Inthe Project Setup Wizard title the project Lesson 1 Steady State Analysis and click the Next button 2 Choose your desired settings For this lesson use the program default values Click the Next button 3 Select the Scaled radio button located under the Drawing Scale option Set the horizontal scale to 1 mm 4000 mm and the vertical scale to 1 mm 400 mm Stand Alone users only Select the Browse button next to the Background Filename box Select Lesson1 dxf from the Lesson folder and click Open All users Click the Next button to continue 4 The element prototype buttons allow you to set default values for each element type We will use the default prototype values in this lesson so click the Finished button Part 2 Laying Out the Network Users in AutoCAD mode have already completed the first step below and should proceed to step 2 1 To draw the skeletonized water distribution network shown previously select the Layout E
374. o the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements supplemental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unnecessary model nodes 196 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results These spot elevations have no effect on the network model but can better define the J terrain surface throughout the drawing The result is that elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours can be generated with more detail This gives the modeler a better prediction of the system s behavior even in areas where the model has been skeletonized Because spot elevations are not included in the actual piping network there is very little information in the spot elevation editor The data consists of the following e Spot Elevation Input Data General characteristics defined by the user e Spot Elevation Calculated Results Values calculated from the model results To access the Spot Elevation editor Stand Alone Double click the spot elevation you wish to edit or right click the element and select Edit from the drop down menu AutoCAD R14 Pick the Select tool and click the spot elevation you wish to edit or if the Right Click Context Menu is selected you can right click the element and select Edit from the drop down menu AutoCAD 2000 Pick the Select tool and click the spot elevation you wish to edit or select the element and select Edit from the drop down menu Spot Elevation Input Data Spot Elevations h
375. ode to be analyzed as part of another junction node s fire flow analysis move it to another Zone Minimum System Pressure Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal If a node s pressure anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow fire flow will not be satisfied A fire flow analysis may be configured to ignore this constraint Fire Flow Calculation Results After performing a fire flow analysis the following calculation results are available for each junction node in the fire flow selection set Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints Whether or not this junction node meets the fire flow constraints 130 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors e Available Fire Flow Amount of flow available for fire protection while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints e Calculated Residual Pressure Calculated pressure at the junction node during the fire flow withdrawal e Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same zone as this junction e Minimum Zone Junction Label of the junction corresponding to the minimum zone pressure e Calculated Minimum System Pressure Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the system e Minimum System Junction Label of the junction corresponding to the minimum system pressure 6 2 7 Cost Tab Pressure Pipe Cost Tab This t
376. odifications to the network topology itself e g additions and deletions of network elements 8 2 3 Scenario Manager The Scenario Manager allows you to create edit and manage scenarios There is one built in default scenario the Base scenario If you wish you only have to use this one scenario However you can save yourself time by creating additional scenarios that reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your calculations There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create The Scenario Manager window is divided into four sections 1 The three buttons that run across the top of the window e Tutorial Open the tutorials e Close Close the Scenario Manager e Help Open the on line help 2 The series of five buttons running along the left side of the window e Scenario Wizard Open the Scenario Wizard which walks you step by step through the creation of a new scenario e Scenario Management Offers a menu of options for creating editing and managing scenarios Add Prompts for a name then creates a new child or base scenario If you create a child scenario it will be based on the scenario that is currently highlighted Edit Open the Scenario Editor dialog for the scenario that is currently highlighted Rename Rename an existing scenario Note this invokes an in place editor in the tree view of the available scenarios Make the d
377. odology is applicable to any fluid system that has the following characteristics e Steady or gradually varying turbulent flow e Incompressible Newtonian single phase fluids e Full closed conduits pressure systems Examples of systems with these characteristics include potable water systems fire protection systems well pumps and raw water pumping The WaterCAD algorithms are anticipated to grow and evolve to keep pace with the state of the practice in water distribution and water quality modeling Because the mathematical solution methods are being continually extended this manual deals primarily with the fundamental principles underlying these algorithms and focuses less on the details of the implementation of the algorithms Acknowledgements WaterCAD was designed developed and programmed by Haestad Methods staff of Software Engineers and Civil Engineers This program is intended to represent the latest technology in Windows based Water Distribution Analysis and Design WaterCAD s numerical computations are based on research conducted by the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA Drinking Water Research Division Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory its employees and consultants As a result WaterCAD will generate results consistent with the EPA computer program EPANET 1 Pressure Network Hydraulics Network Hydraulics Theory In practice pipe networks consist not only of pipes but of miscellaneous fittings
378. of an element for a steady state analysis or the first time step in an extended period simulation The initial settings for a pipe pump or valve can be set using the elemental dialogs or a table Initial Water Quality The starting conditions at a node determined by age trace or constituent concentration The initial value will be slightly different depending on the analysis type Interpolate Estimating a value of an unknown point between two known points assuming a linear relationship See also extrapolate Invert Lowest point of a pipe opening Sometimes referred to as the flow line Label The unique name by which an element will be referenced in reports error messages and tables Length The distance from a pipe s From Node to its To Node according to the scaled length of the pipe To enter an overriding length click the User Defined Length field and type in your desired length value Manning s Coefficient Roughness coefficient used in Manning s Formula Glossary 315 Material The selection of a pipe s construction material This material will be used to determine a default value for the pipe s roughness Maximum Elevation The highest allowable water surface elevation in a tank If the tank fills above this point it will automatically shut off from the system Maximum Extended Operating Point The absolute maximum discharge at which a pump can operate with zero head being ad
379. of the selected alternative all alternatives or the selected alternative and all of its children in that hierarchy You will not be allowed to merge or delete an alternative that is referenced by one or more scenarios When you attempt to perform the operation you will be provided with a list of the scenarios that reference the alternative scenario s that references the child alternative that you are merging from and make them reference the parent alternative that you are merging to Use the Scenario Manager window to edit the scenario s and the Alternatives tab to make the scenario point to the parent alternative If you are attempting to merge an alternative that is referenced you will need to edit the To access the Alternative Manager dialog select Analysis Alternatives from the pull down menu Alternatives Editor The Alternatives Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative These records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative is active The tables are a great way to edit data They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single alternative They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need There is one editor for each alternative type Each type of editor works basically the same and allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system The first column contains check boxes which indicate the records that
380. og Profiles will be exported to an insertion point below the current drawing extents 11 6 4 Walk A walk is a collection of nodes and pipes that follows a specific path through the network It can include any type of network element but cannot include annotations or spot elevations A walk is a non branching path through the network and can only be extended at either end Pipes cannot be added along the midsection of the walk Likewise elements in the midsection of the walk cannot be deselected without first deselecting all of the elements between one end and the undesired element A walk cannot double back on itself so once a pipe has been selected it cannot be included elsewhere in the walk 11 6 5 Walk Selection After clicking the Select From Drawing button to define a walk you will be returned to the drawing editor If there are already elements in the current walk they will be displayed in a highlighted mode Otherwise you need to begin a new walk by simply clicking any pipe The pipe and its end nodes will then be highlighted Continue clicking pipes to add them to the walk or click highlighted end pipes to remove them from the current walk Once you have selected a walk press the Escape button on your keyboard or right click with the mouse and select Done from the context menu 11 7 Scenario Comparison The data calculated in different scenarios can be compared through the use of the Scenario Comparison w
381. oject File As window appears so that you can enter a new file name for your project Select the appropriate drive and directory where you want to save the project Enter the file name Then click OK Follow the Project Setup Wizard To create a new project in AutoCAD 1 2 Select File New from the pull down menu The Create Project File As window appears so that you can enter a new file name for your project Select the drive and directory where you want to save the project Enter the file name Then click OK Follow the Project Setup Wizard Opening an Existing Project To open an existing project 1 Do one of the following From the toolbar click the Open button or At the Welcome dialog click Open Existing Project then click OK or Choose File Open from the pull down menus The Open File window appears Select the appropriate drive and directory where the project is located The program displays all the projects stored in that directory Select the desired file name and click Open or OK 90 Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 3 4 3 1 Saving a Project To save an existing project to disk 1 Select File Save from the pull down menus The Save Project File As dialog will appear If the project has been previously saved the command will execute Otherwise the next two steps must be completed 2 Select the drive and directory where you want the
382. om Pipe attributes e Pumps and valves exported to the Links Table will not be restored to the model If the user tries to import a Link Table containing pumps and valves the items in the table will be created as new pipes of zero length and at coordinates of 0 0 e The import of pump and valve tables will work as expected with the exception of the items listed above Modeling Tips This section presents some FAQ s related to modeling water distribution networks with WaterCAD Also please keep in mind that Haestad Methods offers workshops in North America and abroad throughout the year These workshops cover these modeling topics and others in depth The following modeling tips are presented in this chapter e Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank e Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well e Parallel Pipes e Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series e Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks e Modeling Fire Hydrants e Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main e Creating a System Head Curve e Top Feed Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank e Variable Speed Pump Maintaining a Constant Downstream Pressure Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank Hydropneumatic tanks can be modeled using a regular tank element and converting the tank pressures into equivalent water surface elevations Based on the elevation differences the tank s cross sectional area can then be determined 254 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions A 2 2 For example consid
383. on defines the following parameters e Element Type Indicates whether the valve type is PRV PSV PBV FCV or TCV e Diameter Inside diameter of the valve Used to calculate the velocity through the valve and a corresponding minor loss when a minor loss coefficient is entered e Minor Loss Coefficient Coefficient used to model any minor loss associated with the valve for the specified valve diameter when the valve is fully open Click the ellipsis button to define composite minor losses The valve is fully open in the following two cases The valve status is set to Inactive The valve status is set to Active and the hydraulic conditions are such that the valve is fully open J Minor loss data is not required for Throttle Control Valves TCVs because the minor losses are already accounted for by the valve s primary purpose Q 5 To change the type of a valve use the element morphing feature of WaterCAD Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 123 Initial Setting Section The initial conditions describe the valve s behavior at the start of the analysis These conditions include e Valve Status A valve can have several different status conditions Active throttling opening or closing depending on system pressures and flows Closed no flow under any conditions Inactive wide open with no regulation e Settings Hydraulic Grade Pressure For Pressure Reducing Pressure Su
384. on of data e g SewerCAD dry weather unit loads StormCAD watershed areas and rational C coefficients and WaterCAD junction demands cannot be written to a single record and are therefore not exported to the database However if these collections only contain a single item that single item will be transferred to and from the database during export and import respectively cannot be read with Office 97 If you want to use Office 97 you need to use a text editor to edit the HAESTAD INI file located in your HAESTAD directory and replace the line By default the Standard Database Export creates Office 2000 Access files These files ConnectionDatabaseFormat 0 With ConnectionDatabaseFormat 3 Basically a value of 3 results in the program creating an Office 97 Access file whereas a value of 0 will have the program generate an Office 2000 Access file Use the File Import Database menu item to import data using the standard database connections Use the File Export Database menu item to export data using the standard database connections Use the File Synchronize Database Connections menu item to view or edit the standard database connections Database Connection Editor The Database Connection Editor is used for defining the group of table links to be included in the connection The Database Connection Editor is a tabbed dialog with tabs for Database Connection and Synchronization Options There are three standard operation but
385. ons Flow Balanced Fire Fh Fire Pressure Pressure Zone Pressure System E Constraints Flow kPa kPa Junction kPa Junction l min a 6 of 6 elements displayed Synchronized Units 2 In the Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints column all of the boxes are checked except for the nodes that you did not analyze because the specified needed flow of 3 000 l min was available and minimum pressures were exceeded For nodes J 1 and J 3 pressures were computed for the Fire Flow Upper Limit of 6 000 l min because none ever dropped below specified minimum pressures Nodes J 2 and J 4 reached their minimum residual pressures at flows slightly below the maximum of 6 000 l min Notice also that the report contains the Minimum System Pressure excluding the current node being flowed and its location 3 When you are finished reviewing the report click Close in the WaterCAD Fire Flow Report dialog and save your file as Mylesson5 Another good way to review an automated fire flow analysis is to use color coding If you have a situation where all nodes do not meet the pressure constraints for the needed fire flow you can color code these nodes in the plan view for easy identification See Lesson 4 Part 6 in this chapter for more information on color coding Lesson 6 Water Quality Analysis In conjunction with Extended Period simulations WaterCAD is capable of performing a water quality analysis to compu
386. op down list to choose the desired alternative If you would like to create a new alternative click the New button You will be asked to name the new alternative and the Alternatives Editor will open The Scenario Wizard will walk you through all of the steps required to create a new scenario If you are unsure how to specify the alternatives that you would like to work with we recommend that you use this wizard Remember when this scenario is active the alternatives that you specify here will be active Changes that you make to your model will be made in these alternatives When you calculate this scenario these are the alternatives that will be used This tab will take on a different appearance depending on whether you are editing a Base scenario or Child scenario When editing a base scenario the checkbox column described above will not be present You can use the ellipsis button located to the right of each drop down list to access the associated Alternatives Manager Scenario Editor Calculation Tab This dialog is the control center for each network analysis This program is capable of performing both a Hydraulic Analysis and a Water Quality Analysis Also Extended Period Analysis which considers time variable hydraulic demands and constituent source concentrations is available Patterns are used to define the time variable aspects of these system loads Also contributing to Chapter 8 Scenarios a
387. or Tanks The Tank Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various water surface elevations hydraulic grades in your tank at the beginning of the simulation Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pressure Valves The Pressure Valve Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for pressure valves Pressure Breaker Pressure Reducer and Pressure Sustaining Valves The fields for each record are as follows e Valve Status Indicates whether the pressure valve is initially Active Inactive wide open or Closed e Hydraulic Grade Pressure Initial setting for the valve Depending on the input mode the setting is entered and displayed in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure Initial Settings Alternative Editor for FCVs The FCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for Flow Control Valves The fields for each record are as follows e Valve Status Indicates whether the FCV is initially Active Inactive or Closed e Discharge Initial flow setting for the valve Initial Settings Alternative Editor for TCVs The TCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for Throttle Control Valves The fields for each record are as follows e Valve Status Indicates whether the TCV is initially Active Inactive or Closed e Headloss Coefficient Initial headloss coefficient for
388. ors 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Element Editors 6 1 1 Pressure Pipe Editor 6 1 2 Pressure Junction Editor 6 1 3 Tank Editor 6 1 4 Reservoir Editor 6 1 5 Pump Editor 6 1 6 Valve Editor Element Editors Tabs 6 2 1 General Tab 6 2 2 Demand Tab 6 2 3 Section Tab 6 2 4 Controls Tab 6 2 5 Quality Tab 6 2 6 Fire Flow Tab 6 2 7 Cost Tab 6 2 8 User Data Tab 6 2 9 Messages Tab Prototypes User Data Extension 6 4 1 User Data Extension Dialog Zone Manager 6 5 1 Zone Dialog Chapter 7 FlexTables 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Tables Table Manager 7 2 1 Creating New Tables 7 2 2 Editing Tables 7 2 3 Duplicating Tables 7 24 Deleting Tables 7 2 5 Renaming Tables 7 2 6 Resetting Tables Table Setup Dialog 7 3 1 Table Type 7 3 2 Available Table Columns 7 3 3 Selected Table Columns 7 3 4 Table Manipulation Buttons 7 3 5 Allow Duplicate Columns Table Window 7 4 1 Editing Tables 1 4 2 Sorting Filtering Tables 7 4 3 Table Customization TAA Table Output Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 8 1 Alternatives 8 1 1 Alternatives Manager 8 1 2 Alternatives Editor 8 1 3 Physical Alternative 8 1 4 Demand Alternative 111 112 112 112 113 113 114 114 115 115 124 124 125 127 128 130 131 132 132 133 133 136 136 139 139 139 140 140 140 140 140 141 141 141 141 142 142 142 142 143 144 145 147 149 149 151 152 154 Table of Contents 8 2 8 1 5 Ini
389. orth Note that the Stand Alone menu items do not include panning since it can be accomplished simply by using the scroll bars adjacent to the drawing pane In Stand Alone mode you are provided with the following tools e Zoom In Enlarge the current view of the drawing Toolbar Button Ql Shortcut Key Keypad e Zoom Out Reduce the current view of the drawing Shortcut Key Keypad Toolbar Button e Zoom Window Activate the user defined zoom tool This tool enables you to select the corners of the area within the drawing pane that you wish to enlarge fell e Zoom Extents Reset the drawing zoom factor such that all elements are displayed in the drawing pane Toolbar Button e Zoom Previous Return the drawing pane to the most recent view Toolbar Button a e Zoom Center Open the Zoom Center dialog which enables you to specify the central coordinates and zoom factor to change the view in the drawing pane Toolbar Button e Aerial View Enable or disable the Aerial View window This window allows you to display a second view of the drawing at a larger scale e Quick View Enable or disable the Quick View window which allows you to quickly view input and output data for any element Toolbar Button e Toolbars Standard Toggle the display of the Standard toolbar at the top of the window which provides shortcuts to the most commonly used commands Chapter 2 WaterCAD Ma
390. osts or click the B button in the analysis toolbar Cost Alternatives Manager The Cost Alternatives manager dialog allows you to edit create and manage your cost alternatives It also gives you more advanced capabilities such as merging alternatives and creating child alternatives On the right side of the dialog are a number of buttons that provide functions for managing the alternatives These buttons are identical to the buttons found in the Alternatives Manager dialog See the Alternatives manager topic in the Scenarios Alternatives chapter for a descriptions of these button s function To access the Cost Alternatives manager dialog select Analysis Alternatives from the pull down menu and select the Cost tab or click on the Cost Alternatives button in the Cost Manager Unit Cost Functions A unit cost function is a description of the relationship between an element attribute and the unit cost for that element For example it might describe the relationship between pipe diameter and the cost per unit length or it could relate the depth of a gravity structure to the unit cost for that structure You can specify the relationship between the unit cost and the value of the attribute as either tabular data or as a formula Tabular Unit Cost Function Relates attribute values to unit costs as a series of data points This is the only way to enter unit cost data for non numeric attributes such as material If the attribute for which you a
391. ot is created e Meal 4 is just like Meal 3 except for the salad The entr e and dessert alternatives are inherited from Meal 3 A Water Distribution Example Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system a single reservoir supplies water by gravity to three junction nodes Appendix C Scenario Management Guide 301 C 14 C 15 Example Water Distribution System Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial settings operational controls water quality and fire flow we are going to focus on the two most commonly changed sets of alternatives demands and physical properties Within these alternatives we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands and pipe diameters Building the Model Average Day Conditions During model construction probably only one alternative from each category is going to be considered This model is built with average demand calculations and preliminary pipe diameter estimates At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives and the hierarchies look like the following showing only the items of interest Average Day 100 gpm 500 gpm 100 gpm Physical Alternative Hierarchy P Pao P P3 o Scenario Hierarchy Demand Alternative Physical Alternative Avg Day Average Day Preliminary Pipes Analyzing Different Demands Maximum Day Conditions In our example the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum d
392. ound all of the objects in the drawing by clicking the upper left and lower right corners then click the right mouse button Click Yes when asked if you wish to set up the project The following commands are for both Stand Alone and AutoCAD modes 1 In the Wizard enter Lesson 7 Polyline to Pipe as the project title click Next and Next again to accept the default settings Make sure that you are set up for a Scaled drawing with a horizontal scale of 1 5000 and a vertical scale of 1 500 Set the three Annotation Multipliers to 2 8 Click Next again 2 In order to minimize your data input later create prototypes for common element characteristics The most common type of pipe in the model you will be creating is 150 mm ductile iron with a C of 130 Make sure these characteristics coincide with the prototype values and click OK 3 Since you have two identical pumps go ahead and set up a prototype for them using the data below Be sure to change the units to l min before entering the discharge values Click OK when you are finished Pump Data Discharge l min Elevation Pump Shutoff 70 0 0 m Type Design Max Operating 4 Create one more prototype this time for the PRV s They both have an elevation of 129 m and an HGL setting of 185 2 m Click OK and then Finished The Polyline to Pipe Wizard now opens For users in Stand Alone mode only 1 Browse to open the file Lesson7 dxf located in th
393. ound color is the default color that is applied to all elements symbols pipes labels and annotations when no color coding is defined These color settings also apply to the Scenario Comparison window but do not apply to the Profile or Graph Plot windows Sticky Tools Available in Stand Alone mode With Sticky Tools disabled the drawing pane cursor will return to the Select tool after creating a node or finishing a pipe run With Sticky Tools enabled the tool does not reset to the Select tool allowing you to continue dropping new elements into the drawing without reselecting the tool The Sticky Tool Palette can be turned on or off to meet your needs and preferences Auto Prompting Auto Prompting allows you to immediately enter data as elements are added to the drawing without interrupting the layout process When Auto Prompting is active the Auto Prompting dialog will immediately appear when you add an element to the drawing From the Auto Prompting dialog you can modify the element s default label and you can access the remaining input data by clicking the associated Edit button Auto Prompting can also be toggled off in this dialog Right Click Context Menu Option in AutoCAD Mode If the Right Click Context Menu option is enabled a right mouse click on a WaterCAD entity in AutoCAD R14 will pop up a context menu for editing or modifying the element this functionality emulates the ability that is available in WaterCAD Stand Alone
394. ound under the Drawing tab in the Tools Options menu 8 If you wish to delete the annotations click the Annotation toolbar button and uncheck any checked boxes Click Next and then Finished Part 6 Color Coding You can also review results in the plan view by color coding the elements based on attributes or ranges of values 56 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Select the Color Coding option under the Tools pull down menu or click the Color Coding button on the toolbar The Color Coding dialog allows you to set the color coding for links nodes or both We will color code by diameter link attribute and pressure node attribute in this example Click on the Link tab and from the Color Coding list box select the Diameter attribute In the table enter values of 150 200 and 1000 mm with colors of red blue and green respectively Color Coding x Link Node m Link Color Coding Attribute HBTEW Eu v Selection Set AllElements El Minimum N A mm Maximum N44 mm m Diameter mm lt Color a mm E E L2 Insert Duplicate Delete Initialize Calculate Range Cancel Help Next click on the node tab and select Pressure from the list box Click the Calculate Range button to get the minimum and maximum values for the variable displayed at the top of the dialog Then click the Initialize button and the model will sele
395. pe consists of an input and an output format The input format is a fixed format that is determined by the regional settings on your computer Whenever you enter information into a Date Time field the information must be entered in the input format If the date or time information is not entered according to the input format then the value will simply revert to the original value The output format is simply a mask that defines the manner in which the date and time information will be displayed It does not affect the way that the date and time information can be entered into a Date Time field The output format can be edited as follows e To create numbers with no leading zeros for single digit days years or months use lowercase d lowercase y or uppercase M e To create numbers with leading zeros for single digit days years or months use lowercase dd lowercase yy or uppercase MM e To create abbreviations for the day year or month use lowercase ddd lowercase yyy or uppercase MMM e To create the full name of the day year or month use lowercase dddd lowercase yyyy or uppercase MMMM If there are characters in the output format that do not map to valid date or time information then the actual value of the character will be displayed For example if you wanted the date to be displayed as June 15 1998 then you would define the format as MMMM d yyyy Since the spaces and comma do not map to any of the date information th
396. pecifics on its use Because the color coding legend is comprised of native entities the built in conversion is unable to automatically remove legend elements In WaterCAD v3 0 and up in AutoCAD mode color coding legends are block inserts If your Cybernet v2 drawing contains legends you must manually edit these out of the drawing When using the C2W utility in AutoCAD 12 or 13 there are certain limitations to the amount of data imported Only Cybernet v2 base data is imported No change records in Cybernet scenarios are supported Cybernet multi point pump curves are not supported The C2W utility converts the pump to a standard three point curve pump This may not be the optimum solution for the multi point curve Validate the points chosen and consider manually entering the multi point data Cybernet demand patterns are not imported However junction node demand type data is imported Use the Pattern Manager to enter the Cybernet Extended Period Simulation GDF curves WaterCAD Cybernet v3 Files Simply open the WaterCAD v3 file or import the WCD file as you normally would in WaterCAD Cybernet v3 The WCD file will be automatically converted to the WaterCAD v4 format Once you save this file in WaterCAD v4 it can no longer be opened in WaterCAD Cybernet v3 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 249 A 1 2 Transitioning from Cybernet v2 This section is intended to offer you some
397. pipe elements during each pass This way you can use the prototyping capabilities to their greatest advantage A little time spent in planning and strategizing a series of individual conversion steps will go a long way toward preventing confusion which could necessitate later re conversions 2 This is an automated batch process that requires some care and attention with respect to The Change Entities to Pipes command is accessed from the Edit Change Entities to Pipes pull down menu Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 245 15 8 15 8 1 15 8 2 Special Considerations Import WaterCAD When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode this command imports a selected WaterCAD data WCD file for use in the current drawing The new project file will now correspond to the drawing name i e CurrentDrawingName WCD Whenever you save changes to the network model through WaterCAD the associated WCD data file is updated and can be loaded into WaterCAD 4 0 or higher To import a WaterCAD model into AutoCAD select File Import WaterCAD Working with Proxies If you open a WaterCAD drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that does not have the WaterCAD application installed you will get an AutoCAD Proxy Information message box This is because the executable logic for managing the AutoCAD entities is not available and the WaterCAD modeling elements are not associated with the WaterCAD native database WaterCAD prox
398. ple to open an existing AutoCAD file the equivalent of selecting File Open from the pull down menus you can simply type the command OPEN at the AutoCAD command line Many of AutoCAD s commands are easy to enter at the command line including accessing drafting tools like LINE and CIRCLE and editing tools like MOVE and ERASE Note that Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 15 2 2 2 2 1 modeling elements can also be manipulated through the AutoCAD command line just as they can be manipulated via the menus or toolbars For more information on the AutoCAD command line please see the AutoCAD documentation WaterCAD Menus Although the toolbars and shortcut keys provide quick and easy access to commonly used features the pull down menu system provides much more comprehensive access to WaterCAD s properties and behaviors Since toolbar buttons and shortcut keys do not exist for all of these features the menus are a logical choice for exploring all areas of WaterCAD This section will introduce you to many of the things you can do with the menus in WaterCAD and show you how you can access these features including the toolbar buttons and shortcut keys that are available Commands are grouped under several menus which are nearly identical between Haestad Methods products This makes any Haestad Methods product look very familiar once you already know one The menu system for WaterCAD consists of the following selections e File
399. pment of hydraulic and water quality models It is a powerful feature for tweaking the two most commonly used parameters during model calibration junction demands and pipe roughness One of the first steps performed during a calculation is the transformation of the input data into the required format for the numerical analysis engine If a factor and operator are present in the calibration fields when the GO button is clicked the factor is used during this transformation This does not permanently change the value of the input data but allows you to experiment with different calibration factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data The Calibration section contains the following data 170 Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities e Demand Use this calibration field to temporarily adjust the individual demands at all junction nodes in the system that have demands for the current scenario For example assume node J 10 has two demands a 100 gpm fixed pattern demand and a 200 gpm residential pattern demand for a total baseline demand of 300 gpm If you enter a demand calibration multiplier of 1 25 the input to the numerical engine will be 125 gpm and 250 gpm respectively for a total baseline demand of 375 gpm at node J 10 If you use the Set operator to set the demands to 400 the demand will be adjusted proportionally to become 133 and 267 gpm for a total baselin
400. poses If a factor and operator are present in the calibration fields when the GO button is clicked the factor is used during this calculation This does not permanently change the value of the input data but allows you to experiment with different calibration factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data To permanently change the value of the input data select Apply 5 Optionally click the Options button to verify general algorithm parameters used to perform Hydraulic and Water Quality calculations 6 Set the Validate toggle On or click the Check Data button to ensure that your input data does not contain errors 7 Click on the GO button to start the calculations The Check Data button performs a quick check of your input data and displays any errors found It is recommended to run this function before the actual run of the calculations Note however that the data is automatically checked when you perform the calculations if the Validate toggle is On 172 Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 9 6 Fire Flow Analysis One of the goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate capacity to fight fires WaterCAD s powerful fire flow analysis capabilities can be used to determine if the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining various pressure constraints Fire flows can be computed for a single node a group of selec
401. project located The program displays all the projects stored in that directory 3 Enter the file name under which you wish to save the file Project Summary The Summary dialog provides a way to enter a Project Title the name of the Project Engineer and any significant Comments for example the project revision history The Date field defaults to the current day To change any portion of the date click the item to change i e month field then use the up and down arrows to set the date The Project Title and Project Engineer will print in the footer of the Reports To access the Project Summary dialog select File Project Summary from the pull down menu Options Global Options The Global Options dialog allows you to customize the following options for this application e Welcome dialog Stand Alone mode only e Unit System e Enter Key Behavior e Background Foreground Color Stand Alone mode only e Sticky Tool Palette Stand Alone mode only e Auto Prompting e Right Click Context Menu This toggle exists only in AutoCAD R14 that option is automatically On in AutoCAD 2000 To access the Global Options tab select Tools Options from the pull down menus Welcome Dialog The Welcome dialog appears when the program is started and provides easy access to common tasks you may want to perform when you first start using the program The following options are available e Tutorials e Create New Project e Open Existing P
402. prompt type JUNCTION C JUNCTION DWG and press enter 3 At this point the block has been redefined and you can cancel this command 4 Repeat these steps for the other named blocks Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Redefining Blocks Advanced DXF Import Techniques To import the network DXF file into an existing AutoCAD drawing file you will have to perform a couple of preliminary steps 1 In your existing drawing at the AutoCAD Command prompt type regapp WTRC and press Enter This will register the program application ID Be sure to include the parenthesis 2 Define blocks named HMI_CKV HMI_CSRC HMI_FARW HMI PS JUNCTION TANK RESERVOIR PUMP PRV PBV PSV FCV and TCV You are now ready to import a WaterCAD DXF file into your existing AutoCAD drawing To save time you can perform the above steps in a new AutoCAD drawing file and save it with the name WaterCAD DWG Nov instead of performing the above steps simply insert this new drawing into your existing drawing file immediately before importing a network DXF file Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Importing DXF files Notes Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 237 Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version WaterCAD features optional support for AutoCAD R14 and AutoCAD 2000 integration You can determine if you have purchased AutoCAD functionali
403. pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and estimating pump size but should not be used for any analysis for which more accurate results are desired lets Whenever possible avoid using constant power or design point pumps They are often enticing because they require less work on behalf of the engineer but they are much less _ accurate than a pump curve based on several representative points J It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe immediately downstream of a pump because pumps have built in check valves that prevent reverse flow Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 275 B 1 11 B 2 B 2 1 Valve Theory There are several types of valves that may be present in a pressurized system These valves have different behaviors and different responsibilities but all valves are used for automatically controlling parts of the system They can be opened closed or throttled to achieve the desired result Check Valves CV s Check valves are used to maintain flow in only one direction by closing when the flow begins to reverse When the flow is in the specified direction of the check valve it is considered to be fully open Check valves are added to the network on a pipe element Flow Control Valves FCV s A flow control valve limits the flow rate through the valve to a specified value in a specified direction These valves are commonly found in areas where a water district has contract
404. r and Tank tabs in the Cost Alternative editor contain the data associated with the cost estimating for each nodal element as described below e Include Element in Cost Calculation Toggle allowing you to estimate the cost of only part of the network Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 159 8 1 12 8 2 8 2 1 e Total Fixed Cost Cost of this element resulting from any fixed cost as defined in the Fixed Cost Table accessed by double clicking in the Fixed Cost Description field e Fixed Cost Description Click on this field for a button accessing the Fixed Cost Table The button is labeled as Simple or Composite when there are more than one fixed cost itsem for this element User Data Alternative The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Extension for each of the network element types The User Data Alternative editor contains a tab for each type of network element Scenarios A Scenario contains all the input data calculation options results and notes associated with a set of calculations A set of calculations may include a Hydraulic a Fire Flow or Water Quality Calculation and a Cost Analysis calculation run Scenarios let you set up an unlimited number of What If situations for your model and then modify compute and review your system under those conditions as often as you wish You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives submit
405. r and the minimum level To mimic this behavior this software will calculate the inactive volume and display it in the tank data upon import of the file When using this software it is important to remember that zero inactive volume means zero inactive volume and not some internally computed value A 1 4 Importing KYpipe Data This program supports the import of KYpipe 1 0 2 0 and 3 0 data sets If the data set does not include geometry data all nodes will be assigned a coordinate of 0 0 This has no effect on the hydraulic state of the model Pipe lengths will not be computed based on the coordinates of the end nodes but will be taken directly from the KYpipe data set This program only supports the import of the pipes and nodes of a KYpipe model You must insert pumps valves and tanks into the current project A 1 5 Importing Spot Elevations A series of spot elevations can be imported from an ASCII text file which might be generated from a survey data recorder or another software program These ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations such as the label coordinates and elevation The fields in the text file are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas A 1 6 Exporting Spot Elevations All of the spot elevations in the current project can be exported to an ASCII text file from which they can be brought into a spreadsheet word processor or other program T
406. r is set to current in your AutoCAD drawing 15 3 2 Select Text Style When running in AutoCAD mode this dialog appears when you double click the text style name current by default in the Text Style column of the Labels and Annotation tabs of the Element Properties dialog This is accessed by selecting Tools Element Properties from the pull down menu It displays a list of the available text styles and their properties from the current AutoCAD drawing Click the appropriate field to select a text style The current option will use whatever text style is set to current in your AutoCAD drawing Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 241 15 4 15 4 1 15 4 2 15 4 3 Working with Elements Edit Element In AutoCAD mode this menu selection will open an element editor for any specific element Select Edit Edit Element then select an element or type L at the command line for a list of elements to select from This command is also available by choosing the Select tool then right clicking the drawing pane The Edit Element command works with the current selection to allow you to generate filtered reports Refer to Selecting Elements AutoCAD Mode for more information on working with selections Deleting Elements In AutoCAD mode this command removes all elements in the current selection Refer to Selecting Elements AutoCAD Mode for more information on working with selections Modifying Elemen
407. r small a drawing appears on the screen Zooming is helpful when you want to enlarge the display to see the drawing s details or to reduce the display to see an Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 105 5 4 1 entire drawing Zooming does not change the actual size of the drawing only the size of the current view You can zoom by doing one of the following 1 From the View pull down menu choose Zoom In Enlarge the view of the drawing Zoom Out Decrease the view of the drawing Zoom Window Choose the portion of the drawing to fit in the window by drawing a box around it Zoom Extents Bring all elements in the drawing into view Zoom Previous Return to the most recent view of the drawing Zoom Center Center the location of specific coordinates within the drawing pane 2 Use the toolbar buttons Zoom Extents aj Zoom In E Zoom Out fell Zoom Window a Zoom Previous You can use the Plus key and the Minus key on the numeric keyboard as a shortcut for zooming in and out respectively only in Stand Alone mode The previous zooms are maintained in a stack so it is possible to zoom and pan to different portions of the drawing in sequence then recall those zooms in reverse sequence Zoom Center The Zoom Center dialog provides you with a quick way to zoom to any area of your drawing This feature is useful if you want to start laying out a network a
408. r this example Head ft Discharge gpm 207 90 0 127 05 558 50 82 800 A 2 8 Creating a System Head Curve A system head curve is a graph of the increase in head across a system as flow increases The curve can be used to find an appropriate sized pump for a system or to find a pump s operating point The operating point is at the intersection of the system head and pump head curves Pump and System Head Curve Head Pump Head System Head Flow To create a system head curve you must first replace your pump with two nodes with a gap between them as shown below Model Modification for Creating a System Curve Before o _a_ After Outflow Inflow Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 259 A 2 9 Next apply a demand to the node that would be the suction side of the pump and an inflow to the node that would be the discharge side of the pump An inflow can be applied to a node by changing the demand in the Type column of the Demand table to inflow Now run the model After running the model click the suction side node and record the Hydraulic Grade Then click the discharge side node and record the Hydraulic Grade The difference between the two is the change in head at that flow Repeat the above steps to find the change in head for several different flows Then graph all of the points to create the system head curve Top Feed Bottom Gravity Discharge T
409. r to a slot machine rolling different symbols in and out of each position Rather than several similar scenarios each holding onto individually adjusted data they can instead each reference some of the same alternatives just as several slot machine combinations can show the same symbol This 250 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions not only allows for far more flexibility it also greatly reduces the amount of data that is handled and improves accuracy Inheritance is another attribute of WaterCAD v4 s scenario management that adds a level of functionality that has never existed before In Cybernet v2 each scenario essentially inherited data from the base model unless a specific change was made As mentioned above this is fine for individual changes but it falls apart for subsequent changes Consider for example a system that is to have pipes replaced in phases Phase I changes inherit from the base model but then what happens for Phase II Repeat all of the changes from Phase I and add the changes for Phase I And then again for Phase III It is too easy to overlook a change and make simple typographical errors In WaterCAD V4 there is no limit to the extent of inheritance that could exist To follow the example given above Phase II simply inherits its data from Phase I and then has whatever changes are specific to Phase II rehabilitation Likewise Phase III inherits from Phase II and so on Best of all if something cha
410. re supplying the cost data is numeric then values between the data points that you enter will be linearly interpolated If the unit cost is requested for an attribute value that falls outside of the range of data that you supplied in the table the model will assume that the unit cost is equal to the unit cost at the most extreme point closest to the value that was requested For example if the following points had been entered 8 in 30 ft and 12 in 40 ft and the unit cost was requested for a 16 in diameter pipe the value returned would be 40 ft When a cost calculation is performed you will be warned about all elements whose unit cost falls outside of the range of data that you supplied Formula Unit Cost Function Represents the unit cost as a function of the selected numeric attribute of the following form Cost d a x c gt Where Cost Linear cost of the pipe local currency m local currency ft x Selected attribute unit depends on the type of attribute a b c d Parameters you specify units depend on local currency and the type of attribute 182 Chapter 10 Cost Estimating For certain values such as when x is less than c and b is not an integer this equation will J be invalid Under these conditions the unit cost returned by the function will be zero Unit Cost Functions Manager You can add delete and edit the Unit Cost Functions for your project through this manager You will be able to a
411. re to synchronize in from a database where your pipe identifier was a numeric value then any changes or additions to the pipes in the model should also use a numeric labeling scheme Select Element Labeling from the Tools menu and remove the appropriate element prefixes before any changes are made to the model Otherwise synchronizing out to the database will yield erroneous results To access the Database Connection Manager select the File Synchronize Database Connections menu item From this dialog there are two ways to get to the Database Connection Editor You can click Add to create a new connection or select Edit to change an existing connection Standard Database Import Export The Database Connection Manager is initialized with four database connections for importing and exporting model data using simple File menu commands These standard connections are as follows 1 Project Export SI Used for the File Export Database command when the global unit system is set to System International 214 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 2 Project Export US Used for the File Export Database command when the global unit system is set to US Customary 3 Project Import SI Used for the File Import Database command when the global unit system is set to System International 4 Project Import US Used for the File Import Database command when the global unit system is set to US Customary
412. regardless of whether or not scientific notation is active Rounding Enter a negative number to specify rounding to the nearest power of 10 1 rounds to the nearest 10 2 rounds to the nearest 100 and so on For example if the display precision is set to 3 then a value of 1 234 567 89 would display as 1 235 000 Display precision is for numeric formatting only and will not affect calculation accuracy Scientific Notation Scientific notation displays the number as a real number beginning with an integer or real value followed by the letter e and an integer possibly preceded by a sign Click the field to turn scientific notation on or off A check will appear in the box to indicate that this setting is turned on Scientific Notation is for numeric formatting only and will not affect calculation accuracy Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 97 4 4 5 B 4 4 6 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value Minimum and maximum values are used to control the allowable range for an attribute and are used for validation of user input For example some coefficient values might typically range between 0 09 and 0 20 A frequent user input error is to misplace the decimal point when entering a value If you enter a number that is less than the minimum allowed value a warning message will be displayed This helps reduce the number of input errors You may change this number in cases where you find the de
413. rent units For example to see two Pipe Length columns in a Table one in feet and one in meters 1 Open the Table Manager dialog 2 Click the Table Management button and select New to create a new table 3 Select the pipe table type from the pull down menu list and enter a name for your new table Click OK and you will be taken to the Table Setup dialog where you can customize your table 4 Inthe Table Setup dialog activate the Allow Duplicate Columns check box located at the lower left corner of the dialog 5 Add the Length column to the Selected Columns list The Length column will still appear in the Available Columns list but will be displayed in a lighter color indicating that it has already been selected 6 Add the Length column again 7 Click OK to close the Table Setup dialog From the Table Manager dialog highlight the table you have just created and click OK to open the table 8 Click the Options button at the top of the window and select the Use Local Units menu item to turn Local Units on You will be prompted to verify that you want to use local units Click Yes 9 Right click the first Length column and select Length Properties to set the units in the column to ft Then right click the second Length column to set the units to m Table Output File Export Table to ASCII File You may export the data shown in the Table Window to an ASCII text file in either tab or comma delimite
414. riting critical data or duplicating important information Of course it is possible to directly change data for any scenario but an audit trail of scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for understanding a group of master plan updates 296 Appendix C Scenario Management Guide With Haestad Methods Self contained Scenarios Build Model Base Scenario Single Model File Multiple Sets of Results YESS Calculate Scenario Edit Scenario Review Results ie C 5 Scenario Anatomy Attributes and Alternatives Before we explore scenario management further a few key terms should be defined Attribute An attribute is a fundamental property of an object and is often a single numeric quantity For example the attributes of a pipe include diameter length and roughness Alternative An alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and editing For example a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the network s elements such as elevations sizes and roughness coefficients Scenario A scenario has a list of referenced alternatives which hold the attributes and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system conditions that can be analyzed This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily generate system conditions that
415. rmines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure Each junction has a zone associated with it which can be specified in the junction s input data If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node s fire flow analysis move it to another Zone Minor Loss The field that presents the total minor loss K value for a pipe or valve If an element has more than one minor loss each can be entered individually by clicking the Ellipsis button Mouse Buttons The left mouse button is the primary button for selecting or activating commands The right mouse button is used to activate pop up context menus and help Note that the mouse button functions can be redefined using the Windows Control Panel Needed Fire Flow The flow rate required at a junction to satisfy fire flow demands 316 Glossary Network Element An element that forms part of the network model Annotation elements such as polylines borders and text are not network elements Number The number of parallel conveyance elements in a model Notes The field that allows you to enter text relevant to the model It may include a description of an element a summary of your data sources or any other information of interest ODBC An acronym that stands for Open Database Connectivity ODBC a standard programming interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in r
416. roject e Exit Program Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 91 Unit System Although individual units can be controlled throughout the program you may find it useful to change your entire unit system at once to either the System International Metric unit system or the US Customary English system When you switch to a different unit system you will be asked to confirm this action If you choose YES all data will be displayed in the default unit for the selected system If the file that you are editing in Stand Alone mode is already associated with an AutoCAD drawing be careful not to change the unit systems Otherwise the DWG and the WCD files may become irreversibly out of sync Enter Key Behavior This controls which standard the Enter key follows during editing e CUA Enter Key With this setting the Enter key acts as it normally does for Windows applications It is conforming to Common User Access CUA standards This means that when you press the Enter key it is as though you pressed the default button on the dialog CUA Enter Key is the recommended setting e Tabbing Enter Key With this setting the Enter key behaves the same as the Tab key for editable fields not buttons This means that when you press the Enter key the cursor will move to the next field in the dialog Window Color You can specify the background and foreground colors of the main graphical window in Stand Alone mode The foregr
417. round a certain coordinate or if you know the coordinate of an existing element that you would like to locate To use Zoom Center 1 Select the View Zoom Center menu item 2 Inthe Zoom Center dialog enter the coordinate to which you would like to zoom 3 Select a zoom factor if you would like to increase or decrease the magnification 4 Click OK and the specified coordinate will be located at the center of the drawing 106 Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 5 4 2 Aerial View This feature displays a second view of the drawing at a larger scale in a separate window in order to facilitate zooming panning and locating a small viewing area in the main drawing window It is enabled and disabled from the View menu In Stand Alone mode With Aerial View window enabled by selecting the View Aerial View menu item click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view The area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window Alternately any zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window updates the size and location of the view box in the Aerial View window The Aerial View window contains the following buttons e Zoom Extent Display the entire drawing in the Aerial View window e Zoom In Decrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window e Zoom Out Increase the area displayed in the Aerial View window To resize the view box directly in the Aerial View window simply dra
418. rs 111 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors This chapter presents a detailed look at the input and output data for each type of element used in a WaterCAD project and the way it is organized in the graphical user interface First a description of the elements used to model the water distribution network is provided including prototypes as a way to initialize new model elements with default values Then the chapter addresses the user data extension which allows you to add your own attributes to any element and the zone manager that allows you to group modeling elements into zones used for fire flow analysis The primary component of a WaterCAD project is the network model The element types that are used to form a network are Pressure Pipes Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes pumps valves tanks and reservoirs to each other The only way for water to travel from one node to another is by following a path through one or more pipes Pressure Junctions Junctions are non storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy consumer demands water can enter the network as an inflow or chemical constituents can enter the network Tanks Tanks are a type of storage node The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation Tanks can have either a circular or non circular cross section Reservoirs A reservoir is a type of storage no
419. rt AutoCAD Y use the open command to open the Drawing dwg file from its saved location and use the save as command to save the drawing and model data to a different name 15 3 WaterCAD Element Properties When working in the AutoCAD mode this feature will display a tabbed dialog with grids containing different model element types and their associated properties along with the properties of the element s label and annotation To modify an attribute double click each associated grid cell Setting changes made in this dialog will be used for any newly created elements If the Apply to Existing Figures box is checked modifications made in this dialog are performed on a global basis Property changes will be performed on all elements of the given type To restrict global changes to a certain layer for a particular element type use the current option setting for the attribute of interest To change the layer of an element select Tools Element Properties from the pull down menu 15 3 1 Select Layer When running in AutoCAD mode this dialog appears when you double click the layer name current by default in the Layer column of the Element Properties dialog This is accessed by selecting Tools Element Properties from the pull down menu It displays a list of the available layers and their properties from the current AutoCAD drawing Click the appropriate field to select a layer The current option will use whatever laye
420. rting time step in the hydraulic analysis The contents of the table can be copied to the Windows clipboard to transfer the data to another application such as a spreadsheet or word processing document To copy the data to the Windows clipboard right click the table and select Copy from the context menu KO You can change the reporting time step increment on the Analysis Toolbar To view the Calculation Results Table for a particular element select Table from the Report button on the editor dialog for the desired element 11 3 8 Plan View Report Generate print previews for the plan view of the network for either the current drawing display Current View or the entire drawing extents Full View To generate a preview of the current view or the entire network choose either Report Plan View Current View or Report Plan View Full View respectively from the main menu 11 3 9 Calculation Problem Summary Report After running hydraulic calculations the Results tab of the Scenario Editor is displayed This tab contains a summary of the calculation results or a list of problems encountered with the data in case the calculation could not be completed This report can be previewed before being printed or copied to the clipboard by clicking the Printer button on the Results tab They can also be printed to a text file by clicking the Printer button on the Results tab This Results tab can be accessed from the Scenario Manager report
421. rting your data It also presents the tools available for generating contours profiles and color coding elements based on any attribute Element Annotation Element annotations allow you to display detailed information such as pipe lengths or node ground elevations in your drawing You can add one or more annotations for any type of element in the system Annotations update automatically For example annotations will display newly calculated values and will be refreshed as you change scenarios The annotations and their format are defined by using the Annotation Wizard In Stand Alone mode the annotation format can also be easily modified in the Attribute Annotation dialog that displays when you double click the annotation text in the main view window Pipe annotations can be aligned with the pipes or displayed horizontally depending on the Pipe Text setting specified in the Drawing Options dialog You can control the angle at which the text flips from one side of the pipe to the other reading in the opposite direction to maintain readability when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical By default the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1 5 degrees measured counter clockwise from the vertical You can modify this value by inserting a TextFlipAngle variable in the Haestad ini file located in your Haestad directory under the WTRC section That angle is measured in degrees counter clockwise from the vertical
422. run the calculations the Results tab automatically displays You will notice a green yellow or red light in that tab indicating how successful the computations were This light is not displayed once you close this dialog box Scenario Editor Notes Tab The memo field on the Notes tab allows you to input free form paragraph text that will be associated with the new scenario Use it to make detailed notes about the conditions that the scenario will model Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 167 9 1 Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities WaterCAD provides unmatched modeling capabilities allowing you to model and optimize practically any distribution system aspect including the following operations Hydraulic Analysis Perform a steady state analysis for a snapshot view of the system or perform an extended period simulation to see how the system behaves over time Use any common friction method Hazen Williams Darcy Weisbach or Manning s Take advantage of scenario management to see how your system reacts to different demand and physical conditions including fire and emergency usage Control pressure and flow completely by using flexible valve configurations You can automatically control pipe valve and pump status based on changes in system pressure or based on the time of day Control pumps pipes and valves based on any pressure junction or tank in the distribution system Perform automated fire flow a
423. s udx Select File Import to merge the data extension configurations defined in these files into the current project Importing a udx file will not remove any of the other data extensions defined in your project User data extensions that have the same name as those already defined in your project will not be imported To access the User Data Extension dialog click Tools User Data Extension from the main menu User Field Specification Dialog The properties defining a user data extension can be viewed and edited in the User Field Specification dialog This dialog is composed of two tabs Type Enter the user data specification Notes Enter any notes Type Tab The Type tab is composed of two sections Type Contain fields for entering the label for the user data extension and the data type Format Contain fields for entering information defining the specification for the type of user data extension selected in the Type section Type Section The Type section contains fields for entering the label and data type for the user data extension The name entered in the Label field corresponds with the user data extension field in the User Data tab of the element editor dialog It is also used as the column heading when the user data extension is selected to be reported in a FlexTable If you want the label to be displayed on multiple rows when it is used as a column heading you can use forward slashes to specify the
424. s If you have already annotated your drawing you can remove annotations for a particular type of element by unchecking the corresponding box Annotation Wizard Choosing Attributes The next step s allows you to specify the attributes you wish to add for each element type in the selection set you are annotating Specify the set of elements Choose All Elements from the scroll down list for color coding to be applied to all elements nodes or links in the network or choose a selection set from the scroll down list Click on the ellipses button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection sets For each element type you will be presented with a table where you can specify the attributes you wish to annotate and the mask for each attribute e Attributes This column contains a list of all available attributes for the current element type Click in this field and choose the attributes you wish to annotate by selecting from the list that appears e Mask This column allows you to customize the way the annotation is displayed The parameters v and u represent by the attribute s value and unit respectively By default the mask is setup as follows lt attribute name gt v u The mask can be customized by editing this field eoe When annotating pipe diameters the default mask is Diameter v u The default Y annotation for a 150 millimeter pipe would be Diameter 150 mm By changing t
425. s and Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour Check the Water Quality Analysis box and select the Age radio button i Scenario Age Analysis ioj x Alternatives Calculation O Results Notes M E Steady State Extended Period Start Time 0 00 hr Duration 336 00 hr Hydraulic Time Step 1 00 hr Analysis IV Water Quality Analysis Age C Constituent Trace I Fire Flow Analysis Calibration Demand 1 00 lt None gt x Apply Roughness 0 00 lt None gt z Apply Report Close Help Click the Options button In this dialog you will find options for Maximum Pipe Segments the largest number of pipe segments a pipe can be broken into during a water quality analysis Minimum Pipe Travel Time and a place to enter a user defined Water Quality Time Step You will leave these options set to their default values so click Cancel to exit the dialog box and Close to exit the Scenario Editor You are now ready to run the Scenario Click the Batch Run button and check the box for Age Analysis Click Batch and then Yes at the verification prompt When the run is complete click Close to exit the Scenario Manager Select Age Analysis from the Scenario toolbar list box Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 6 A good way to view changes in water quality attributes over time is to use color coding Click the Color Coding button on the toolbar Under the Link t
426. s above the set value the PRV will close If the head upstream is lower than the valve setting the valve will open fully e Pressure Sustaining Valve PSV PSVs throttle to prevent the upstream hydraulic grade from dropping below a set value If the upstream grade is lower than the set grade the valve will close completely e Pressure Breaker Valve PBV PBVs are used to force a specified pressure head drop across the valve These valves do not automatically check flow and will actually boost the pressure in the direction of reverse flow to achieve a downstream grade that is lower than the upstream grade by a set amount e Flow Control Valve FCV FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate through the valve from upstream to downstream FCVs do not limit the minimum flow rate or negative flow rate flow from the To Pipe to the From Pipe e Throttle Control Valve TCV TCVs are used as controlled minor losses A TCV is simply a valve that has a minor loss associated with it where the minor loss can change in magnitude according to the controls that are implemented for the valve You can change a valve from one type to another by a process called morphing Just click the new valve type on the toolbar and drag the new valve on top of the old one If you are using a valve that does not normally check flow but you would like it to simply set one of the pipes connecting to the valve with a check valve The valv
427. s often referred to as the hydraulic grade line or HGL Energy Grade The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head V 2g This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line or EGL At a lake or reservoir where the velocity is essentially zero the EGL is equal to the HGL as can be seen in the figure below 268 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory EGL and HGL Conservation of Mass and Energy Conservation of Mass At any node in a system containing incompressible fluid the total volumetric or mass flows in must equal the flows out less the change in storage Separating these into flows from connecting pipes demands and storage we obtain Qinat Qourat F AVs Where Qi Qour AVS At Conservation of Energy Total flow into the node m s cfs Total demand at the node m s cfs Change in storage volume m ft Change in time s The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system must balance throughout the loop at each point For pressure networks this means that the total headloss between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is taken between the two points The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed flow direction i e gain head when proceeding opposite the flow and lose head when proceeding w
428. s over an extended period simulation EPS The EPS results generate a sequence of hydraulic steps which are then reformulated into a distribution of hydraulic states encapsulated within discrete volume elements by this software s DVEM algorithm The constituent concentration is determined at each discrete volume element in the system for every quality time step over the full duration of the simulation The assumption is made that there is complete mixing across finite distances such as at a junction node or a short segment of pipe The model for solving the constituent transport problem can be used to predict other water quality parameters including age and trace B 3 1 First Order Reaction Rate Function The first order reaction rate expression is most commonly used for modeling constituent decay and growth processes in batch reactions The first order function has the form R C kG Where R Rate of reaction of constituent mg l s k Reaction rate coefficient of concentration decay negative or growth positive 1 s Ci Concentration of substance in liquid mg 1 The reaction coefficient is zero for conservative substances Assuming this first order reaction rate gives a closed form solution to the general constituent transport equation Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 281 B 3 2 C x t C x ujt the Where t Water quality time step s u Mean flow velocity of the water m s ft s x Distance in the
429. s the four buttons that appear on the right side of the table e Add You can open the User Field Specification dialog by clicking this button Here you can define the properties of the user data extension that you are adding e Edit You can edit an existing user data extension by highlighting the data extension you wish to edit and clicking this button This will open the User Field Specification dialog where you can change the properties for that item e Delete You can delete a data extension by highlighting it and clicking this button If the data extension you are deleting is shared among multiple types of elements it will only be removed from the element type that you are currently editing If you remove a user data extension all the information contained in that field will be permanently removed 134 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors e Share You can open the Existing Fields to Share With dialog by clicking this button Here you can pick which of the attributes already defined for other types of elements you would like to share with the current type of element At the bottom of the User Data Extension dialog is a File button that allows you to import or save a set of user defined data extensions You can save the current configuration of user data extensions for later use by selecting File Save and specifying a file location and name The file extension for the files holding the user data extension configurations i
430. s unit must be the same for every Shapefile in the Shapefile Connection If you wish to import Shapefiles that have different spatial data units create a separate connection for each unit When Missing Connectivity Data As noted in the Table Link Editor topic to create a pipe from an external file it is necessary for a pipe to have a start node and stop node associated with it Typically these connectivity associations are created by synchronizing the Start Node and Stop Node attributes of the pipe Since a Shapefile contains spatial data it is also possible to establish these associations based on the location of nodes relative to the end points of the pipe The following options allow you to customize this behavior e Establish By Spatial Data Check this box to configure the synchronization so that any missing connectivity data start node stop node or both for a pipe will be established from the spatial data if possible e Tolerance This value represents the distance to be searched when trying to locate nodes for establishing connectivity for a pipe All nodes within the tolerance of a pipe s end point will be collected and the closest node will be selected for connection e Create Nodes if None Found Check this box if you would like nodes to be created during the synchronization when no nodes are found within the specified tolerance of a pipe s end point If this box is not checked and no nodes are foun
431. se columns are displayed with a yellow background Table Navigation The Table window supports two modes Table Navigation Mode and Cell Navigation Mode By pressing the F2 key you can toggle between them Table Navigation Mode The Arrow keys Home End PgUp PgDn Ctrl lt arrow gt keys navigate to different cells in a table Table Navigation Mode is the default mode when editing a table To edit within a single cell of a table press the F2 key to switch to cell navigation mode 144 Chapter 7 FlexTables 7 4 2 Cell Navigation Mode Edit Mode In Cell Navigation Mode the Arrow keys Home and End keys navigate within a single cell When cell navigation mode is active the word EDIT will appear on the status pane at the bottom of the window Cell Navigation Mode will automatically terminate when you press any extended key except for Left Right Home End Delete or Backspace Globally Editing Data You can globally change the values of any editable column in a table Right click the column that you wish to globally change and choose the Global Edit menu item For numeric columns 1 Choose the operation to be performed Add Divide Multiply Set or Subtract 2 Enter the value you wish to use 3 Press OK and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect this change 4 For non numeric columns 5 Enter the new value 6 Click OK and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect th
432. se the information given in the PRV Data table below Leave the other parameters set to their default values Click OK to exit the dialog PRV Data General Tab Valve Elevation Diameter Pressure m mm kPa PRV 7 Enter the data for the junctions as outlined in the following Junction Node data table However before entering the demand data right click in the Demand column and select Demand Properties from the pop up menu From the Units list box select l min and click OK Leave all other fields set to their default values Use the procedure described in steps 2 and 3 above to create the new Zone Zone 2 Junction Node Data General Tab Demand Tab Ground Junction Elevation 7 J2 E J4 J5 J6 8 Finally you need to specify user defined lengths for pipes P 1 P 7 P 8 P 9 and P 10 since the reservoir tank PRV and nodes J 5 and J 6 are only shown in approximate locations Select pipe P 1 to open the Pipe dialog Click the box labeled User Defined Length to activate this feature Then enter a value of 01 m in the Length field Because you are using the reservoir and pump to simulate the connection to the main distribution system you want headloss through this pipe to be negligible Therefore the length is very small and the 36 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons diameter will be large Repeat this procedure for pipes P 7 P 8 P 9 and P 10 using the user defined lengths in the table
433. sed in conjunction with the Prototype step to allow you to convert your drawing in multiple passes It is recommended that you process your drawing prior to performing the import If your drawing contains layers that you do not wish to import turn them off from within AutoCAD and they will be ignored during the import process Polyline Conversion Problem Dialog This feature is present in stand alone mode only This dialog displays the reason that a polyline was not converted after running the Polyline to Pipe Wizard Drawing Preview Use the Preview button to view the elements in your DFX file that will be converted Next to the Preview button is a checkbox labeled Only include elements that will be converted Turn the toggle on to preview the entities that will be converted The entities to be converted are based on the settings you specified in the Polyline to Pipe Wizard such as type of line entities blocks and layers to be converted Turn the toggle off to preview all entities Import Export of DXF Files Import a DXF from AutoCAD or MicroStation To import background graphics in Stand Alone mode from another drafting program you must first export a DXF file from your CAD program This step is usually as simple as selecting an item from a pull down menu in that program such as File Export As DXF or similar command Once the DXF file has been created it can be imported into this program as follows 1 Select the File
434. sed status of the pipe Open means that flow occurs in the pipe and Closed means that there is no flow Water Quality Section This section reports the results of the water quality computations at this location assuming that a Water Quality Analysis was performed The water quality parameter displayed depends on the type of water quality analysis being performed This parameter is one of the three types e Age Report how long the water has been in the system at this node or link 118 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors e Trace Report the percentage of water at this node or link that originated at another chosen node tank reservoir or junction e Constituent Report the concentration of a given constituent at this node or link Pressure Junctions General Tab The General tab for junctions is organized into the following sections o General General information about the junction e Calculated Hydraulics Calculated demand hydraulic grade and pressure at the junction e Water Quality Result of the water quality computations at this node reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed For more information on the data see the topic on each section The Water Quality section is identical for all elements and is described in the Pressure Pipe General Tab section Pressure Junction General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the junction such as e Label
435. see the results throughout the program or select it from the Scenario Manager and click the Results tab to preview the results 162 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 8 2 4 Creating Scenarios to Model What if Situations The scenario management feature was designed to let you model what if situations by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re enter data and by comparing different output results just as easily To create a new scenario 1 Open the Scenario Manager dialog by clicking the Scenario Manager button El next to the drop down scenario list in the main application window 2 Open the Scenario Wizard by clicking its button in the upper left of the Scenario Manager dialog 3 Complete each step in the Scenario Wizard Name the new scenario choose which scenario to base it on and choose the alternatives to be included Click Next between each step and click Finish when you are done 4 Close the Scenario Manager dialog Notice the scenario you have just created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario drop down list in the main application window 5 Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new scenario Scenario Wizard The Scenario Wizard will guide you step by step through the process of creating a new scenario These are the basic steps for creating a new scenario e Name Name the scenario and add some comments if you w
436. ses like Microsoft Access or any other ODBC database This process is further explained in the chapter on Database Connections in the Database Connections tutorial and in Lesson 7 e Alternative Editors Alternatives are used to enter data for different what if situations used in Scenario Management This topic is covered extensively in the Scenario Management chapter in the Scenario tutorial and in Lesson 3 Part 4 Entering Data through Dialogs To access an element s dialog in Stand Alone mode simply double click the element with the cursor In AutoCAD first click the Select tool on the toolbar then click the element whose attributes you wish to modify 1 Open the Editor dialog of the reservoir R 1 and select the General tab Enter the hydraulic grade line elevation from the following Reservoir Data table Reservoir Data General Tab Reservoir Elevation m R 2 Click on the ellipses button next to the Zone field This action opens the Zone Manager Click Add then enter a label for the new pressure zone Connection Zone Click OK and OK again to exit the Zone Manager 3 Finally select the zone you just created from the Zone list box and then click OK to close the Reservoir editor 34 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons General Quality Cost User Data Messages Reservoir R 1 x M General Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Label R 1 Inflow 10 183 l min 8
437. set up your prototypes prior to importing that layer To assist you in this process your conversion settings will be retained between imports Therefore on subsequent passes you will simply need to revise your prototypes and specify the next layer to be imported This same technique can be used when importing blocks 14 1 3 Polyline to Pipe Wizard The Polyline to Pipe wizard will guide you step by step through the process of converting your entities to elements e Step 1 The import behavior depends on the mode in which you are working Stand Alone Specify the DXF file that you would like to import AutoCAD This step is skipped you will be asked to select the entities to convert before accessing the Wizard e Step 2 Specify the polyline to pipe conversion options e Step 3 Specify how T intersections are to be handled e Step 4 Specify how blocks should be converted optional e Step 5 Configure prototypes e Step 6 Specify the layers to be imported To access the Polyline to Pipe Wizard Stand Alone mode Select File Import Polyline to Pipe from the main menu AutoCAD mode Select Edit Change Entities to Pipes from the main menu Polyline to Pipe Wizard Step 1 Stand Alone mode only This step allows you to specify the DXF file to be imported If you are running in AutoCAD mode this step will be skipped AutoCAD mode users will be asked to select the entities to be converted before ac
438. sible actions include such things as element creation deletion editing and moves The effects of some model actions cannot be reversed such as calculation database synchronization scenario creation and tabular edits Additionally to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state the undo redo history will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued WaterCAD Redo Last Action Undone Reverse the effects of the last undone action Any action that can be undone can be redone Cut Delete the selected entities and place them on the Windows clipboard These items can be pasted into other Windows programs or back into AutoCAD Shortcut Key Ctrl X Copy Place the selected entities from the current AutoCAD drawing on the Windows clipboard Shortcut Key Ctrl C Paste Place the items on the Windows clipboard into the current AutoCAD drawing Shortcut Key Ctrl V Paste Special Place special items located on the Windows clipboard such as Excel Spreadsheets and Word documents into the current AutoCAD drawing Select All Select all of the elements in the current project Select By Element Element Type Select all elements of a certain type such as all pipes or all junctions Select By Selection Set Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set Select Clear Selection Reset empty the current selection set Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 19
439. side the defined Unit Cost Table General Data This section contains general information identifying the unit cost function as follows e Label Unique identifier for your unit cost function e Element Type Displays the type of element to which the function applies which is always Pressure Pipe in WaterCAD but could also be Gravity Pipe Junction Inlet Manhole or Junction Chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD e Attribute Label Element attribute that controls the unit cost such as pipe diameter This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Function Manager Attribute Value Range This section displays the Minimum and Maximum values of the attribute that controls the unit cost in your current network Click the Initialize Range button to have these values calculated Unit Cost Data Table Define the unit cost function in a tabular format here preferably defining the costs associated with the entire range of values present in your network To display the current range of values in your model initialize the Attribute Value Range section by clicking the Initialize Range button Formula Unit Cost Function The data defining formula based unit cost functions is grouped as follows e General General information identifying the unit cost function e Valid Cost Data Range Specify the range for which the function is valid for the attribute used to define the unit cost function e Coefficients
440. ssign the cost functions defined here to one or more of the elements of the appropriate type in your system For example if you define a cost function here for pipes you will be able to select this cost function from the drop down box on the cost tab of the pipe element editor dialog Ste Use the Save command accessed from the File menu button on the bottom of this dialog y to save the unit cost functions listed in the Unit Cost Functions Manager You can then import them into another project using the Import command accessed from the File menu button in this dialog To access the Unit Cost Functions Manager select Analysis Compute Costs from the pull down menus to display the Cost Manager and click the Unit Cost Functions button New Unit Cost Function Dialog When you add a new unit cost function you will be prompted with this dialog containing two fields Unit Cost Function Type and Unit Cost Function Attribute This is the information that is needed to initialize the new unit cost function that you are about to create The Unit Cost Function Type field allows you to select whether you would like to enter your cost function data in a tabular or formula format We recommend that you quickly familiarize yourself with both formats to see which is most convenient for you If you wish to base your unit cost on an attribute that is not numeric such as material you must choose a tabular format The Unit Cost Function Attribute f
441. stablish by Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group and enter a value in the Tolerance field For more information regarding these options refer to the section on Shapefile Synchronization Options Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile Link Editors 6 You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor for each element type you chose to import Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor 7 Enter the name of the Shapefile to which you wish to connect for the specified element type Click the ellipsis button to interactively browse for and select your Shapefile 8 Choose the Key Label Field to define the column in the Shapefile that maps to the element labels in the model 9 Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the associated Shapefile column and unit if appropriate Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient Click the Next button Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 229 10 Check the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box if you wish to synchronize the connection 11 12 immediately upon clicking the Finished button If the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box is checked choose whether you want to Synchronize In to the model from a Shapefile or Synchronize Out to the Shapefile from the model Click the Finished button to synchronize the connection if the Synchronize Shapefi
442. staining and Pressure Breaker Valves specify either the initial hydraulic grade or the pressure setting associated with the valve You only need to specify either the pressure setting or the hydraulic grade setting The other will be automatically calculated based on the valve s elevation e Discharge For Flow Control Valves specify the initial discharge to maintain through the valve e Headloss Coefficient For Throttle Control Valves specify the initial minor losses associated with the valve In Steady State Analysis mode in WaterCAD the Initial Status is used as the permanent status However it can be overruled by the presence of controls if the Use Controls in Steady State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog is checked The Calculation Options dialog is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor and then clicking the Options button Pipes Section This section allows you to specify the Upstream Pipe and Downstream Pipe The valve direction along with the flow direction affects the behavior of the valve as explained in the Valve Editor topic at the beginning of this Chapter You can switch the Upstream Pipe and Downstream Pipe by clicking the Reverse button Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the following calculated hydraulic parameters for a valve e Discharge Calcul
443. stem by using the GO button on the main toolbar Then use Quick View Graphs Profiles Tabular views Detailed Reports Color Coding and Contouring to see how the system behaves To get the best introduction to a new feature try running some of the tutorials Haestad Methods Workshops Haestad Methods offers a variety of workshops dealing with topics ranging from urban stormwater management to water distribution modeling alternating theory modeling insights and hands on practice with software instruction These workshops are held at various locations and include discounted pricing when purchasing Haestad Methods software For more information on our workshops such as instructors schedules pricing and locations please contact our sales department or visit our web site at www haestad com for current workshop schedules and locations We will be glad to answer any questions you may have regarding the workshops and our other products and services Haestad Methods offers a range of other training services including on site training and on line training For detailed information on the availability of these options visit www haestad com education Contacting Haestad Methods Sales Haestad Methods professional staff is ready to answer your questions Monday through Friday during Haestad Methods normal operating hours Chapter 1 Orientation 1 5 2 1 5 3 Please contact your sales representative for any questions
444. storage tanks and reservoirs meters regulating valves pumps and electronic and mechanical controls For modeling purposes these system elements are organized into the following categories e Pipes Transport water from one location or node to another 266 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory e Junctions Nodes Specific points or nodes in the system at which an event of interest is occurring This includes points where pipes intersect where there are major demands on the system such as a large industry a cluster of houses or a fire hydrant or critical points in the system where pressures are important for analysis purposes e Reservoirs and Tanks Boundary nodes with a known hydraulic grade that define the initial hydraulic grades for any computational cycle They form the baseline hydraulic constraints used to determine the condition of all other nodes during system operation Boundary nodes are elements such as tanks reservoirs and pressure sources e Pumps Represented as nodes Their purpose is to provide energy to the system and raise the water pressure e Valves Mechanical devices used to stop or control the flow through a pipe or to control the pressure in the pipe upstream or downstream of the valve They result in a loss of energy in the system An event or condition at one point in the system can affect all other parts of the system While this complicates the approach that the engineer must take to find a
445. stream Structure Status I min pai Grade Label Length Diameter Hazen Check im mm pann Valve BE a ESE 1 oO aol 150 0 PYC 150 0 0 00 pee tates 400 00 150 0 PYC 150 0 O 0 00 ECEE ne Synchronized Units 10 of 10 elements displayed 3 1 6 Part 6 Performing a Steady State Analysis 1 Click the GO button to bring up the Calculation dialog Make sure that the Calculation Type is marked as Steady State i Scenario Base ioj x Altematives Calculation Results Notes Steady State C Extended Period GO Start Time 0 00 hr Duration 24 00 hr IV Validate Hydraulic Time Step 1 00 hr Check Data Analysis Orions E Water Gueliy Analysis Age Gonsttvent Trace T Fire Flow Analysis SS Demand 0 00 lt None gt 7 Apply Roughness 0 00 lt None gt x Apply 2 Click the GO button on the dialog to analyze the model When calculations are completed a Results report is displayed 3 The Results tab displays a summary of model results Scroll through the summary to get an idea of the results that are given There should be a green light displayed on the Results tab of the dialog You can quickly tell if there were warnings or failures with a glance at the 38 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 2 light A green light indicates no warnings or failures a yellow light indicates warnings while a red light indicates problems
446. t By clicking a particular tab you can access the user data extensions currently defined for that type of element The software initially contains default user data extensions but these can be deleted or edited Each tab in the User Data Extension dialog is composed of a table listing characteristics of the user data extensions defined for that type of element In addition there are a series of buttons that can be used to add edit delete and share individual user data extensions The table listing the user data extensions consists of the following four columns e Label This is the description that will appear next to the field for the user data extension or as the column heading if the data extension is selected to appear in a FlexTable e Type This column lists the type of data that is valid for the data extension The available data types are Date Time Number Text Memo and Yes No e Unit Picture This column contains the unit of each numeric data extension and a picture of the format of the date and time for Date Time data extensions Both the unit and the date and time picture are selected when you create the data extension They can always be modified by editing the data extension e Shared If an asterisk appears in this column it indicates that the user data extension is shared among two or more types of elements See explanations on the Existing Fields to Share With dialog for more details The following list describe
447. t m s7 ft s The Swamme and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor Swamme and Jain Equation _ 1 325 2 14 lsr as e Where f Friction factor unitless k Roughness height m ft D Pipe diameter m ft Re Reynolds number unitless The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow which is dependent on the flow velocity which is dependent on the discharge As you can see this process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction coefficient in the Darcy Weisbach Friction Method The default units are initially set by the software 278 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory Manning s Equation Manning s equation is one of the most popular methods in use today for free surface flow and like Kutter s equation is based on Chezy s equation For Manning s equation the roughness coefficient in Chezy s equation is calculated as exes n Where C Chezy s roughness coefficient m s ft s R Hydraulic radius m ft n Manning s roughness unitless k Constant 1 00 m s 1 49 ft s Substituting this roughness C into Chezy s equation we obtain the well known Manning s equation Quake a p2 3 gt 2 n Where Q Discharge m s cfs k Constant 1 00 m s 1 49 ft s n Manni
448. t Menu Option 91 Rotate Labels AutoCAD Mode 94 241 Roughness 317 Chezy s Equation 279 Coefficient 207 288 Colebrook White Equation 278 Darcy Weisbach Equation 276 Hazen Williams Equation 276 Manning s Equation 278 Roughness Coefficient 317 Roughness Values 287 288 Colebrook White 289 Darcy Weisbach 289 290 Hazen Williams 290 291 Manning s 288 289 Typical 291 Rounding 96 Pipe Length 93 Running an Extended Period Simulation 41 Running the Model 171 Index 327 S Sales 8 Sample Projects 7 Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints 317 Save 16 17 24 90 As 15 16 17 as Drawing dwg 240 Scale 93 Elements AutoCAD Mode 241 Scaled Mode 93 94 Scenario 23 159 161 162 198 199 297 Alternatives 42 164 Analysis Toolbar 25 Base 159 Batch Run 161 162 Calculation 164 Child 42 298 Comparison 42 198 Editor 160 164 Inheritance 298 300 Lesson 3 42 Management 42 149 Results 165 166 Selection 159 Summary Report 192 Wizard 162 Scenario Management 19 160 161 293 Example 300 Schematic Mode 93 94 Scientific Notation 96 97 Search for Elements 104 Section 124 Select 21 317 By Selection Set 17 103 Element Types 224 Elements 18 19 101 Field Links 217 Layer 240 Text Style 240 Selection Set 103 104 317 Manager 19 103 Selection Tool 21 Series Pumps 255 Set Field Options 95 Settings
449. t on the valve dialog only includes minor losses of type valve You cannot add or delete types e K Coefficient Headloss coefficient for the minor loss This unitless number represents the ratio of the headloss across the minor loss element to the velocity head of the flow through the element 208 Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries 12 1 4 Liquid Properties An editable library of liquids is provided All hydraulic or hydrologic networks transport a particular liquid Liquids are defined with the following properties e Liquid Label Name of the liquid as it will appear in choice lists e Kinematic Viscosity Ratio of the liquid s dynamic or absolute viscosity to its mass density This is a common parameter in fluid mechanics The units of kinematic viscosity are length squared per unit time typically m sec or ft sec e Specific Gravity Ratio of the specific weight of the liquid to the specific weight of water at 4 C 39 F Specific gravity is a unitless number e Temperature Reference temperature for the liquid This is required because the two parameters listed above are generally a function of the temperature The default temperature for new liquids is room temperature 20 C 68 F and are only applicable to water at room temperature 20 C 68 F This program will ask you to confirm a liquid choice that is inconsistent with the chosen friction method but it will not prevent you from using it
450. table 2 Specify either a one or two row display for your table in SewerCAD or StormCAD 3 Enter the name of your new table in the field labeled Enter the description for this table This name will also be used as the report title when this table is printed 4 Click OK to accept these settings and proceed to the Table Setup dialog where you can define your table 7 2 2 Editing Tables The Edit option allows you to specify the columns that will appear in your table 7 2 3 Duplicating Tables The Duplicate option allows you to create a new table based on an existing table 7 2 4 Deleting Tables The Delete option allows you to delete any table that you have defined You cannot delete any of the predefined tables 7 2 5 Renaming Tables The Rename option allows you to change the name of any table that you have defined The table name will be used as the title in printed reports You cannot rename any of J the predefined tables If you need to rename a predefined table duplicate it first and then rename it Chapter 7 FlexTables 141 7 2 6 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 Resetting Tables Reset Units to the Current Unit System This option is only available for tables that are in Local Units mode Local Units mode allows the table to maintain its own local set of column properties units precision etc You can use this option to reset all units in the selected table to the defaults for th
451. take the following steps 1 From the File menu select Synchronize Database Connections to open the Database Connection Manager Click Add 2 Inthe Database Connection Editor type a label for your Connection 3 Click Add to create a new table link This will take you to the Table Link editor 4 Select the type of file to which you would like to link then click the ellipsis button to browse for and select your database file 5 Choose the table to which you would like to link and the type of table 6 Choose the Key Label Field to define the column in the database that contains the labels of the elements to be synchronized 7 Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the associated database column and unit 8 Click OK to exit the Table Link Editor 9 Click OK again to exit the Database Connection Editor 10 You should be back at the Database Connection Manager You can leave this dialog and return to the model or you can choose to Synchronize In to the model from the database or Synchronize Out to the database from the model Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 221 13 2 13 2 1 B Shapefile Connections Shapefile Connection Manager This manager is identical to the Database Connection Manager except that it helps you to track and work with Shapefile Connections rather than Database Connections Only a brief description of each dialog control is presented here
452. tank reservoir pump valve as follows e Label Description of a fixed cost item associated with the structure e Quantity Number of identical cost item associated with the structure e Unit Cost Cost of one cost item Total Fixed Cost Section e Total Fixed Cost Cost of the nodal structure as defined in the Cost Table on this tab User Data Tab The User Data tab allows you to view and edit the customizable user data for each element This tab is composed of two sections e User Data Any Date Time Number Text and Yes No data defined by the user e User Memos Any memo data fields defined by the user For information on how to add new fields or edit an existing field format see the Help on the User Data Extension dialog Default user defined attributes are provided These can easily be deleted or modified 132 Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors Ate User Data Extensions are a powerful way to add your own data to the project This data Q will not affect the hydraulic calculations in any way but can be used as any other data for things such as sorting annotating reporting and importing exporting User Data Section This section contains a list of Date Time Number Text and Yes No user data fields displayed as single line fields User data fields are defined in the User Data Extension dialog which is accessed from the Tools menu User Memos Section This section contains a list
453. te is not consistent with any pending undo or redo transactions held by the server WaterCAD will flush the command history In this case the model will synchronize the drawing and server models If you undo using the AutoCAD command and you end up restoring WaterCAD elements that have been previously deleted morphed or split some model state attributes such as diameters or elevations may be lost even though the locational and topological state is fully consistent This will only happen in situations where the WaterCAD command history has been flushed In such cases you will be warned to check your data carefully 244 Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 15 7 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements 15 7 1 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities WaterCAD features powerful tools dedicated to assisting you in building WaterCAD models from existing AutoCAD drawing information In addition to the standard GIS shapefile conversion options there are two specific commands available in the AutoCAD platform that will be especially useful to the AutoCAD modeler e Layout Pipe Using Entity e Change Entities to Pipe 15 7 2 Layout Pipe Using Entity In addition to the standard options available under the Pipe layout command accessed by clicking the 2 button in the WaterCAD Tools toolbar or by selecting the Tools Layout Pipe menu option you may elect to use an existing AutoCAD line polyline
454. te or the pipe condition e Messages Calculation messages such as warnings or error messages and user entered notes and descriptions For more information on the data refer to the topics describing each tab Pressure Junction Editor Junctions are non storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy consumer demands water can enter the network as an inflow or chemical constituents can enter the network The pressure junction editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs e General General junction information including geographical data and hydraulic results Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 113 6 1 3 6 1 4 e Demand Assignment of demands or inflows to junction elements in order to simulate water leaving or entering the network Inflows and demands consist of a baseline flow rate and an associated Fixed or Extended Period Simulation EPS Pattern e Quality Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog e Fire Flow Contains fire flow input and output data e Cost Cost Analysis input output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations e User Data Additional data as defined by the user New fields can be added e Messages Calculation messages such as warnings or error messages and user defined notes and descriptions For more information on the data refer to t
455. te water age constituent concentration or percentage of water from a given node trace analysis Using these features you can look at factors such as residence time in tanks chlorine residuals throughout the system and which tank or reservoir is the primary water source for different areas in your system This lesson uses the file called Lesson6 wcd Lesson6 dwg in the AutoCAD version located in the Haestad Wtrc Lesson directory Open this file and then select File Save As from the pull down menu Type the filename MyLesson and click Save The water distribution system has already been set up for you It has one reservoir and one tank The system serves primarily residential areas with some commercial water use as well There are two pumps connected to the reservoir however under normal conditions only one pump will be in use A background drawing has been included for reference If you would like to turn off the dxf background in the Stand Alone version select Tools Options from the menus click the Drawing tab and uncheck the Show Background box In the AutoCAD version you can simply turn off the desired layers If at any time during this lesson the program asks Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N A click NO Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 61 3 6 1 Part 1 Computing Water Age You will begin by running an age analysis for water in the system assuming an initial age o
456. ted nodes or all nodes in the system A complete fire flow analysis can comprise hundreds or thousands of individual flow solutions one for each junction selected for the fire flow analysis Fire flows are computed at user specified locations by iteratively assigning demands and computing system pressures The model will check the computed fire flow and ensure that all pressure constraints are met New demand will automatically be assigned and system pressures recomputed if one of the constraints is violated Iterations continue until one of the fire flow constraints is matched or until the maximum number of iterations is reached The flow is not actually withdrawn from the node The baseline pressures are the pressures that are modeled under the standard steady state demand conditions in which fire flows are not exerted The analysis only serves as a check to determine how much can be withdrawn given the pressure constraints Residual Pressure Minimum Zone Pressure and optionally Minimum System Pressure The program will compute the available fire flow to be zero in situations where the baseline system pressures violate one of the pressure constraints separately for an automatic batch run are only reported in the Fire Flow tab and in the Fire Flow Tabular Report accessed from the Report Tables menu or the Tabular Reports icon Results reported in the other element editor tabs do not take into account any fire flow unless you explicitly
457. ternative editor for pumps is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pumps which consists of the following e Elevation Elevation of the pump typically measured from the Mean Sea Level e Pump Type The attributes that define the pump s operating characteristics Click this field then click the ellipsis button to edit the parameters for the active pump type Physical Alternative Editor for Valves The Physical Alternative editor for valves used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of valves The following columns are available e Elevation Elevation of the valve typically measured from the Mean Sea Level e Diameter The internal diameter of the valve The nominal diameter of the valve is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact e Minor Loss Coefficient The wide open minor loss coefficient Click the ellipsis button to edit the Minor Loss Library Physical Alternative Editor for Junctions The Physical Alternative editor for PressureJunctions is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of junctions which consist of the following e Elevation Elevation of the junction typically measured from the Mean Sea Level e Zone Specify the zone the junction belongs to You may click the ellipsis button to access the Zone Manager which allows you to edit or add zones Physical Alternati
458. th automatic update and synchronization with the model database e Output contours to your AutoCAD drawing e Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annotation giving you control over styles linetypes and visibility of model elements 238 Chapter 15 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 15 1 AutoCAD Environment 15 1 1 AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout In AutoCAD mode Haestad products provide a set of extended options and functionality over that available in Stand Alone mode This additional functionality is provided to complement the advanced power available in the AutoCAD environment Generally it provides enhanced user control over general application settings and options and extends the command set allowing user modification of the presentation of Haestad Methods software model elements within AutoCAD Key differences between AutoCAD and Stand Alone mode include e Element Editing functionality has been extended by adding the Scale Elements and Rotate Labels commands accessible under the Edit Modify Elements pull down menu and the Change Widths under the Edit Modify Pipes pull down menu e You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the Element Properties command under the Tools pull down menu e Though right click context menus are now standard with AutoCAD 2000 a Right Click Context Menu Option has been added to provide optional conformity with the
459. that once a repeating pattern is reached the age of the water fluctuates between approximately 34 and 49 hours in 24 hour periods Looking at these equilibrium ranges for various nodes can help guide you in setting up initial water age values in subsequent runs 3 6 2 Part 2 Analyzing Constituent Concentrations In this portion of the lesson you will look at chlorine residuals in the system over time WaterCAD stores information on constituent characteristics in a file called a constituent library You will add information for chlorine to this library set up initial concentrations in the system and run the simulation 1 Select Analysis Alternatives from the pull down menus Select the Constituent tab and click the Add button Name the new Alternative Chlorine Injection and click OK Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 63 2 Click the ellipses button next to the Constituent list box to open the Constituent Library and click the Insert button An entry for Unlabeled appears in the table Click the Edit button and enter the data below into the dialog Bulk Reaction 0 10 day Wall Reaction 0 08 m day Diffusivity 1 2e 9 m s Constituent x m Constituent Label Cancel Bulk Reaction 01 0 day Wall Reaction 0 O8 m day Diffusivity 1 2e 9 nes IV Unlimited Concentration Help Concentration Limit N A mg l Leave the Unlimited Concentration box checked click O
460. the bulk flow e Wall Reaction Reaction rate constant used to model reactions that occur with the material along the pipe wall e Constituent Source True or false check to determine whether a node is a source of the constituent e Constituent Baseline Load Load attributed to the element before applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for an Extended Period Analysis e Constituent Pattern Name of the Pattern that applies the time step multiplier to the Baseline Load Depending on the type of highlighted network element in the table the Use Defaults button will reset the reaction coefficients for that element to the constituent default values as specified in the constituent library or it will reset the initial constituent concentrations to 0 0 8 1 9 Trace Alternative The Trace Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis to determine the percentage of water at each node coming from a specified node The Trace Alternative data includes a Trace Node which is the node from which all tracing is computed The trace alternative table includes the following columns e Label The identifying label of node elements e Initial Trace A percentage value representing the starting condition at the node 8 1 10 Fire Flow Alternative The Fire Flow Alternative contains the input data required to perform a fire flow analysis This data includes the set of junction nodes for which fire flow results are neede
461. the Database Connection editor click Add or Edit Select Field Links The Select Field Links dialog provides an easy to use interface for populating the Field Links group of the Table Link editor or Shapefile Link editor The dialog contains two lists 218 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections e Available Items Model attributes that are available for mapping in the current Table or Shapefile Link e Selected Items Model attributes that have been selected for mapping The following buttons are provided to move items from one list to the other e gt Move the selected item or items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list e gt gt Move all items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list e lt Move the selected item or items from the Selected Items list to the Available Items list e lt lt Move all items from the Items Selected list to the Available Items list 13 1 4 ODBC ODBC which stands for Open Database Connectivity is a standard programming interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in relational and non relational database management systems DBMSs Using ODBC applications such as Haestad Methods engineering software can access data stored in many different PC minicomputer and mainframe DBMSs even though each uses a different storage format and programming interface The ODBC architecture conceptually consists of three parts 1 The applicatio
462. the calculation as well as any warnings or errors that were generated during the calculation e Notes Edit or view the cost analysis notes for this scenario To open the Cost Scenario Editor dialog open the Cost Manager by clicking the B button Then highlight the scenario that you wish to edit and click the Compute button Cost Scenario Editor Cost Calculation Tab This tab contains scenario level data for the cost calculation and is the location from which you can run a cost calculation for a single scenario The scenario level data that are contained on this tab are the cost adjustments that will be made to the total cost computed for all the elements included in the cost analysis Each cost adjustment includes a label operation and factor The label is the name such as Contingency Fee or Adjustment used to identify the cost adjustment The operation is the operation Add Multiply or Subtract that will be used against the factor to compute the total cost associated with the adjustment The factor is a number that will be applied to the operation to compute the cost Chapter 10 Cost Estimating 185 10 1 4 associated with the adjustment For example if you wanted to add a contingency fee of ten percent to the total cost computed for the elements in the system you would specify an operation of Multiply and a factor of 0 10 So if the total cost for the elements was 2 000 000 the contingency fee would
463. the directions below for the mode you are using Stand Alone Double click the element you wish to edit or right click the element and select Edit from the drop down menu AutoCAD R14 Pick the Select tool and click the element you wish to edit If the Right Click Context Menu is selected you can also right click the element and select Edit from the drop down menu AutoCAD 2000 Pick the Select tool and click the element you wish to edit or select the element and choose Edit from the drop down menu Pressure Pipe Editor Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes pumps valves tanks and reservoirs to each other The only way for water to travel from one node to another is by following a path through one or more pipes The pressure pipe editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs e General General pipe information including dimension and physical characteristics data as well as hydraulic results e Controls Control data used to specify whether the pipe is open or closed at a specified time or based on the HGL or pressure at any node in the system e Quality Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog e Cost Cost Analysis input output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations e User Data Additional data as defined by the user New fields can be added such as the pipe installation da
464. the installation of the program a dialog will appear asking you to register the software Please note the label with your registration information is on the inside back cover of the manual Although this software is not copy protected registration is required to unlock the software capabilities for the hydraulic network size that you have licensed All registration information must be entered into the Registration dialog exactly as it appears on the label e Company e City e State Country e Registration Number After you have registered the software you can check your current registration status by opening the registration dialog in the software itself To open the Registration dialog 1 Select Help About Product_Name from the pull down menu 2 Click the Registration button in the About Product_Name dialog The current registration status number of licenses expiration date feature level etc will be displayed Use the Print button to print a copy of the information shown in the Registration Form dialog Use the Copy button to place the registration information in the Windows Clipboard so that you can paste it into another Windows application If you own a network license version of the software please refer to the accompanying Network License Document If you still have questions consult our online KnowledgeBase on our web site www haestad com or contact Haestad Methods technical support Ch
465. the prompt to run the batch for two Scenarios When they have finished computing click OK You can see the results for each Scenario by highlighting it in the Scenario list Click the Results tab at the top right in the dialog box to see the selected Scenario s results We can see that the Scenarios are different but what exactly is different about them We will use the Scenario Comparison tool to compare the results Click the Scenario Comparison button to start the Annotation Comparison Wizard Select the 2000 l min 3 hour Fire Flow at J 6 EPS Scenario in the first list box and the 4000 l min Fire Flow at J 6 EPS in the second list box Click the Next button We will compare the results for pressures at the junctions and velocities in the pipes so click the check boxes next to Pressure Junction and Pressure Pipe and then click Next Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Annotation Comparison Wizard x Select the types of elements you would like to annotate I Reservoir I Tank DTE l Cancel Help lt Back ren 4 Select Pressure from the list box under the Attributes column for Pressure Junction Annotation Edit the entry in the Mask column by deleting the label name so that only the pressure and unit variables v u remain Click Next 5 Select Velocity from the list box under the Attributes column for Pressure Pipe Annotation Again you can edit the label in the Mask column Click Next Che
466. the valve Operational Alternative The Operational Alternative allows you to specify controls on pressure pipes pumps as well as valves in WaterCAD The Controlled field contains a Boolean true or false statement that 156 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives indicates whether the network element is controlled Clicking in this field activates a button that allows you to access the Controls dialog and edit the controls for this element 8 1 7 Age Alternative The Age Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis for modeling the age of the water through the pipe network This alternatives allows you to analyze different scenarios for varying water ages at the network nodes 8 1 8 Constituent Alternative The Constituent Alternative contains the water quality data used to model a constituent concentration throughout the network when performing a water quality analysis Selecting a constituent from the Constituent scroll down list provides default values for table entries This software provides a user editable library of constituents for maintaining these values which may be accessed by clicking the ellipsis button next to the Constituent scroll down list e Label Identifying label of the element represented by the row e Initial Constituent Concentration of the constituent at the beginning of the analysis e Bulk Reaction Reaction rate constant used to model reactions of the constituent within
467. tial Settings Alternative 8 1 6 Operational Alternative 8 1 7 Age Alternative 8 1 8 Constituent Alternative 8 1 9 Trace Alternative 8 1 10 Fire Flow Alternative 8 1 11 Cost Alternative 8 1 12 User Data Alternative Scenarios 8 2 1 Scenario Selection 8 2 2 Editing Scenarios 8 2 3 Scenario Manager 8 2 4 Scenario Wizard 8 2 5 Scenario Editor Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 Steady State Extended Period Simulation Optional Analysis Calibration Check Data Validate Calculate Network Fire Flow Analysis 9 6 1 Fire Flow Results 9 6 2 Not getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node Water Quality Analysis 9 7 1 Age Analysis 9 7 2 Constituent Analysis 9 7 3 Trace Analysis Calculation Options 9 8 1 Hydraulic Analysis Options 9 8 2 Water Quality Analysis Options Patterns 9 9 1 Pattern Manager 9 9 2 Pattern Editor Chapter 10 Cost Estimating 10 1 Cost Manager 10 1 1 Cost Alternatives Manager 10 1 2 Unit Cost Functions 10 1 3 Cost Scenario Editor 10 1 4 Cost Scenario Batch Run Chapter 11 Presenting your Results 11 1 Element Annotation 11 1 1 Attribute Annotation Dialog 11 1 2 The Annotation Wizard Color Coding 11 2 1 Color Coding Dialog Reports 154 155 156 156 156 156 158 159 159 159 160 160 162 164 167 167 168 169 170 171 172 172 172 173 173 173 174 174 175 175 175 176 177 179 180 181 181 184 185
468. till be able to perform the workshop but you won t be able to open the data to view it externally EG Microsoft Excel Lesson7 xls BEE j File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help lal x Osha 6a se or e fe Sh BQ gt fara gt E 1 Label Start Node End Node Material Roughness Diameter mm Length m 2 P 1 Reservoir J 1 Ductile Iron 130 600 241 5 3 P 3 PMP 1 J 2 Ductile Iron 130 600 149 5 4 P 5 PMP 2 J 2 Ductile Iron 130 600 161 5 5 P 2 J 1 PMP 1 Ductile Iron 130 600 144 6 P 4 J 1 PMP 2 Ductile Iron 130 600 141 7 P 6 J 2 J 3 Ductile Iron 130 600 505 8 P 32 PRY 1 J 27 Ductile Iron 130 200 44 5 9 P 212 PRYV 2 J 136 Ductile Iron 130 150 146 5 10 P 7 J 3 J 4 Ductile Iron 130 600 146 11 P 8 J 4 J 5 Ductile Iron 130 600 574 M21 P 227 J 4 J 143 Ductile Iron 130 100 443 13 P 9 J 5 J 6 Ductile Iron 130 600 111 14 P 10 J 6 J 7 Ductile Iron 130 600 436 15 P 250 J 6 J 161 Ductile Iron 130 150 136 5 16 P 11 J 7 J 8 Ductile Iron 130 600 231 17 P 253 J 7 J 164 Ductile Iron 130 150 243 8 P 12 J 6 J 9 Ductile Iron 130 600 582 5 9 P al 8 PRY 1 Ductile Iron 130 200 103 5 ane 4 i i h Pipe 4 Junction Z Tank ep Valve Z Pump 7 Reservoir_ i 4 jia an y IZ Ready INUM This lesson uses the network from Lesson 6 1 Open the spreadsheet file Lesson7 xls and take a look at it As you can see from the worksheet tabs the data is organized into six worksheets one for each
469. tion The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic conditions of the network are assumed to be constant Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis has a default value You will most likely want to change the values to suit your particular analysis Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an extended period analysis This is usually due to controls typically based on tank elevations or control valves typically pressure regulating valves toggling between two operational modes on off for pump controls open closed for pipe controls active closed for valves When this occurs try adjusting the hydraulic time step to a smaller value This will minimize the differences in boundary conditions between time steps and may allow for convergence Whether the model is run in steady state or over an extended period is specified on the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor which can be accessed from the Analysis Scenarios menu item 9 2 Optional Analysis In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis you are given the option to perform a water quality analysis or a fire flow analysis Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 169 9 3 e Water Quality Analysis This check box configures the calculation to analyze for water quality When this box is checked you need to specify the type of water quality analysis to perform This software is capable of performing t
470. tion Editor click the Synchronization Options tab Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections 217 Database Table Link Editor The Table Link editor provides an editing tool for defining or modifying a table link This dialog is separated into two groups one dealing with the file and table information and the other dealing with the field links attribute mapping The general table link information includes e Database Type Type of database to which the link will be made There are many types of external files that can be linked to the model Among these are Btrieve Dbase Excel FoxPro Jet mdb files such as Access Lotus and Paradox as well as Oracle Sybase and SQI server or any other Open Database Connectivity ODBC compliant database e Database File File referenced by the table link To browse directories and specify a file path click the ellipsis button e Database Table Once the external file has been selected it will be scanned for tables or worksheets which will then be available for selection from this field Only one table can be linked to for each table link but table links can be easily duplicated and edited from the Database Connection editor e Table Type Define the type of data that can be mapped for this particular table link For example a Pipe type of table link means that the available model attributes to be mapped are items such as material roughness coefficient flow rate and
471. to Demand and set the baseline load to 23 l min Click the corresponding cell in the Pattern column and select the ellipses button that appears This action opens the Pattern Manager Click the Add button to create a new pattern for this model Pressure Junction J 1 x General Demand Quality Fire Flow Cost User Data Messages m Demands Alternative Base Average Daily e hese B pmm fime Cancel Report Help E Ejoor HAA jion eA 2 Inthe Pattern dialog enter the name Residential in the Label field Leave the Start Time to 0 0 midnight and set the Starting Multiplier to 0 5 Under Format select the radio button labeled Stepwise The resulting demand pattern will have multipliers that remain constant until the next pattern time increment is reached 3 In the Pattern table enter the times and multipliers from the table below Click OK when you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager 40 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Residential Pattern Data Time from Pa Start Multiplier hr 3 0 4 6 1 0 9 1 3 12 1 2 15 1 2 18 1 6 21 0 8 24 0 5 Note that the multiplier for the last time given 24 hr must be the same as the Starting Multiplier 0 5 These values are equal because the demand curve represents a complete cycle with the last point the same as the first 4 While we are in the Pattern Manager we will go ahead and create a pa
472. to find the most satisfactory combination Our powerful Alternative Manager allows you to set up an unlimited number of design alternatives and apply them in different scenarios Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored in a physical properties alternative as listed below e Pipe Physical Properties e Pump Physical Properties e Valve Physical Properties e Junction Physical Properties e Reservoir Physical Properties e Tank Physical Properties Physical Alternative Editor for Pipes The Physical Alternative editor for pipes is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pipes The following columns are available e Material Type of material from which the pipe is constructed e g Ductile Iron PVC Steel e Diameter Internal diameter of the pipe The nominal diameter of the pipe is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact e Roughness A measure of the pipes internal roughness based on the chosen friction method e Minor Loss Coefficient Appurtenances such as valves bends and tees contribute to local flow disturbances resulting in energy loss Click the ellipsis button to edit the composite minor loss element for the pipe Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 153 e Check Valve True or false status indicating the presence of a check valve Physical Alternative Editor for Pumps The Physical Al
473. to input or maintain redundant data We have spent many hours coming up with a system that offers the power and flexibility that you demand with the ease of use that you have come to expect from us If you are like most users you will want to jump right in without having to spend a lot of time reading When you are ready to create your first scenario you will find that you will be able to accomplish what you want easily and quickly The Scenario Wizard is designed to get you started quickly while slowly exposing you to the power behind scenarios and alternatives When you are ready to model more complex scenarios you will appreciate the power and flexibility provided by the various scenario management features If you are a beginning user try the Scenario Wizard and run the Scenario tutorial Also refer to the Scenario Management Reference Guide in Appendix C If you are an advanced user be sure to read about Alternatives and investigate the Alternatives Manager dialog Alternatives Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when placed together Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records A record holds the data for a particular element in your system The different types of alternatives are as follows e Physical e Demand e Initial Settings e Operational e Age e Constituent e Trace e Fire Flow 150 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives
474. toDesk s documentation Drawing Pane The drawing pane the center of WaterCAD s graphical activity is where the water network elements are displayed It is the main interactive area for creating elements editing data and even displaying results In Stand Alone mode the drawing pane can also display a background DXF image This background can be helpful for aligning and positioning elements as well as adding additional drafting elements for printing plan views In AutoCAD the drawing pane is where all graphical elements not just WaterCAD entities are displayed and manipulated Lines arcs text and many other drafting elements can be created and modified within the drawing pane Status Bar The status bar located at the bottom of the window provides relevant messages about the current state of the model and information about the drawing pane This information includes things such as cursor location calculation status and drawing mode 14 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window Menus Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Anyone who has ever watched someone else use a computer should realize that not all people use computers in the same way Some prefer to primarily use the mouse some the keyboard and others use a mixture of both For this reason Haestad Methods programs provide access to the most common features through several means including e Pull Down Menus e Toolbars e Shortcut Keys e Command Line AutoCAD Only
475. tons e Zoom You can control the degree to which the drawing review zooms into the selected element by choosing a zoom factor from the field labeled Zoom located in the lower right corner of the dialog You can double click an element in the list to quickly navigate to that element If you know the name of the element to which you wish to navigate type the label in the field located above the element list and click the Go To button The Drawing Review window is modeless so all menus and toolbars will remain available even when the window is open This will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that you find Use the Drawing Review window in conjunction with the Quick View window to review the data for the selected elements To access the Drawing Review dialog select Edit Review Drawing from the main menu Selection Tolerance Some select operations require you to specify a tolerance for defining which nodes will be selected for the Drawing Review window e Elements in Close proximity If the distance between the elements in the drawing is within the specified tolerance those elements will be selected for display in the Drawing Review window e Pipe Split Candidates If the distance between a node and a pipe is within the specified tolerance it will be selected for display in the Drawing Review window Relabel Elements Relabel Elements Dialog Element relabeling allows you to modify the labels
476. tons at the bottom of the dialog e OK Accept the current condition of the connection including any changes that have been made e Cancel Close the Database Connection Editor without saving any changes e Help Open the context sensitive Help system To use the Database Connection Editor select File Synchronize Database Connections from the main menu This will open the Database Connection Manager From this dialog there are two ways to get to the Database Connection Editor You can click Add to create a new connection or select Edit to change an existing connection Database Connection Tab The Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor provides an interface for the standard attributes of a connection It contains the following e Connection Label A required unique alphanumeric identification for the connection This is the label that appears in the list on the Database Connection Manager dialog e Table Links Provide basic information about each table link such as the referenced database file the specific table within the database and the type of table that is referenced A table link can be highlighted from the list at which point the following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog 216 Chapter 13 GIS and Database Connections Add Add a new table link If there are no table links currently defined for this connection this will be the only button availabl
477. ts In AutoCAD mode these commands are selected from the Edit pull down menu They are used for scaling and rotating model entities Scale Elements In AutoCAD mode this menu selection resizes an element based upon a scale factor After choosing this command select an element or group of elements and enter the scale factor to be applied To access the scale elements command select Modify Elements from the Edit pull down menu Rotate Labels In AutoCAD mode this menu selection rotates the figure label After choosing this command select an element or group of elements and enter the desired rotation in degrees Modify Pressure Pipes Pipes may follow a non linear alignment since in pressure systems minor losses can be safely lumped with friction losses without significantly affecting model accuracy WaterCAD uses the following specialized commands for editing pipes in AutoCAD e Insert Bend Use this command to add a bend to a pipe In AutoCAD you will be prompted to select a pipe to bend Select the pipe and the location you want the bend to appear The pipe alignment will automatically conform to this location e Remove Bend Use this command to remove a specific bend from a pipe In AutoCAD you will be prompted to select a pipe and the specific bend to remove e Remove All Bends Use this command to completely straighten a pipe that contains bends In AutoCAD you will be prompted to select a pipe and all bends will d
478. ts Langrangian models also break the system into control volumes but then track these water volumes as they travel through the system B 3 8 Discrete Volume Element Method DVEM Algorithm The discrete volume element method is based on a plug flow reactor assumption The plug flow model accounts for advective transport and the kinetics of the constituent reactions within the plug According to the physical plug flow reactor model each reactor plug will be advected through the system and composited with incoming plugs at flow receiving nodes In the Eulerian DVEM numerical modeling scheme this plug movement is simulated by transferring substance concentration state from one discrete volume element a plug to the next adjacent volume element along the direction of flow The DVEM proceeds by subdividing each link in the network into a number of equal sized elements at every hydraulic event In the simulation for example this is a single EPS time step during which flow and velocity patterns are assumed to remain constant To preserve accuracy the volumetric element for each link over the duration of every hydraulic event must be correctly computed To this end the methodology is parameterized by the water quality time step t To ensure that fluid is not transported beyond the confines of any link within a single analytical step the total link volume must be less than the product of link discharge and time step It follows that T cannot exceed the
479. ts displayed When a filter is active this message will appear in a highlighted color Table filtering allows you to perform global editing on any subset of elements Only the elements that appear in the filtered table will be edited Table Customization There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements 146 Chapter 7 FlexTables e Changing the Report Title When you print a table the table name is used as the title for the printed report You can change the title that appears on your printed report by renaming the table Use the Table Manager to rename your table e Adding Removing Columns You can add remove and change the order of columns by using the Table Setup dialog Use the Table Manager to access the Table Setup dialog e Drag Drop Column Placement With the Table window open select the column that you would like to move by holding down the left mouse button on its column heading Drag the column heading to the left or right and release the mouse button to drop the column into its new location e Resizing Columns With the Table window open place your pointer over the vertical separator line between column headings Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that you can resize Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the left or right to stretch the column to its new size When you are satisfied release the mouse button to set the new column width
480. ts in the drawing that belong to the specified selection set s 190 Chapter 11 Presenting Your Results Color coding legends can be added to any location in the drawing by clicking the Legend Button on the Tool Palette performing a calculation colors will update based on the calculated values If the results for the selected attribute are not available or if all values for that attribute are the same automatic range initialization will not be performed You can enter your Color coding will automatically update as input or results change For example after own custom range in this case A color map can have any number of color assignments Z The Quick View window can be used to display a summary of the active link or node color coding parameters 11 3 Reports 11 3 1 Predefined Reports This application provides several predefined reports that can be used in your projects This feature makes report generation a simple point and click exercise Simply select the elements for which you want a report and send them to your printer The following types of Predefined Reports are available e Element Details Reports e Element Results Reports e Tabular Reports e Scenario Summary Reports e Project Inventory Reports e Calculation Results Table e Plan View Reports Detailed reports can be copied to the Windows clipboard in RTF format for use in your favorite word processing program Refer t
481. ttern for commercial demands Select the Add button and create a pattern labeled Commercial having a Start Time of 0 0 and a Starting Multiplier of 0 4 Enter the data below into the Pattern table This pattern will also be stepwise Click OK when you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager Commercial Pattern Data Multiplier 5 Click OK to return to the Junction J 1 Editor In the Pattern list box for the first row select Residential from the drop down list In the second row enter a demand of 15 l min Select Commercial as the pattern for this row Click OK to exit the junction J 1 editor 6 Go into the Demands table in the editor dialogs for junctions J 2 J 3 J 4 J 5 and J 6 and enter the demand data from the table below We will use the Residential and Commercial demand patterns already created so just select the appropriate pattern from the list box Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 41 3 2 2 10 11 Demand Tab Residential Commercial Junction Demand Demand l min l min J 2 J 3 J 4 J 5 J 6 Now we will set up an additional demand pattern to simulate a three hour fire at node J 6 In the Demand tab of the junction J 6 Editor insert an additional demand of 2000 I min in row 3 of the Demands table Click in the Pattern column for row 3 and select the ellipses button to open the Pattern Manager Select the Add button to add a new demand pattern In the Pattern dialog
482. ty AutoCAD Mode 238 Synchronize 222 AutoCAD Mode 239 Database Links 213 Options 216 Via ODBC 219 Synchronized Units 146 System International 90 91 96 System Head Curve 258 259 System Junction Minimum 315 System Pressure Minimum 315 T Table 139 142 143 Change Units 146 Copy to Clipboard 148 Customization 145 Editing 140 Export to ASCII File 147 Filtering 145 Flex Units 97 Manager 139 140 Mixing Units 147 Navigation 143 144 Print 148 Print Preview 148 Properties 141 Setup 141 Type 141 Table Links 318 Tabular 22 Report 139 Tabular Reports FlexTables 50 Tank 113 Curve 193 Hydraulically Close 256 Hydropneumatic 254 Importing from EPANET 252 Pressurized 254 Technical Support 8 Text 243 Style 240 Text Height 94 How Do I 261 Multiplier 94 Theory 265 Age Analysis 284 Network Hydraulics 266 Trace Analysis 284 Valve 275 Water Quality 280 Throttle Control Valve 275 T intersections 233 Title Project 88 89 To Node 318 To Pipe 318 Tolerance 107 Tool Palette 25 Tool Pane 24 90 Toolbar 14 238 Analysis 25 Buttons 23 Toolbars 14 Top Feed Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank 259 Topology 165 170 171 Total Active Volume 318 Total Needed Fire Flow 318 Total Storage Volume 318 Trace 318 Alternative 156 Trace Analysis 174 Trace Analysis Theory 284 Transport Equations 286
483. ty for your WaterCAD by using the Help About menu option Click the Registration button to view the feature options that have been purchased with your application license If AutoCAD support is enabled then you will be able to run your WaterCAD application in both AutoCAD and Stand Alone mode The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented so as to be essentially identical to that offered with the Stand Alone base product Once you obtain familiarity with the Stand Alone mode you will not have any difficulty utilizing the product in AutoCAD mode In AutoCAD mode you will have access to the full range of functionality available in the AutoCAD design and drafting environment The standard environment is extended and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX WaterCAD client layer that allows you to create view and edit the native WaterCAD network model while in AutoCAD Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include e Layout network pipes and structures in fully scaled mode in the same design and drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use along with any custom LISP ARX or VBA applications that you have developed e Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position WaterCAD elements with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing e Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE MOVE and ROTATE on WaterCAD model entities wi
484. type of element in the network When setting up a spreadsheet yourself you may organize and group data however you like Just make sure that the different types of data are sorted into columns with a descriptive heading in the topmost cell and include a column for your labels Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 73 i Double click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand Alone If the Welcome to WaterCAD dialog appears select the Close button Open the Global Options tab accessed from the Tools Options pull down menu Since we will be working in metric units click the Unit System selection box and select System International Click OK In the pull down menus select File New Click No when asked if you want to save the current project In the Create Project File As dialog double click the Lesson folder enter the file name dbprob wed for your project and click Save The Project Setup Wizard will open In the Project Setup Wizard title the project Lesson 7 Part 2 Importing Data from a Database Click Next Click the Next button again to leave this dialog set to its default values In this dialog set up the drawing as Schematic and change the three Annotation Multipliers Symbol Size Text Height and Annotation Height to 25 Click Next leave the Prototypes set to their default values and click Finished Double click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD Open the Global Optio
485. ughness values for different materials are Darcy Weisbach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits Pipe Material k mm k ft Glass drawn brass copper new 0 0015 0 000005 Seamless commercial steel new 0 004 0 000013 Commercial steel enamel coated 0 0048 0 000016 Commercial steel new 0 045 0 00015 Wrought iron new 0 045 0 00015 Asphalted cast iron new 0 12 0 0004 Galvanized iron 0 15 0 0005 Cast iron new 0 26 0 00085 Wood Stave new 0 18 0 9 0 0006 0 003 Concrete steel forms smooth 0 18 0 0006 Concrete good joints average 0 36 0 0012 Concrete rough visible form marks 0 60 0 002 Riveted steel new 0 9 9 0 0 003 0 03 Corrugated metal 45 0 15 290 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory B 4 3 Roughness Values Hazen Williams Formula Commonly used roughness values for different materials are Hazen Williams Roughness Coefficients C Pipe Material C Asbestos Cement Brass Brick sewer Cast iron New unlined 10 yr Old 20 yr Old 30 yr Old 40 yr Old Concrete or concrete lined Steel forms Wooden forms Centrifugally spun Copper Galvanized iron Glass Lead Plastic Steel Coal tar enamel lined New unlined Riveted Tin Vitrified clay good condition Wood stave average condition 140 130 140 100 130 107 113 89 100 75 90 64 83 140 120 135 130 140 120 140 130 140 140 150 145 150 140 150 110 130 110 140 120 Appendix B
486. ults to the Windows clipboard e Close Close the Status Log dialog after design calculations Notes Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries 205 12 1 Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries The Haestad Methods engineering libraries and library managers are powerful and flexible facilities for managing specifications of common materials objects or components that are shared across projects Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include pipe materials pipe sections in StormCAD and SewerCAD and dry weather loads in SewerCAD only You can modify engineering libraries and the objects they contain by using the Tools Engineering Libraries menu or by clicking the ellipsis buttons available next to the fields in dialog boxes that make use of library objects The data for each engineering library is stored in a tabular ASCII file with the extension HLB We strongly recommend that you only edit these files using the built in facilities available from the Tools Engineering Libraries menu If absolutely necessary these library files may be edited or repaired using any ASCII editor The standard set of engineering libraries shipped with your Haestad Methods product reside in the product s program directory By default each project you create will use the objects in these default libraries In special circumstances you may wish to create custom libraries to use with one or
487. unction can support multiple hydraulic demands Furthermore each demand can be assigned any hydraulic demand pattern This powerful functionality makes it possible to model any type of extended period simulation To access the Pattern Manager select the Analysis Patterns Hydraulic or Analysis Patterns Constituent menu item or click the ellipsis button next to any pattern choice list Pattern Editor A pattern is a series of time step values each having an associated multiplier value During an extended period analysis run multipliers are selected for use by comparison of their time step value with the current time steps of the Extended Period Analysis run The selected multiplier is applied to any baseline load that is associated with the pattern Defining Patterns e Label A required name to uniquely identify the pattern This name appears in the choice list when applying patterns to hydraulic demands or constituent source loads e Start Time A value between 0 and 24 that specifies the first time step point in the pattern All other pattern time step points are referenced from this start time This program automatically adjusts your pattern when you start an Extended Period Analysis at a time other than zero e Starting Multiplier The multiplier value of the first time step point in your pattern Any real number can be used for this multiplier it does not have to be 1 0 Time Step Points e Time From Start
488. ure Calculated pressure at the junction node where the fire flow withdrawal occurs Calculation Unready An element that does not have all the required information for performing an analysis C Coefficient Roughness coefficient used in the Hazen Williams Equation Check Valve Prevents water from flowing backwards through the pipe In other words water can only flow from the From Node to the To Node Closed Inactive Status See valve status 312 Glossary Constituent Any substance such as chlorine or fluoride for which the growth or decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction coefficient Context Menu A pop up menu opened by right clicking a project element or data entry field Commands on the context menu are specific to the current state of the selected item Control Status A pressure pipe can be either opened or closed Opened means that flow occurs in the pipe and closed means that no flow occurs in the pipe Conveyance Element A pipe or channel used to transport water Coordinates Distances perpendicular to a set of reference axes Some areas may have predefined coordinate systems while other coordinate systems may be arbitrary Coordinates may be presented as X and Y values or may be defined as Northing and Easting values depending on individual preferences Cross Section Type Tanks can have either a constant area cross
489. utter s n Coefficient Default value for Kutter s n This is a unitless number generally between 0 009 and 0 300 e C Coefficient Material s default value for Hazen William s C This is a unitless number generally between 60 and 150 The check boxes next to each item specify whether or not the friction method will be available for the material For example some materials such as asphalt may only have Manning s n defined Usage This dialog only applies to a Material Engineering Library It specifies the uses for which the material will be available This dialog is used frequently in StormCAD but typically is not needed for WaterCAD gt Adds the selected item s from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list gt gt Adds all of the items in the Available Items list to the Selected Items list lt Removes the selected item s from the Selected Items list lt lt Removes all items from the Selected Items list Minor Loss Properties An editable library of minor losses is provided Minor losses are used on pressure pipes and valves to model headlosses due to pipe fittings or obstructions to the flow A minor loss is defined with the following properties e Label Name of the minor loss as it will appear in choice lists e Type General type of fitting or loss element This field is used to limit the number of minor loss elements available in choice lists For example the minor loss choice lis
490. vailable in WaterCAD This column contains a checkbox indicating whether the library object on the given row is enabled for use If an object is enabled it will appear in choice lists as a candidate for use in the project If an object is disabled it will remain in the library and be editable but it will not be offered as a candidate for any operations in the program If a disabled object has already been used in a project then it will remain in use Disabling it will not affect the existing project in any way The following command buttons appear on the Engineering Library dialog e Insert Insert a new unlabeled object into the current library You must then click the Edit button to edit the label and add the appropriate values before the library will be valid Library objects will be sorted by label in ascending alphabetical order the next time you open the Engineering Library dialog e Duplicate Create a copy of the currently highlighted object at the bottom of the list e Delete Delete the object represented by the highlighted row Note that this command always deletes objects from the library but never deletes an object from your current project if it is in use To change the library object that is currently in use by a project proceed to the dialog containing the field where the library object is referenced and select a different library object e Edit Access the object properties editor e Usage Only applies to
491. valve This situation is now detected and corrected automatically but it is strongly recommended that you verify the flow direction of the pump or valve in question If you have further questions or comments related to this please contact Haestad Methods Support 3 In earlier versions of the software it was possible to create a topological situation that Sra Warning messages related to the value of a particular attribute being outside the Y accepted range can often be corrected by adjusting the allowable range for that attribute The Check Data button and the Validate check box are located on the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor which can be accessed from the Analysis Scenarios menu item 9 5 Calculate Network The following needs to be completed before performing hydraulic calculations for a network 1 Set the Calculation mode to Steady State or Extended Period If Extended Period is selected then specify the starting time the duration and the time step to be used 2 Optionally in Extended Period mode you may perform a Water Quality Analysis Set the Water Quality toggle On and select one of the three available types of calculations Age Constituent or Trace 3 Optionally in Steady State mode you may also perform a Fire Flow Analysis by setting the Fire Flow Analysis toggle 4 Optionally in the Calibration section you may modify the demand or roughness values of your entire network for calibration pur
492. vation ELEV Demand DEMAND 7 The wizard now takes you to the dialog for setting up the Pressure Pipe connections Continue by filling in the information below for the Pressure Pipe and clicking Next to proceed to the next dialog The Shapefile for each type of element will be located in the Haestad wtre lesson directory for instance select the prespipe shp file for the pressure pipe connection and the entry for Key Label Field will always be LABEL Your Field Links tables should look like the tables that follow 70 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons Pressure Pipe Shapefile Connection WaterCAD Database Unit Diameter D mm MATERIAL __ Hazen Willams PRV Shapefile Connection WaterCAD Database Unit ETevation Diameter D mm Initial HGL Initial Valve Status INITIAL_ST Pump Shapefile Connection WaterCAD Elevation Design Discharge E Maximum MAX_H Operating Head Z Maximum Opera i l MAX Q I min ting Discharge Initial Pump Status INITAL ST Reservoir Shapefile Connection WaterCAD Database Unit Elevation ELEV Tank Shapefile Connection WaterCAD Database Unit Tank Diameter Base Elevation Minimum Elevation intial HGL Maximum Elevation 8 When you are finished setting up the Shapefile connections click Next to proceed The Synchronize Now box will appear The Synchronize Shapefile Connection box should be checked and In selected because we will be r
493. ve Editor for Reservoirs The Physical Alternative editor for reservoirs is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of reservoirs which consist of the following e Elevation Elevation of the reservoir typically measured from the Mean Sea Level e Zone Specify the zone the tank belongs to You may click the ellipsis button to access the Zone Manager which allows you to edit or add zones Physical Alternative Editor for Tanks The Physical Alternative editor for tanks is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of tanks The following columns are available e Elevation Ground elevation of the tank e Base Elevation The vertical distance of the tank s base above a known datum Typically Mean Sea Level is the datum used The base elevation is the elevation from which all tank levels are computed e Minimum Elevation or Level This is the lowest possible water surface elevation for the tank If the tank drains below this level it will shut off from the system e Maximum Elevation or Level This is the highest possible water surface elevation for the tank If the tank fills above this level it will shut off from the system 154 Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives e Section The physical parameters that define the tank cross sectional geometry There are two 2 types of tank sections Constant Area and Variable Area Click this field they click th
494. velocity e Key Label Field Key by which the entire database model mapping is defined The model references each element by a unique alphanumeric label and the database must contain the same labels in one of the columns The Field Links group is a manager for the attribute mapping The tabular list in this group has three field columns e Model Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being mapped to the database The list of available attributes depends on the type of the table e Database Each item in this column is a heading from the database table which correlates to the item in the model being mapped e Unit This column defines the units of the values in the database During a synchronization operation the values will automatically be converted to the appropriate units to maintain the desired unit systems in both the model and the database No conversion on your part is required In addition to the standard table operations of Insert Duplicate and Delete the Field Links manager offers the following additional operation e Select Opens the Select Field Links dialog for an efficient method of selecting the fields of interest from the available model fields Select File Synchronize Database Connections from the main menu This will open the Database Connection Manager Click Add to create a new connection or select Edit to change an existing connection From the Database Connection tab of
495. w a new rectangular view box To change the location of the view box directly in the Aerial View window you can either drag the view box frame or create a new view box In AutoCAD mode Refer to the AutoCAD on line Help for a detailed explanation 5 5 Drawing Review The Drawing Review window allows you to quickly review and navigate to any group of elements This tool is particularly useful for finding potential problems in a network These problems may result from data entry errors or data discrepancies in the source database Shapefile or CAD drawing from which a model was imported By default when the Drawing Review window opens all elements will appear in the list You can work with any subset of elements choosing one of the following items e Select Custom This option allows you to choose any set of elements to review using the Selection Set dialog e Select All Elements This option automatically selects all available elements e Select Nodes in Close Proximity This option allows you to select all nodes that are within a user defined tolerance of a pipe but are not connected to that pipe The tolerance is defined in the Nodes in Close Proximity dialog which opens when this option is selected This tool is useful for finding and correcting connectivity problems e Select Pipe Split Candidates This option allows you to find nodes that are closer to a pipe than a user defined tolerance but are not connected The
496. w available such that the residual pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure e Minimum Zone Pressure Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within a zone The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure Each junction has a zone associated with it which can be located in the junction s input data If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node s fire flow analysis move it to another zone e Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint Toggle indicating whether a minimum pressure is to be maintained throughout the entire pipe system e Minimum System Pressure Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal If the pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow fire flow will not be satisfied Selection Set Set of selected elements where fire flows need to be analyzed You can choose between All Junctions or a Subset of Junctions that you can edit by clicking the ellipsis button and accessing the Selection Set editor Fire Flow Loads The table on the fire flow alternative editor displays the fire flow loads for the junctions in this set The values in this table reflect the default values entered unless a change is made The columns in the table are as follows e
497. want to modify You will modify the existing demand data by increasing the fire flow component at node J 6 from 2000 l min to 4000 l min Click the Add Child button and enter the name 4000 l min Fire Flow for the new Alternative and then click OK 4 The Demand Alternative editor for the new Alternative will appear showing you the data that was inherited from the Parent Alternative Notice the key at the bottom describing the check boxes As the key indicates all of your data is inherited If you change any piece of data the check box will become checked because that record is now local to this Alternative and not inherited from the Parent 44 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 3 2 Demand Alternative 4000 I min Fire Flow OF x e te l min Summary 3 el cue J tee 5 Click in the Demand Summary column for node J 6 A button appears Click this button to open the Demand table for this node Change the 2000 I min fire demand to 4000 I min and click OK Click Close to exit the Alternative Editor and return to the Alternative Manager and Close again to exit back to the drawing pane Base Data O Inherited Data Local Data Part 2 Editing and Creating Scenarios Alternatives are the building blocks of a Scenario A Scenario is a set of one of each of the ten types of Alternatives plus all of the calculation information needed to solve a model As there are Base Parent and
498. x 1 203 597 1488 e mail Support haestad com Your Suggestions Count At Haestad Methods we strive to continually provide you with sophisticated software and documentation We are very interested in hearing your suggestions for improving our products our on line Help system and our printed manuals Your feedback will guide us in developing products that will make you more productive Please let us hear from you Chapter 1 Orientation 1 5 4 How to Contact Us Internet http www haestad com Email Support haestad com Info haestad com Fax 1 203 597 1488 Phone 1 203 755 1666 Mail Haestad Methods 37 Brookside Road Waterbury CT 06708 1499 USA Notes Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 11 2 1 Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window If you are already familiar with standard Windows interfaces you will find WaterCAD to be intuitive and comfortable Even if you are not accustomed to Windows standards just a few minutes of exploring WaterCAD should be enough to acquaint you with the flexibility and power that this program offers In this chapter we will examine the program s main window menus and toolbars After reading this chapter you should be able to interact with this software in a quick and efficient manner Additional tools for layout annotating and editing are described in the chapter Layout and Editing Tools Main Window Components Stand Alone Mode AutoCAD Mode
499. ximize its potential especially for larger models containing thousands of pipes We understand that an engineer s time is a valuable commodity and we have designed our software to help make the most of that time Installing Haestad Methods Products For Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 follow these easy steps for installing a single user license copy of the program 1 Ifyou have not done so turn on your computer 2 Place the diskette labeled Disk 1 in the floppy disk drive commonly the a or b drive 3 Place the CD in your CD ROM drive commonly the d or e drive 4a If the Autorun feature of the operating system is enabled setup will begin automatically Proceed to step six 4b If Autorun is disabled click the Start button on the task bar select Run from the menu and type d setup use the actual drive letter of the CD ROM drive if it is not the d drive and then click OK 5 Follow the instructions of the Setup Wizard If you own a network license version of the software please refer to the accompanying Network License Document If you still have questions consult our online KnowledgeBase on our web site www haestad com or contact Haestad Methods technical support Uninstalling Haestad Methods Products Haestad Methods products come with an uninstall option After a single user license copy of a Haestad Methods product is installed onto a computer it must be uninstalled
500. xisting Water Main 256 A 2 8 Creating a System Head Curve 258 A 2 9 Top Feed Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank 259 A 2 10 Pump Maintaining a Constant Downstream Pressure 260 A 3 Display Tips 260 A 3 1 Changing Units in a Column 260 A 3 2 Controlling Element and Label Sizing 261 A 3 3 Color Coding Elements 261 A 3 4 Reusing Deleted Element Labels 261 A4 Editing Tips 261 A 4 1 Mouse Tips 262 A 4 2 Laying out a Pipe as a Multi segmented Polyline 262 A 4 3 Changing a Pipe into a Multi segmented Polyline 262 Appendix B WaterCAD Theory 265 B 1 Pressure Network Hydraulics 265 B 1 1 Network Hydraulics Theory 265 B 1 2 The Energy Principle 266 B 1 3 The Energy Equation 267 B 1 4 Hydraulic and Energy Grades 267 B 1 5 Conservation of Mass and Energy 268 B 1 6 The Gradient Algorithm 269 B 1 7 Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm 269 B 1 8 The Linear System Equation Solver 271 B 1 9 Pump Theory 272 B 1 10 Pump Type 274 B 1 11 Valve Theory 275 B 2 Friction and Minor Losses 275 B 2 1 Friction Method Theory 275 Table of Contents ix B 3 B 4 B 2 2 Friction Loss Methods B 2 3 Minor Losses Water Quality Analysis B 3 1 First Order Reaction Rate Function B 3 2 Reaction Rate Model B 3 3 Mass Transfer Coefficient B 3 4 Accuracy Issues in Water Quality Simulation with this Software B 3 5 Age and Source Trace Analyses B 3 6 Constituent Transport Equations B 3 7 Water Quality Modeling Approaches B 3 8 Discrete Volume Ele
501. xt Style Working with Elements 15 4 1 Edit Element 15 4 2 Deleting Elements 15 4 3 Modifying Elements Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands 15 5 1 WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities 15 5 2 AutoCAD Commands 15 5 3 Explode Elements 15 5 4 Moving Elements 15 5 5 Moving Element Labels 15 5 6 Snap Menu Undo Redo Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements 215 218 219 220 221 221 222 223 223 226 227 228 228 231 231 231 232 232 234 234 235 235 235 viii Table of Contents 15 7 1 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities 244 15 7 2 Layout Pipe Using Entity 244 15 7 3 Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes 244 15 8 Special Considerations 245 15 8 1 Import WaterCAD 245 15 8 2 Working with Proxies 245 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 247 A 1 Import Export Tips 247 A 1 1 Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD Cybernet Versions 248 A 1 2 Transitioning from Cybernet v2 249 A 1 3 Importing EPANET Files 252 A 1 4 Importing KYpipe Data 252 A 1 5 Importing Spot Elevations 252 A 1 6 Exporting Spot Elevations 252 A 1 7 Importing Database and Shapefile data created with WaterCAD v3 253 A 2 Modeling Tips 253 A 2 1 Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank 253 A 2 2 Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well 254 A 2 3 Modeling Parallel Pipes 255 A 2 4 Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series 255 A 2 5 Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks 256 A 2 6 Modeling Fire Hydrants 256 A 2 7 Modeling a Connection to an E
502. xtended period simulation Reservoirs can be used to model external water sources such as lakes streams and wells The reservoir editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs e General General reservoir information including geographical data and hydraulic results e Quality Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog e Cost Cost Analysis input output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors e User Data Additional data as defined by the user New fields can be added e Messages Calculation messages such as warnings or error messages and user defined notes and descriptions For more information on the data refer to the topics describing each tab Pump Editor A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes through it This software can currently be used to model six different pump types e Constant Power e Design Point One Point e Standard Three Point e Standard Extended e Custom Extended e Multiple Point Avoid using constant power or design point pumps They are often enticing because they require less work on behalf of the engineer but they are much less accurate than a pump curve based on several representative points It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe immediately downstream
503. y click the Help button press the F1 key or right click anywhere in the program to access context sensitive help The WaterCAD User s Guide is provided to you as a means to read and learn about WaterCAD while you are away from your computer The topics you find in the User s Guide will also be found in the on line help The on line help is typically more complete and up to date than the manual as it is refined with each new software update WaterCAD also contains on line tutorials lessons and sample files to help you become familiar with the software s features and capabilities The tutorials can be accessed by clicking Help Tutorials from the pull down menu The lessons can be found in the printed documentation as well as in the on line help The sample files are located in your Haestad Wtrc Sample directory How to Use Help All of our products feature extensive context sensitive help There are several ways to obtain help on topics Chapter 1 Orientation e To get help for the window in which you are working press the F1 key or click the Help button e To get help for a specific item right click the desired object and select Help from the pull down menu To navigate within Help e When you click text that is underlined Help jumps to a related topic or definition If the text is dashed underlined a pop up window will appear e To return to the previous topic click the Back button at the top of the
504. y inheriting the brown color also Of course if the child has already overridden a characteristic locally as with the green lenses his eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed At this point his eye color will revert to the inherited color now brown This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide scale changes to a model fixing an error and so on If rippling changes are not desired the child can override all of the parent s values or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a child C 10 When are values local and when are they inherited Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and the alternatives that it references If the alternatives happen to have children those children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that attribute The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid level alternative Inherited values are shown as gray text local values are shown as black text Appendix C Scenario Management Guide 299 A Mid level Hierarchy Alternative Change Alternative Hierarchy Alternative Hierarchy Condition 1 Change Condition 1 L Condition 2 Condition 3 L Condition 2 L Condition 3 _P Value to gt L Condition 3 L Condition 4 200 L Condition 4 L Condition 5 L Condition 5 C 11 Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase just l
505. y objects can be moved and erased However doing so will put the drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved with its original name If this happens and you later reload the drawing on an AutoCAD station that is running a WaterCAD application the application will automatically attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by automatically loading its Database Synchronization routine Notes Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions 247 A 1 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions Tips are available in the following categories Importing Exporting Modeling Display Editing Extensive up to date tips are available at your finger tips by clicking the S button This will take you to Haestad Methods web site where you will be able to look up Frequently Asked Questions FAQs in our KnowledgeBase and do a search on any keyword s This is available if you are participating in the ClientCare program of the Help window for an index To make your work easier WaterCAD and the Help system are designed to be used together If you have a high resolution display monitor you will probably find it helpful to size the frames of both the program and the Help windows so that they fit side by side Then while using the program you can use the right mouse button or the Help button in any dialog box to update the Help window with If the information you need is not available in this section click the
506. y opens an editing dialog for working with multiple demands on a junction Setting up multiple demand alternatives makes it possible to easily manage different loading conditions for any network For example an Average Day demand alternative contains the average demands for each junction in the network and a Peak Day demand alternative contains the peak demands for each junction in the network The Alternative Manager allows you to create any number of demand alternatives Vly Q 5 This program allows multiple demands to be attributed to a single junction 8 1 5 Initial Settings Alternative The following types of network elements have initial settings e Pipes e Pumps e Tanks e Pressure Valves e FCVs Flow Control Valves e TCVs Throttle Control Valves Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 155 Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pipes The Initial Settings Alternative for pipes is used to specify if the pipe status is initially Open or Closed Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pumps The Pump Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for pumps The fields for each record are as follows e Status Indicates whether the pump is initially On or Off e Relative Speed Factor Determines the initial speed of the pump impeller relative to the speed at which the pump curve is defined Initial Settings Alternative Editor f
507. y to create and customize materials and composite minor loss coefficients respectively Set the minor loss coefficient value to 0 0 if there is no minor loss in the pipe Composite Minor Loss Pressure pipes can have an unlimited number of minor loss elements associated with them This program provides an easy to use table for editing these minor losses The composite minor loss table consists of four columns Quantity Minor Loss K Each and K Total Each row represents a group of similar minor losses e Quantity The number of minor losses of the same type to be added to the composite minor loss for the pipe e Minor Loss The type of minor loss element e K Each The headloss coefficient for a single minor loss element of the specified type Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 117 e K Total The total minor loss coefficient for the row It is the Quantity multiplied by K Each The composite minor loss dialog also has three command buttons e Insert Insert a row in the table e Duplicate Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected row e Delete Delete the selected row of the table Initial Status Section The Initial Status of the pipe can be either Open or Closed The status can possibly change when calculations are performed based on the presence of controls for that pipe In Steady State Analysis mode in WaterCAD the Initial Status is used as the J permane
508. you have determined an alternative that works best for your system you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base alternative if you wish Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative will be changed when the base alternative changes Only local data specific to a child alternative will remain unchanged 8 1 1 Alternatives Manager The Alternatives dialog is the central location for managing the alternatives in your project It allows you to edit create and manage the various types of alternatives It also gives you more advanced capabilities such as merging alternatives and creating child alternatives The available alternatives of each type are conveniently organized in a tree view The network element data is grouped into the following types e Physical e Demand e Initial Settings e Operational e Age e Constituent e Trace e Fire Flow e Cost e User Data Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 151 8 1 2 On the right side of the dialog are a number of buttons that provide functions for managing the alternatives The following list provides a brief description of the function of each of these buttons Add Create a new base alternative first prompting for a name and then opening an Alternatives editor Base alternatives are initialized with the first data set entered either in tables or specific element dialogs Add Child Create a new child alternative that
509. ype 312 Crosshair Location 27 Crosshairs 312 CulvertMaster 306 Current Storage Volume 312 Cursor Location 27 Curve Pump 120 121 272 273 274 System Head 258 259 Curved Pipes 262 Custom AutoCAD Entities 242 Index 321 Custom Extended 274 Custom Sort 145 Customize Database 213 Drawing 93 94 95 238 Labels 146 Libraries 205 Tables 145 D Darcy Weisbach Colebrook White Equation 278 Equation 277 Roughness Values 289 Data Check 165 170 171 Entry 29 132 299 300 Organization 149 Validation 170 Database 211 212 See also External File Export 213 214 215 Import 16 214 215 ODBC 218 219 Synchronization Options 216 Table Link Editor 217 Database Connection 211 215 216 312 Editor 215 Example 220 Manager 213 ODBC 219 Standard 213 214 215 DBMS 312 Default 132 Delete Elements 103 241 Table 140 Demand 124 312 Alternative 154 Graph 193 Multipliers 177 Pattern 176 Design Point 120 274 312 Detailed Report 191 Diameter 312 Diffusivity 208 Discharge 312 Discrete Volume Element Method 286 Display Precision 96 Display Tips 260 Change Units in a Column 260 Color Code Elements 261 Control Element Label Sizing 261 Reuse Deleted Element Labels 261 Double Click 313 Drafting 103 200 Drag 313 Drawing Options 88 89 93 Pane 13 Preview 234 Review 106 107 231 Sc
510. ysis is visible as the current Scenario and set up color coding using the procedure from Part 1 but color code by Calculated Concentration instead of Calculated Age Scroll through the time steps to view how the concentrations change throughout the network When you look at your results using color coding tables and graphs try to discover what better initial values for chlorine concentration might be 64 Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 3 6 3 3 7 Part 3 Performing a Trace Analysis A trace analysis determines the percentage of water at all nodes and links in the system from a specific source node the trace node In systems with more than one source it is common to perform multiple trace analyses using the various source nodes as the trace nodes in successive analyses For this run we will perform a trace analysis to determine the percentages of water coming from the tank 1 Select Analysis Alternatives from the pull down menus Select the Trace tab and click the Add button Name the new Alternative Trace Analysis for Tank and click OK In the Trace Node list box select the tank T 1 Leave the initial percentages set to zero and close the editor and the Alternative Manager Alternatives x Physical Demand Initial Settings l Operational Age l Constituent Trace Fire Flow Co 4p Eh Add Add Child Edit Merge Rename Duplicate Delete Report 2 Next

USER`S GUIDE - Belcheff & Associates, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

USER`S GUIDE - Belcheff &amp; Associates, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

USER`S GUIDE - Belcheff & Associates, Inc.